East Wastewater Treatment Plant Anaerobic Digester Rehabilitation

SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION

FOR

LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT LAFAYETTE, LOUISIANA

JOEL ROBIDEAUX Mayor - President

KEVIN NAQUIN JAY CASTILLE PATRICK LEWIS City/Parish Council Dist. 1 City/Parish Council Dist. 2 City/Parish Council Dist. 3

KENNETH BOUDREAUX JARED BELLARD BRUCE M CONQUE City/Parish Council Dist. 4 City/Parish Council Dist. 5 City/Parish Council Dist. 6

NANETTE COOK LIZ W. HEBERT WILLIAM THERIOT City/Parish Council Dist. 7 City/Parish Council Dist. 8 City/Parish Council Dist. 9

TERRY HUVAL, P.E. Lafayette Utilities System Director

BRYAN GUIDRY, P.E. Chief Civil Engineer

ABCD

December 2017 4/2/2018

EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION for LAFAYETTE UTILITIES SYSTEM LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT LAFAYETTE, LOUISIANA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING & CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS LCG Conflict of Interest Policy Contractor’s License Notice Corporate Resolution Information 00020 Notice to Bidders 00100 Information for Bidders 00700 General Conditions of the Contract 00820 Special Conditions Lafayette City Ordinance Small and Emerging Business Packet Vendor Information Form 00300 Contractor's Bid Form 00320 Bid or Proposal Bond 00330 Attestation Affidavit 00500 Contract Form 00610 Performance and Payment Bond 00310 Affidavit 00321 Insurance Certificate

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01068 Definitions & Standards 01070 Abbreviations & Symbols 01150 Schedules, Reports, Payments 01205 Procedures & Controls 01340 Submittals 01505 Temporary Facilities 01605 Products & Substitutions 01705 Project Close-Out 01710 Cleaning

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK 02200 Earthwork 02719 Piping 02900 Seeding And Hydro-Seeding

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

4752.02 1 Contents

DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05500 Metal Fabrications 05525 Aluminum Handrails And Railings

DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 61053 Miscellaneous Carpentry

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 75216 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 76200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 79200 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 84113 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Vent Windows 84213 Aluminum-Framed Entrances 87100 Door Hardware 88000 Glazing

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09900 Painting

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10200 Louvers and Vents 10520 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories

DIVISION 11 – TREATMENT EQUIPMENT & PUMPS 11300 Sludge Pumps 11375 Sludge Digester Mechanical Mixer 11380 Sludge Digester Boiler and Heat Exchanger 11385 Secondary Digester Floating Cover 11390 Digester Gas System Equipment

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 16050 Basic Electrical Material and Methods 16060 Grounding & Bonding 16120 Conductors and Cables 16130 Raceways and Boxes 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16700 Instrumentation and Controls

4752.02 2 Contents

LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT CONFLICT OF INTEREST POLICY

TO AVOID ANY POSSIBLE CONFLICTS OF INTEREST, IT IS THE POLICY OF THE LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT THAT NO DIRECT OR INDIRECT PURCHASES OF ANY GOODS OR SERVICES WILL BE MADE FROM EMPLOYEES.

ACCORDINGLY, IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED THIS BID OR QUOTE PACKAGE, AND IF YOU ARE AN EMPLOYEE OF THE LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT, OR IF ANY MEMBER OF YOUR COMPANY IS A LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEE, PLEASE DO NOT SUBMIT A BID OR QUOTE FOR THE PRODUCT, GOOD, OR SERVICE REQUESTED BECAUSE WE CANNOT, NOR WILL WE ACCEPT THE BID OR QUOTE.

THIS DOCUMENT CONSTITUTES OFFICIAL NOTIFICATON OF THE LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT’S CONFLICT OF INTEREST POLICY, AND THUS, ESTABLISHES THE REQUIREMENT THAT THE INDIVIDUAL OR COMPANY IN RECEIPT OF THIS REQUEST FOR BID OR QUOTE IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR NOTIFYING LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT THAT A CONFLICT OF INTEREST EXISTS.

PLEASE CONTRACT THE PURCHASING DIVISION AT (337) 291-8258 AND SPEAK WITH THE INDIVIDUAL ADMINISTERING THE PURCHASING PROCESS.

IMPORTANT

IF YOU ARE SUBMITTING A BID FOR LABOR & MATERIAL PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT:

THE COMPANY NAME WHICH APPEARS ON THE BID ENVELOPE IS THE EXACT SAME NAME AS THAT FOR WHICH YOU ARE LICENSED BY THE STATE OF LOUISIANA LICENSING BOARD;

YOU MUST BE LICENSED FOR THE CLASS AS STATED IN THE NOTICE TO BIDDERS AND INSURE THAT STATE OF LOUISIANA LICENSE NUMBER APPEARS ON THE ENVELOPE IF YOUR BID IS FIFTY THOUSAND DOLLARS ($50,000) OR MORE.

IMPORTANT IMPORTANT NOTICE REGARDING CORPORATE RESOLUTION

A CORPORATE RESOLUTION AUTHORIZING THE PERSON SIGNING THE BID MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH YOUR BID. THIS RESOLUTION MUST BE SIGNED BY AN OFFICER OR REGISTERED AGENT OF THE COMPANY WHO IS CURRENTLY LISTED WITH THE SECRETARY OF STATE. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THE CORPORATE RESOLUTION WITH YOUR BID SHALL BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OF BID. NOTE: SECRETARY OF STATE BUSINESS LISTING SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED AS A CORPORATE

Example

Company Letterhead Address Phone Fax Certificate of Authority

Lafayette Consolidated Government Attn: ______705 West University Ave. Lafayette, LA 70502

Re: Specific Project Name or left blank for Any Project

To Whom It May Concern, I, individually and on behalf of Company Name, do by my signature below, certify that: Company Name is a limited liability company (if LLC, or define type) duly organized and existing under the laws of Louisiana ; I am the Secretary, an officer of the Company, authorized to sign on its behalf: and Name , President, is an officer of the Company authorized to make, execute and approve, on behalf of this Company, any and all contracts, or amendments thereof, entered into by and between Company Name and the Lafayette Consolidated Government.

In witness whereof, I hereby set my hand this____day of ______, 2018.

Signature

Name Company Title Company Name Phone Fax Etc.

Notary Seal NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS

Notice is hereby given that sealed bids will be received either electronically at https://smartsourceprod.lafayettela.gov/sourcing/SourcingSupplier/lm?service=go&stack=1&context.dataarea=sourci ng&context.session.key.SupplierGroup=100 or in the office of the Purchasing Division at the Lafayette Consolidated Government Building, located at 705 West University Avenue, Lafayette, Louisiana, until 10:00 a.m. Central Time on the 10th day of May, 2018 for the following:

EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION and will, shortly thereafter, be opened and read aloud in the Council Briefing Room located at 705 West University Avenue, Lafayette, LA. Bids received after the above specified time for opening shall not be considered and shall be returned unopened to the sender. Sealed bids may be hand carried or mailed to the address listed above.

The work includes the removal of existing boiler, heat exchanger, gas mixing equipment, floating secondary roof, pumps, valves, and other equipment associated with the anaerobic digesters, the installation of a new boiler/heat exchanger, sludge pump, floating roof, piping and valves, structural work, gas lines and appurtenances, piping, instrumentation and controls, electrical facilities and other appurtenant and related items of construction. Work to be completed within 365 calendar days.

In accordance with Louisiana RS 38:2212., contractors may submit their bid electronically at the website listed above . Bidding documents are available to view only at the website. Contractors may request the electronic bid package from Lafayette Consolidated Government Department of Purchasing & Property Management Attn: Lakesha 337-291-8263.

Contractors wishing to submit their bid electronically must first be registered online with Lafayette Consolidated Government as a potential supplier at the website listed above.

Contractors submitting bids electronically are required to provide the same documents as contractors submitting through the mail or by hand delivery. Regardless of the bid results, the contractor will have 48 hours from opening of the bids to provide the Lafayette Consolidated Government the original bid documents. Only a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check shall be submitted as the bid security. Electronic copies of both the front and back of the bid security shall be included with the electronic bid. If a contractor fails to provide the original hard copies of the bid documents within 48 hours of the bid opening, their bid shall be considered non responsive.

Bids must be signed in accordance with LRS Title 38:2212(B)5. A Corporate Resolution authorizing the person signing the bid is required to be submitted with bid. Failure to submit a Corporate Resolution with the bid shall be cause for rejection of bid.

Copies of the specifications are available at the office of Domingue, Szabo & Associates, Inc. Asma Boulevard, Suite 305 Lafayette, LA 70508; telephone number (337) 232-5182 (Attn: Chris Richard), upon payment of one hundred fifty dollars ($150.00) per set (non-refundable), payable to Lafayette Consolidated Government. NOTE: NO CASH WILL BE ACCEPTED – ONLY CHECKS OR MONEY ORDERS MADE PAYABLE TO LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT. If a bidder wishes to have plans shipped, prior prepaid shipping arrangements must be made by the vendor. Plans and specifications shall be available until twenty-four (24) hours before the bid opening date.

All contractors are requested to attend a Pre-Bid Conference scheduled for 10 a.m. Central Time, Wednesday, April 25, 2018 at the East Wastewater Treatment Plant at 144 Judy Street, Lafayette, LA 70501.

Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified check, cashier’s check, or bid bond payable to the Lafayette Consolidated Government, the amount of which shall be five percent (5%) of the base bid plus additive alternates. If a bid bond is used, it shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A-Rating in the latest printing of the A.M. Best’s Key Rating Guide to write individual bonds up to ten percent (10%) of policyholders’ surplus as shown in the A.M. Best’s Key Rating Guide, or by an insurance company in good standing licensed to write bid bonds which is either domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents. The bid bond shall be issued by a company licensed to do business in Louisiana. The certified check, cashier’s check, or bid bond shall be given as a guarantee that the bidder shall execute the contract, should it be awarded to him, in conformity with the contract documents within ten (10) days.

No contractor submitting a bid may withdraw his bid for at least forty-five (45) days after the time scheduled for the opening of bids. Each bid shall be submitted only on the bid form provided with the specifications. The successful contractor will be required to execute performance and labor and material payment bonds in the full amount of the contract as more fully defined in the bid documents.

Bids will be evaluated by the Purchaser based on the lowest responsible and responsive bid submitted which is also in compliance with the bid documents. The Lafayette Consolidated Government reserves the right to reject any and all bids or any portions thereof, to waive informalities and to select the material that best suites its needs.

Contractors or contracting firms submitting bids in the amount of $50,000.00 or more shall certify that they are licensed contractors under Chapter 24 of Title 37 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 and show their license number on the front of the sealed envelope in which their bid is enclosed. Contractors shall be licensed for the classification of “MUNICIPAL AND PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION”. Bids in the amounts specified above which have not bid in accordance with the requirements, shall be rejected and shall not be read. Additional information relative to licensing may be obtained from the Louisiana State Licensing Board for Contractors, Baton Rouge, Louisiana.

The Lafayette Consolidated Government strongly encourages the participation of DBEs (Disadvantaged Business Enterprises) in all contracts or procurements let by the Lafayette Consolidated Government for goods and services and labor and material. To that end, all contractors and suppliers are encouraged to utilize DBEs business enterprises in the purchase or sub-contracting of materials, supplies, services and labor and material in which disadvantaged businesses are available. Assistance in identifying said businesses may be obtained by calling 291-8410.

PURCHASING DIVISION Lafayette Consolidated Government

PUBLISH DATES: 4/11/18; 4/15/18; 4/22/18 DPR # 900987 Affidavit of Publication

Information for Bidders Revised February 2017

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

ARTICLE 1 - PRINTED FORM FOR BID

Bids must be submitted on the Bid Form found in the Contract Documents. Bids should be clearly and legibly filled out in ink and/or typewritten and must contain the signature or facsimile thereof of the Bidder or an authorized representative. The Consolidated Government shall have the right to reject any bid in the event that it is unable to reasonably determine the information and bids supplied by the Bidder as a result of the manner and method by which the Bidder has completed the Bid Form.

Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope showing the name and address of the Bidder and shall be mailed to Lafayette Consolidated Government, Purchasing Division, P.O. Box 4017-C, Lafayette, LA 70502, or hand delivered to the Lafayette Consolidated Government, Purchasing Division, 705 W. University Avenue, Lafayette, Louisiana, and show the name of the bid on the outside of the envelope.

In the event that the Detailed Specifications, Information for Bidders or Special Conditions differ from the General Conditions, the Special Conditions shall take precedence over the Detailed Specifications. The Detailed Specifications shall take precedence over the Information for Bidders and General Conditions. The Information for Bidders shall take precedence over the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 2 - SIGNATURE AUTHORITY OF BIDDER

In accordance with LRS Title 38:2212(B)5,

Written evidence of the authority of the person signing the bid for public works shall be submitted at the time of bidding . The authority of the signature of the person submitting the bid shall be deemed sufficient and acceptable if any of the following conditions are met: (a) The signature on the bid is that of any corporate officer listed on the most current annual report on file with the secretary of state, or the signature on the bid is that of any member of a partnership, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, or other legal entity listed in the most current business records on file with the secretary of state. (b) The signature on the bid is that of an authorized representative as documented by the legal entity certifying the authority of the person. (c) The legal entity has filed in the appropriate records of the secretary of state of this state, an affidavit, resolution, or other acknowledged or authentic document indicating the names of all parties authorized to submit bids for public contracts. Such document on file with the secretary of state shall remain in effect and shall be binding upon the principal until specifically rescinded and canceled from the records of the office. NOTE: LCG requires that written evidence of the authority of the person signing the bid is required regardless of whether the project is for public works or not. This written evidence shall be included with the vendor’s sealed bid.

ARTICLE 3 - SUBMISSION OF BID

Bids will be received only in the office of the Purchasing Manager and will, shortly thereafter, be opened and publicly read aloud as stated in the Bid Notice. It is the sole responsibility of the Bidder to see that his bid is delivered to the Purchasing Agent before the scheduled date and time of the bid opening. Any bid received after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids will be returned unopened to the Bidder. A conditional or qualified bid will not be accepted.

4752.02 2 00100 Information for Bidders Revised February 2017

ARTICLE 4 - OPENING OF BIDS

Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at the date and time set forth in the Notice to Bidders. Bidders who do not submit bid security, when required, may cause rejection of their bid.

ARTICLE 5 - DETERMINATION OF BID PRICES

In unit price bids, the total amount quoted shall be in the sum of the correct extensions of the unit price bid on each item of work, multiplied by the estimated contract quantity of work shown for the respective item. Each extension shall be carried to one hundredth of a dollar, and the last digit in the extension (or cents place) shall not be rounded off; i.e., any portion of a cent appearing in the extended amount shall be dropped from the amount. The determination of bid for award of a Contract shall be made by the summation of extensions of all unit prices to reach a total amount bid.

When called for on the Bid Form, prices should be shown both in words and in figures. In the event of a discrepancy between the prices quoted in words and those quoted in figures in the bid, the words shall govern. In the event that the Bidder does not show prices in both words and in figures, the bid shall be tabulated in accordance with the form of the price provided. In case of a conflict between unit prices and the extended total price, the unit price shall govern.

The prices are to include the furnishing of all materials, plant, equipment, tools and all other facilities, and the performance of all labor services necessary or proper for the completion of the work except as may be otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 6 - ALTERATIONS IN BIDS

The Contractor's Bid Form invites bids on definite plans and specifications. Only the amounts and information asked in the Bid Form furnished herein will be considered as the bid. Each Bidder shall bid upon the work exactly as specified and as provided in the bid.

ARTICLE 7 - ERASURES

Bidders should avoid making mistakes, delineations or other corrections on bids, since such may make it difficult for the Consolidated Government to ascertain the information contained in the bid. In the event that a Bidder must make such corrections to a bid, the corrections should be made in such a manner that the information contained on the Bid Form can be fairly and reasonably discerned and ascertained by the Consolidated Government. The Consolidated Government shall have the right to reject any bid in the event that it is unable to reasonably determine the information and bids supplied by the Bidder therein.

ARTICLE 8 - REJECTION OF BIDS

The Consolidated Government reserves the right to reject any and all bids. The Consolidated Government also reserves the right to reject any and all bids should the total bid be in excess of appropriated funds and additional funding cannot be made available. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any bid which is incomplete, obscure, or irregular may be rejected; any bid which omits a bid on any one or more items in the Bid Form may be rejected; any bid in which unit prices are omitted or in which unit prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected; any bid accompanied by an insufficient or irregular bid security may be rejected.

ARTICLE 9 - ACCEPTANCE OF BID

Within forty-five (45) calendar days after the date of opening of the bids, unless mutually extended, the Consolidated Government will act upon them. The acceptance of the bid will be a Notice of Acceptance in writing signed by a duly authorized representative of the Consolidated Government. The acceptance of the bid shall bind the successful Bidder to execute the Contract and to be responsible for liquidated damages as provided for herein. The rights and obligations provided for in the Contract shall become effective and binding upon the parties only upon its formal execution.

4752.02 2 00100

Information for Bidders Revised February 2017

ARTICLE 10 - TIME FOR EXECUTING CONTRACT AND DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO EXECUTE

Any Contractor whose bid is accepted shall be required to execute the Contract within ten (10) days (unless an extension of time is granted by Lafayette Consolidated Government) after notice that the Contract has been awarded to him. Failure or neglect to do so shall constitute a breach of the agreement affected by the acceptance of the bid.

The damages to the Consolidated Government for such breach shall include loss from interference with his construction program and other items, the accurate amount of which will be difficult or impossible to compute. The amount of bid security accompanying the bid of such Bidder shall be retained or proceeded against as liquidated damages for such breach. In the event any Contractor whose bid is accepted shall fail or refuse to execute the Contract as herein before provided, the Consolidated Government at its option may determine that such Contractor has abandoned the Contract and thereon the bid and the acceptance therefore shall be null and void and the Consolidated Government will be entitled to liquidated damages.

ARTICLE 11 - QUALIFICATION OF BIDDER

The Consolidated Government may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work, and the Bidder shall furnish to the Consolidated Government all such information and data for this purpose as the Consolidated Government may request. The Consolidated Government reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the Consolidated Government that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein.

ARTICLE 12 - BID SECURITY

Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified check, cashier's check, or bid bond payable to the Lafayette Consolidated Government, State of Louisiana, the amount of which shall be five percent (5%) of the base bid plus any additive alternates. Any Bidder not furnishing bid security, when required, may cause rejection of his bid.

The successful Bidder's Bid Security shall be given as a guarantee that the Bidder shall execute the Contract, should it be awarded to him, in conformity with the Contract Documents. Should the Consolidated Government make an award to a Bidder who refuses to enter into a Contract, the bid security shall be forfeited to the Lafayette Consolidated Government as liquidated damages.

The successful Bidder's Bid Security will be retained until he has entered into a satisfactory Contract. The Consolidated Government reserves the right to hold the Bid Security of the three lowest bidders until the successful Bidder has entered into a Contract and furnished performance and payment bonds, each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price, with a corporate surety approved by the Consolidated Government.

If a bid bond is used, it shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register. The bid bond shall be issued by a company licensed to do business in the State of Louisiana. The bid bond must be equivalent to five percent 5% of the base bid plus any additive alternates, but does not have to specify the amount in dollars and cents.

Notwithstanding the aforesaid, in the event that a Bidder furnishes a bid bond which does not fully comply with the provisions of this Article, but which is otherwise a legally valid and enforceable bond, the Consolidated Government may allow such Bidder to amend his bid bond following the opening of bids in order to bring the bond in conformity with the requirements of this Article and/or the requirements of LA. R.S. 38:2218, or may permit the Bidder to substitute other security in place of the bid bond submitted.

4752.02 2 00100

Information for Bidders Revised February 2017

It is requested that agents signing bonds, type their name and license number below their respective signature.

ARTICLE 13 - POWER OF ATTORNEY

Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or Contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney.

ARTICLE 14 - WITHDRAWAL OF BID

A bid containing patently obvious unintentional, and substantial mechanical, clerical, or mathematical errors, or errors of unintentional omission of a substantial quantity of work, labor, material, or services made directly in the compilation of the bid, may be withdrawn by the contractor if clear and convincing sworn, written evidence of such errors is furnished to Lafayette Consolidated Government within forty-eight hours of the bid opening excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays. Such errors must be clearly shown by objective evidence drawn from inspection of the original work papers, documents, or materials used in the preparation of the bid sought to be withdrawn. If Lafayette Consolidated Government determines that the error is a patently obvious mechanical, clerical, or mathematical error, or unintentional omission of a substantial quantity of work, labor, material, or services, as opposed to a judgment error, and that the bid was submitted in good faith it shall accept the withdrawal and return the bid security to the contractor.

A contractor who attempts to withdraw a bid under the provisions of this Section shall not be allowed to resubmit a bid on the project. If the bid withdrawn is the lowest bid, the next lowest bid may be accepted. If all bids are rejected no withdrawal of the bid which would result in the award of the contract on another bid of same bidder, his partner, or to a corporation or business venture owned by or in which he has an interest shall be permitted. No bidder who is permitted to withdraw a bid shall supply any material or labor to, or perform any subcontract work agreement for, any person to whom a contract or subcontract, is awarded in the performance of the contract for which the withdrawn bid was submitted.

ARTICLE 15 – POSTPONEMENT OF DATE FOR PRESENTING AND OPENING BIDS

The Consolidated Government reserves the right to postpone the date for receipt and opening of bids and will give written or telegraphic notice of any such postponement to all persons to whom drawings and specifications have been issued, at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids.

ARTICLE 16 - ADDENDA

Bidders desiring further information, or interpretation of the plans or specifications, must make written request for such information to the Purchasing Division at least seven (7) days before the bid opening. Answers to all such requests will be given in writing to all Bidders, in addendum form, and all addenda will be bound with, and made part of, the Contract Documents. No other explanation or interpretation will be considered official or binding.

Should a Bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the plans or specifications or other Contract Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he should at once notify the Purchasing Division in order that a written addenda may be sent to all Bidders. Any addenda modifying plans and specifications within a period of seven days prior to the time for the opening of bids shall be sent to prime bidders who have requested bid documents. The addendum may be delivered by either facsimile transmission, e-mail, other electronic means, or by hand and shall also be sent by regular mail.

The bid as submitted by the Contractor will be construed as to include any addenda if such are issued by the Purchasing Division prior to seventy-two (72) hours of the opening of bids. If the necessity arises to issue an addendum modifying plans and specifications within a seventy-two (72) hour period prior to the advertised time for the opening of bids, then,

4752.02 2 00100

Information for Bidders Revised February 2017

the Bid opening shall be extended for at least seven days, but not more than twenty-one working days, without the requirement of re-advertising.

ARTICLE 17 - LAWS AND REGULATIONS

The Bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable state laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract.

ARTICLE 18 - BRAND NAME SPECIFICATIONS

Whenever in the specifications, the name of a certain brand, make, manufacturer, or definite specification is utilized, it is to denote the quality standard of article desired, but does not restrict Bidders to the specific brand, make, manufacturer, or specification named; it is to set forth and convey to prospective Bidders the general style, type, character, and quality of article desired.

ARTICLE 19 - CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE

On any bid submitted in the amount of $50,000 or more, the Contractor shall certify that he is licensed under Louisiana's Contractor's Licensing Law R.S. 37:2150-2164 and shall show his license number on the sealed envelope submitting the bid.

ARTICLE 20 - AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION

In accordance with Louisiana Law, if the Contract is awarded to the Bidder, he shall, at the time of the signing of the Contract, execute the Affidavit of Non-Collusion included in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 21 - AWARD

This bid will be awarded on a basis of the sum of the base bid, and (when applicable) any alternates if alternates are accepted, to the low responsible Bidder who has bid according to the Contract, plans and specifications as advertised. Alternates, if accepted, shall be accepted in the order in which they are listed on the Bid Form. However, Lafayette Consolidated Government reserves the right to accept alternates in any order which does not affect determination of the low Bidder.

ARTICLE 22 - NOTICE TO PROCEED

No work on this Contract shall commence until the Consolidated Government has issued a written "Notice to Proceed" directing the Contractor to proceed according to the Contract Documents.

The Contractor will be required to commence work under this Contract within ten (10) calendar days from date of receipt of the written Notice to Proceed, and he shall be required to complete all work on the project within the number of days stated on the Contract Form.

ARTICLE 23 - PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

Within ten days of the date of receipt of the Consolidated Government's written Notice to Proceed, the Contractor and/or his project superintendent shall meet with the representative of the Consolidated Government for a pre-construction conference. The proposed construction schedule shall be submitted by the Contractor at this meeting. Procedures for administering the Contract will be discussed. The meeting shall be held at a location designated by the Consolidated Government.

4752.02 2 00100

Information for Bidders Revised February 2017

ARTICLE 24 - PARTICIPATION BY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES BUSINESS

The Lafayette Consolidated Government strongly encourages the participation of DBEs (Disadvantaged Business Enterprise) in all contracts or procurements let by the Lafayette Consolidated Government for goods and service and labor and material. To that end, all contractors and suppliers are encouraged to utilize DBEs business enterprises in the purchase or sub-contracting of materials, supplies, services and labor and material in which disadvantaged businesses are available. Assistance in identifying said businesses may be obtained by calling (337) 291-8410.

ARTICLE 25 – SMOKE-FREE WORKPLACE

The Lafayette Consolidated Government is a smoke-free environment and, as such, prohibits smoking in all facilities for events including, but not limited to, conferences, meetings, seminars, etc. Please abide by this policy when in our facilities.

4752.02 2 00100 Page 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

SECTION II GENERAL CONDITIONS INDEX

PAGE ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3 ARTICLE 2 - DEFINITIONS 3 ARTICLE 3 - EXECUTION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4 ARTICLE 4 - BIDDER’S UNDERSTANDING 4 ARTICLE 4A - WITHDRAWAL OF BID 5 ARTICLE 5 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 5 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACT TIME 6 ARTICLE 7 - DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME 8 ARTICLE 8 - ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND DETAIL DRAWINGS 8 ARTICLE 9 - SHOP DRAWINGS 8 ARTICLE 10 - MATERIALS, SERVICES, FACILITIES AND EMPLOYEES 8 ARTICLE 11 - INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS 9 ARTICLE 12 - PATENTS AND TAXES 10 ARTICLE 13 - SURVEYS, PERMITS, RIGHTS-OF-WAY, EASEMENTS AND REGULATIONS 10 ARTICLE 14 - PLANS AND WORKING DRAWINGS 11 ARTICLE 15 - CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATION 12 ARTICLE 16 - PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND LIVES 12 ARTICLE 17 - SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR 13 ARTICLE 18 - INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES OF WORK 13 ARTICLE 19 - CHANGE ORDERS, PAYMENT FOR EXTRA OR DELETED WORK 13 ARTICLE 20 - CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST 14 ARTICLE 21 - CORRECTION OF WORK 14 ARTICLE 22 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK 15 ARTICLE 23 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE OR CONVENIENCE 15 ARTICLE 24 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT 16 ARTICLE 25 - TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK 17 ARTICLE 26 - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS 17 ARTICLE 27 - ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION, TELEPHONE, AND CABLE TELEVISION FACILITIES 17 ARTICLE 28 - UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 17 ARTICLE 29 - WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 18 ARTICLE 30 - PAYMENT 18 ARTICLE 31 - PAYMENTS WITHHELD 19 ARTICLE 32 - CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE 20 ARTICLE 33 - BUILDERS RISK INSURANCE (WHEN REQUIRED) 22 ARTICLE 34 - PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND 23 ARTICLE 35 - ASSIGNMENT 24

4752.02 1 00700

Page 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 36 - LIENS 25 ARTICLE 37 - SEPARATE CONTRACTS 25 ARTICLE 38 - SUBCONTRACTS 25 ARTICLE 39 - ENGINEER'S/ARCHITECT’S AUTHORITY 26 ARTICLE 40 - INSPECTION 26 ARTICLE 41 - AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTOR 27 ARTICLE 42 - FINAL CLEANING UP 27 ARTICLE 43 - REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT 27 ARTICLE 44 - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 27 ARTICLE 45 - FINAL INSPECTION 29 ARTICLE 46 - WARRANTY WORK 29 ARTICLE 47 - NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF 30 ARTICLE 48 - PROHIBITED INTERESTS 30 ARTICLE 49 - PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY 30 ARTICLE 50 - COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC UTILITIES 30 ARTICLE 51 - SANITARY ARRANGEMENTS 30 ARTICLE 52 - INDEMNIFICATION 31 ARTICLE 53 - EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY 31 ARTICLE 54 - BUDGETED FUNDS 33 ARTICLE 55 - NON-APPROPRIATION OF FUNDS 33 ARTICLE 56 - PARTICIPATION BY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES 33 ARTICLE 57 - STOCKPILED MATERIALS 33 ARTICLE 58 - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 34 ARTICLE 59 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 34

4752.02 2 00700

Page 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contract Documents consist of the Notice to Bidders, Information for Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Contractor's Bid Form, Bid Security, Contract Form, Affidavit of Non-Collusion, Performance and Payment Bonds, Insurance Certificate, Addenda, including all properly authorized modifications thereof incorporated in the documents before their execution and all properly authorized modifications made subsequent thereto.

ARTICLE 2 - DEFINITIONS

The following terms as used in this contract are respectively defined as follows: a) “Bidder” - Any individual, firm or corporation submitting a proposal for the work contemplated acting directly or through a duly authorized representative. b) “Contractor” - A person, firm or corporation with whom the contract is made by the Owner. c) “Engineer/Architect” - The Engineer/Architect for the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government or his authorized representative. d) “Inspector” - An authorized representative of the Engineer/Architect assigned to make any and all inspections of the work performed and the materials furnished by the Contractor. e) “Or Equal” - The Engineer/Architect shall be the sole judge of the quality and suitability of any proposed substitution. f) “Owner” - Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government. g) “Subcontractor” - A Person, firm or corporation supplying labor for work at the site of the project, for and under separate contract or agreement with the Contractor. h) “Surety” - Any firm or corporation which is bound with and for the Contractor, who is primarily liable, and which engages to be responsible for his payment of all obligations pertaining to and for his acceptable performance of the work for which he has contracted. i) “Work” - Work to be performed at the location of the project, including the transportation of materials and supplies to or from the location of the project by employees of the Contractor and Subcontractor. j) “Written Notice” - Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.

4752.02 3 00700

Page 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 k) “Satisfactory” - Shall mean satisfactory to the Engineer/Architect and Owner.

ARTICLE 3 - EXECUTION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The successful bidder will be required to execute the contract and furnish performance and payment bonds satisfactory to the Owner within fifteen (15) calendar days (unless an extension of time is granted by Owner) after receipt of notice of award.

The intent is to prescribe a complete work or improvement which the Contractor undertakes to do in full compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall perform all items of work covered and stipulated in the contract and perform extra work and shall furnish, unless otherwise specifically provided in the contract, all materials, implements, machinery, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, labor, etc. necessary for the prosecution of the work.

Any items omitted from the specifications which, in accordance with good standard construction practices, are necessary for a complete and operative installation shall be included in the work as though such items were set out in the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall not perform any part of the Work where it knows that the Contract Documents contain an error, inconsistency or omission. If the Contractor violates this requirement, Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of correcting the Work affected by the errors, inconsistencies or omissions.

ARTICLE 4 – BIDDER’S UNDERSTANDING

By submitting a bid, the Bidder stipulates, acknowledges, and agrees that by careful examination, he has satisfied himself as to the nature, location and risks inherent in the work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facility needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.

The Bidder is required to examine carefully the site of the proposed work as well as the proposal, plans, specifications, special provisions and contract and bond form for the work contemplated. By submitting a bid, the Bidder stipulates and agrees that he has investigated and satisfied himself as to the conditions to be encountered, as to the character, quality, and quantities of work to be performed and materials to be furnished and as to the requirements of these specifications, special provisions, and the contract. Bidder further agrees that if his bid is accepted, he will provide all necessary machinery, tools, apparatus, and other means of construction and will perform and complete all work and furnish all material specified and required in the contract, in the manner and within the time limits prescribed in the contract, and in accordance with all requirements therein set forth; and agrees to accept as full compensation therefore, the total price bid whether computed on a lump sum basis or a unit price basis

4752.02 4 00700

Page 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 4A – WITHDRAWAL OF BID

A bid containing patently obvious unintentional, and substantial mechanical, clerical, or mathematical errors, or errors of unintentional omission of a substantial quantity of work, labor, material, or services made directly in the compilation of the bid, may be withdrawn by the contractor if clear and convincing sworn, written evidence of such errors is furnished to Owner within forty-eight (48) hours of the bid opening excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays. Such errors must be clearly shown by objective evidence drawn from inspection of the original work papers, documents, or materials used in the preparation of the bid sought to be withdrawn. If the Owner determines that the error is a patently obvious mechanical, clerical, or mathematical error, or unintentional omission of a substantial quantity of work, labor, material, or services, as opposed to a judgment error, and that the bid was submitted in good faith it shall accept the withdrawal and return the bid security to the contractor.

ARTICLE 5 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure substantial completion thereof in the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner that the time stipulated for the completion of the job takes into consideration the potential that adverse weather conditions and industrial conditions may cause delays in prosecution of the work, and the Contractor stipulates and agrees that weather conditions and industrial conditions shall not constitute grounds for extension of the time for substantial completion of the work contemplated under the contract unless authorized by the Owner.

All changes or extensions of the schedule shall be made by written and approved change orders. The scheduled work may be started after the written Notice to Proceed and contract time will officially begin ten (10) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. All work shall be completed as per schedule.

For each calendar day or working day, as the case may be, that any work remains incomplete after expiration of the contract time and/or any extensions thereof, the sum specified below will be deducted from payments due the Contractor not as a penalty but as liquidated damages as a result of the delay in substantial completion of the work. In the event that the Owner should choose to permit the Contractor to continue the work after expiration of the contract time, or as such contract time may be extended, such will not operate as a waiver by the Owner of its rights to recover liquidated damages. In the event that the Owner terminates the Contractor under the contract in accordance with the provisions of Article 23, infra, the Owner shall retain the right to

4752.02 5 00700

Page 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 assess, collect, and recover liquidated damages from the Contractor and/or the Surety until the work under the contract is satisfactorily completed. The amount of liquidated damages will be deducted from the remaining balance of funds due the Contractor under the contract. In the event that liquidated damages which accrue prior to completion of the work under the contract should exceed the remaining balance of funds due the Contractor under the contract, the Contractor shall forfeit any rights to claim additional payments under the contract and both the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable for accrued liquidated damages in excess of the contract balance. If liquidated damage figures are not set forth in the Special Conditions, the following amounts shall be applicable.

Original Contract Amount Liquidated Damages Per Day From More Than To and Including Per Calendar Day Per Working Day $0 $25,000 $264.00 $264.00 $25,000 $50,000 $264.00 $264.00 $50,000 $100,000 $300.00 $300.00 $100,000 $500,000 $378.00 $378.00 $500,000 $1,000,000 $630.00 $630.00 $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $840.00 $840.00 $2,000,000 And over $1260.00 $1260.00

If the Owner has accepted a portion of the project as Substantially Complete and assumed partial occupancy of the project, then liquidated damages will be prorated by an amount equal to the percentage of completion.

ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACT TIME

The number of days allowed for substantial completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the terms of the contract shall be the “contract time.” The contract time shall be measured by the working day or calendar day, as stipulated elsewhere herein.

When the contract time is on a calendar day basis, it shall consist of the number of calendar days stated in the contract beginning with the date noted in the written Notice to Proceed, including Saturdays, Sundays, holidays and non-work days.

When the contract time is on a working day basis, a work day shall consist of a calendar day, other than exceptions stated below, on which weather and other conditions not under the control of the Contractor, will permit construction operations to proceed for at least five (5) continuous hours of the day with the normal working force engaged in performing the controlling items of work. The scheduled work may be started after the written Notice to Proceed and contract time will officially begin ten (10) days after the date of the Notice to Proceed.

No working days will be charged for the days listed below on a working day basis:

(a) Saturday (If no inspector is needed and the work progresses for a period of 5 hours or more).

4752.02 6 00700

Page 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

(b) Sunday (If no inspector is needed and the work progresses for a period of 5 hours or more). (c) Owner recognized holidays

(1) New Year's Day - January 1st (2) Martin Luther King Day - 3rd Monday in January (3) Mardi Gras Day (4) Good Friday (5) Memorial Day (6) Independence Day - July 4th (7) Labor Day - lst Monday in September (8) Thanksgiving Day - 4th Thursday in November (9) Acadian Day - Day after Thanksgiving Day (10) Christmas Day - December 25 th

Holidays fallings on a Saturday shall be observed on the preceding Friday and holidays falling on a Sunday shall be observed on the following Monday.

(d) Days of which delay, attributable solely to the Owner or other governmental agencies, prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the controlling items of work in effect at time of delay.

(e) Days on which delays are attributable to the direct effect of strike, riots or civil commotions.

The following are considered reasonably anticipated days of adverse weather on a monthly basis for either a working day or calendar base contract:

January 11 days May 5 days September 4 days February 10 days June 6 days October 3 days March 8 days July 6 days November 5 days April 7 days August 5 days December 8 days

The Contractor shall ask for total adverse weather days, the Contractor’s request shall be considered only for days over the allowable number of days stated above.

If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time, the Contractor shall document that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. An increase in contract time due to weather shall not be cause for an increase in the contract sum.

4752.02 7 00700

Page 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 7 - DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME

The Owner reserves the right, at its sole option, and for good cause shown, to grant to the Contractor additional time for completion of the contract. Any and all granting of additional time for completion of the work under the contract must be initiated by written request from the Contractor to the Engineer/Architect. For the request to be considered, it must be received by the Engineer/Architect no later than fourteen (14) calendar days following the time that the event which prompted the request occurs. It is the Contractor's responsibility to include in the written request the specific and detailed reasons that he feels he deserves additional contract days in order to complete the contract.

No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than fourteen (14) calendar days before claim therefore is made in writing to the Engineer/Architect.

ARTICLE 8 - ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND DETAIL DRAWINGS

The Contractor will be furnished any additional instructions and detail drawings which may be necessary to carry out the work included in the contract. The additional drawings and instructions supplied to the Contractor shall be deemed to be a part of the Contract Documents and will be so prepared that they can be reasonably interpreted as part thereof. The Contractor shall carry out the work required in accordance with the additional detailed drawings and instructions. If the additional instructions and detail drawings adds work not previously shown and reasonably anticipated, the Contractor will be paid under the contract in accordance with the provisions of Article 19 and 20 of these General Conditions.

ARTICLE 9 - SHOP DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall submit promptly to the Engineer/Architect five (5) copies of each shop drawing prepared if submitted in paper format. However, if submitted in digital format the requirement for the number of copies of paper format submitted is waived. After review of such drawings by the Engineer/Architect and dependent upon the extent of the review comments, the drawings will be stamped as “Note Markings” or “Revise and Resubmit”. If the Engineer/Architect has to review shop drawing submittals more than three (3) times (two rejection and one approval) then the Engineer/Architect will be compensated for any additional review time by the contractor. Copies of the final approved shop drawings with all applicable mark-ups will be considered the “Record” copies of the shop drawings.

ARTICLE 10 - MATERIALS, SERVICES, FACILITIES AND EMPLOYEES

It is understood that except as otherwise specifically stated in the contract documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, water, lights, power, transportation, superintendence, temporary construction of every nature, and all other services and facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute, complete and deliver the work within the specified time.

Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish to the Engineer/Architect or the

4752.02 8 00700

Page 9 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

Owner satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials.

Where materials or equipment are specified by a trade or brand name, it is not the intention of the Owner to discriminate against an equal product; another manufacturer, but rather to set a definite standard of performance.

Whenever a material or article required is specified or shown on the plans by using the name of the proprietary product or a particular manufacturer or vendor, any material or article which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equal and satisfactory providing the materials or the article so proposed is of equal substance and function in the Engineer's/Architect’s opinion. Substituted material shall not be purchased or installed without the Engineer’s/Architect’s written approval.

Any request for approval of a different material or article than that specified by name shall be accompanied by samples, complete record of performance, certified copies of test and/or any analyses made by impartial recognized laboratories, or such additional information as the Engineer may reasonably request. Such samples and data shall be furnished sufficiently in advance to allow reasonable time for investigation of the proposed substitution before a decision must be made. Contractor shall be required to provide the same warranty for the substitution as that which is specified in the Contract Documents. Any cost incurred in making modifications or changes to the Project to accommodate an approved substitution are the responsibility of Contractor and shall not be the basis of an adjustment of the Contract sum.

Any work specified and/or identified in the Special Conditions to be performed after regular working hours, on weekends or legal holidays, shall be performed without additional expense to the Owner.

The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and order amongst his employees and shall not employ on the work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work assigned to him.

ARTICLE 11 - INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS

All materials and equipment used in the construction of the project shall be new and subject to adequate inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards. The laboratory or inspection agency shall be selected by the Owner for Quality Assurance purposes only. The Contractor shall employ a laboratory and/or inspection agency for all Quality Control inspection and testing. The Contractor’s Quality Control agency shall not be the same or employed by the Owner’s Quality Assurance agency. The Owner will pay for all laboratory/field inspection and testing services for Quality Assurance purposes, and not as a part of the contract. The Contractor will pay for all laboratory/field inspection and testing services for Quality Control purposes at their cost. Testing results as established by the Owner’s Quality Assurance laboratory shall be used to determine whether or not the product meets specifications. In the event a particular test fails due to failure to meet requirements on the contractor’s part, then the Contractor will be required to pay for the services of re-testing as well as any inspection time associated with this re-testing. In the event that re-testing is necessary, the Owner will pay the cost of re-testing and additional inspection to the laboratory and will direct the Engineer/Architect to deduct this amount from the Contractor’s next partial payment application.

4752.02 9 00700

Page 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 12 - PATENTS AND TAXES

The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and save and hold the Owner and it's officers, directors, agents, servants, employees, representatives, and elected and appointed officials harmless from any and all liability of any nature or kind, including cost and expenses for, or on account of, any patented or unpatented invention, process, article, or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the contract, including its use by the Owner, unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the contract documents.

License and/or royalty fees for the use of a process which are authorized by the Owner of the project must be reasonable and paid to the holder of the patent, or his authorized licensee, directly by the Contractor.

If the Contractor uses any design, device or materials covered by letter, patent or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable agreement with the owner of such patented or copyrighted design, device or material. It is mutually agreed and understood, that, without exception, the contract prices shall include all royalties or costs arising from the use of such design, device or materials, in any way involved in the work. The Contractor and/or his Sureties shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner of the project from any and all claims of infringement by reason of the use of patented or copyrighted design, device or materials, or any trademark or copyright in connection with the work agreed to be performed under this contract, and shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner from the cost, expense or damage which it may be obligated to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the work or after completion of the work.

The Contractor shall pay all federal, state and local taxes due or payable during the time of the Contract on materials, equipment, or labor to the proper authorities prior to the final acceptance of work. This amount shall be included in the bid price.

ARTICLE 13 - SURVEYS, PERMITS, RIGHTS-OF-WAY, EASEMENTS AND REGULATIONS

Unless otherwise provided for in the specifications, the Owner shall furnish all boundary surveys and establish all base lines for locating the principal component parts of the work together with a suitable number of elevation bench marks adjacent to the work as shown in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall develop and make all detail surveys needed for construction such as slope stakes, batter boards, stakes for pile locations and other working points, lines, elevations and cut sheets. The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining their accuracy thereafter and will be responsible for all expenses resulting from their disturbance. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Architect in writing at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of the time the Contractor contemplates commencing work on any parts of the work requiring surveys to be provided by the Owner.

The Owner will provide rights-of-way for the purpose of construction without cost to the Contractor by securing permits in areas of public dedication or by obtaining easements across privately owned property. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, prior to the initiation of construction on easements through private property, to inform the property owner of his intent to

4752.02 10 00700

Page 11 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 begin construction. Before beginning construction in areas of public dedication, the Contractor shall inform the Owner seven (7) calendar days in advance thereof, and the agency having jurisdiction in the area forty-eight (48) hours prior to initiation of the work.

The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting all of his operations under the contract within the limits of the applicable easements and rights-of-way. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to which may occur as a result of conducting any operations outside of the boundaries of the applicable servitudes, easements, and/or rights-of-way along the project site. Should the Contractor require additional right-of-way for access or egress, he shall make arrangements with the owners of such property for such right-of-way at no cost to the Owner. Upon substantial completion of the work and prior to the Owner accepting the project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner a Letter or Release acquired from the property owner(s) in which work, access or egress was performed.

The Contractor shall procure and pay for any other permits, licenses and approvals necessary for the execution of his contract.

The Contractor shall review and be fully familiar with all terms conditions, and limitations contained in all servitudes, easements, and/or right-of-way agreements executed by all landowners along the site of the project, and shall be fully bound by all provisions contained therein. Such servitudes, easements, and right-of-way agreements shall be deemed to be a part of this contract, and any violation by the Contractor of the terms, conditions, and limitations contained therein shall be deemed to be a breach of the contract.

The Contractor shall fully defend, indemnify, and hold forever harmless the Owner, it's officers, directors, agents, servants, employees, representatives, and elected and appointed officials harmless from any and all liability of any nature or kind whatsoever, resulting and/or to result from any operations conducted by Contractor, its employees, agents, and/or representatives outside of the boundaries of any easement or right-of-way and/or any breach or violation of the terms, conditions, and/or limitations of any servitude, easement, and/or right-of-way agreement affecting property situated along the site of the project.

The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, orders, and regulations relating to the performance of the work, the protection of adjacent property, and the maintenance of passageways, guard fences or other protective facilities. Contractor shall also construct temporary fences as needed to confine livestock to their respective pastures.

ARTICLE 14 - PLANS AND WORKING DRAWINGS

When applicable, the Owner will furnish the Contractor without charge five (5) sets of plans and three (3) sets of specifications and upon written request by the Contractor additional sets of plans and specifications will be supplied for the cost of printing.

If, in the course of the work, the Contractor finds any discrepancy between the drawings and the physical conditions of the locality or any errors or omissions in the drawing or in the layout as given by points and instructions, it shall be his duty immediately to inform the Engineer/Architect in writing; and the Engineer/Architect, in writing, promptly shall verify such

4752.02 11 00700

Page 12 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 discrepancy and authorize the Contractor to make corrections, if necessary. Until so authorized, any work done after such discovery will be done at the Contractor's risk.

ARTICLE 15 - CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATION

The Contractor agrees to do, perform and complete all work and furnish all supplies and materials, machinery, equipment, facilities and means, except as herein otherwise expressly specified, necessary or proper to perform and complete all work required by this contract in a good workmanlike manner, within the time herein specified, in accordance with the plans and specifications covered by this contract and any and all supplemental plans and specifications, and in accordance with the directions of the Engineer/Architect as given from time to time during the progress of the work.

In the event of temporary suspensions of work, during inclement weather, or whenever the Engineer/Architect shall direct, the Contractor and his subcontractors shall take all necessary steps to carefully protect the project, work, and materials against damage or injury.

At all times prior to substantial completion of the project by the Owner, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the condition and care of the project and shall take all reasonable steps to protect the project from injury, damage, or loss to any part thereof resulting from weather, the action of the elements, or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. Prior to substantial completion of the project, the Contractor shall be liable and responsible to rebuild, repair, and/or restore all portions of the project which may sustain injury, damage, or loss, or which contain defects or deficiencies, and shall bear all expense associated therewith. The Contractor shall also be liable and answerable for all costs and expenses associated with repair and/or restoration of all work performed by other contractors which is destroyed or damaged as a result of the aforesaid corrective work.

ARTICLE 16 - PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND LIVES

The Contractor shall at all times safely guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with this contract. He shall at all times safely guard and protect his own work, and that of adjacent property from damage. The Contractor shall repair and/or replace any such damage, loss or injury.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of his plant, appliances, and methods, and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction, maintenance or operations.

The Contractor and all subcontractors shall be required to comply with all the applicable local, state and federal safety and health standards.

The Contractor is hereby further notified that for reasonable cause of suspicion, he or his employee(s) are subject to drug testing while engaged in business on Lafayette Consolidated Government property as per Lafayette Consolidated Government Comprehensive Substance Abuse Policy and Procedure Memorandum 123-1, Article 4.2, which is incorporated herein by reference.

4752.02 12 00700

Page 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 17 - SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR

The Contractor shall be responsible for supervision of all employees and personnel required for the project. The Contractor shall employ a construction superintendent or foreman at the work site who shall have full authority to act for the Contractor. Such representative shall be acceptable to the Engineer/Architect. Contactor shall also furnish to the Engineer/Architect and Owner, a list of all emergency personnel for after normal hour contact with their after hour telephone numbers, pager numbers, etc.

ARTICLE 18 - INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES OF WORK

The Owner may, without notice to the sureties on the Contractor's bond and without invalidating the contract, by written instructions, order extra work or make changes by altering the details of construction, add to or deduct from the work, with the contract's sum being adjusted. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original Contract, supplemented by written change order agreements recommended by the Engineer/Architect. Any claim for extensions of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change.

In giving instructions, the Engineer/Architect shall have authority to make minor changes in the work, provided the Owner has approved such changes and funding for those changes are available at that time and that the proposed changes are within the scope of the project. Except in an emergency endangering life or property, no extra work or change shall be made without consent of the Owner, and a written order by the Engineer/Architect shall be forthcoming immediately after the work is completed. No claim for any addition to the contract sum or contract time shall be valid unless so ordered, and in accordance with the terms of a properly executed change order or extra work order.

ARTICLE 19 - CHANGE ORDERS, PAYMENT FOR EXTRA OR DELETED WORK

Change orders may be entered into by the Owner and Contractor as may be deemed necessary in accordance with the laws of the State of Louisiana and Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government procedures and policy.

The Owner, without invalidating the contract may, by written instructions, order extra work or make changes by altering the details of construction, add to or deduct from the work, with the contract's sum being adjusted accordingly. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original Contract, supplemented by written change order or extra work order agreements recommended by the Engineer/Architect and negotiated by the contracted parties, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change.

The value of any such extra work or change shall be determined in one or more of the following ways and in the following priority:

a) By unit prices named in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon. Unit prices shall include cost of labor, materials, equipment, overhead and profit.

4752.02 13 00700

Page 14 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

b) By a lump sum.

c) By otherwise agreed upon basis.

If none of the above methods is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided he is so ordered by the Owner in writing, shall proceed with the work. In such case he shall keep and preserve in such form as the Engineer/Architect may direct, a correct itemized account of the net cost of labor and materials, together with vouchers bearing written certification by the Contractor. In any case, the Engineer/Architect shall certify to the amount, including an allowance of fifteen percent (15%) on the Cost of Work for overhead and profit due to the General Contractor. Where such change involves a subcontractor, an allowance of fifteen percent (15%) on the Cost of Work for overhead and profit shall be due the sub-contractor and an allowance of ten percent (10%) on the Cost of Work not including the Subcontractor’s overhead and profit shall be due the General Contractor. In no event shall total mark-up exceed twenty five percent (25) on the Cost of Work. Pending final determination of value, payments on account of changes shall be made on the Engineer's/Architect’s estimate.

Once a change order has been agreed upon, there will be no future requests for either additional costs or extensions of time related to that Change Order.

ARTICLE 20 - CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST

If the Contractor claims that any instructions by drawings, or otherwise, involve extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer/Architect written notice thereof within fourteen (14) calendar days after the receipt of such instructions and, in any event, before commencing the procedure. The Engineer/Architect and/or Owner shall recommend whether the Contractor is entitled to be compensated for such extra cost and shall make any required adjustments in accordance with Article 18 of these general terms and conditions. If no written claim is made within this fourteen (14) calendar-day period, the Contractor will be deemed to have waived any claim for extra cost for such work. If in the opinion of the Owner, the Engineer/Architect’s judgment is in error or inappropriate, the Owner may review and form its own judgment. In this event the Owner will notify the Engineer/Architect of the Owner’s judgment for the Engineer/Architect to issue clear direction to the Contractor on how to proceed.

ARTICLE 21 - CORRECTION OF WORK

The Engineer/Architect shall be the judge of the quality and suitability of all work, materials, and processes of manufacture provided by the Contractor. Should any of the work, materials, and processes of manufacture fail to meet the Engineer's/Architect’s approval, they shall be forthwith reconstructed, replaced and/or corrected, as the case may be, by the Contractor at his own expense. Rejected materials shall immediately be removed from the site. If, in the opinion of the Engineer/Architect, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor hereunder shall be reduced by such amount as in the judgment of the Engineer/Architect shall be equitable. If in the opinion of the Owner, the Engineer/Architect’s judgment is in error or inappropriate, the Owner may review and form its own judgment. In this event the Owner will notify the Engineer/Architect of

4752.02 14 00700

Page 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 the Owner’s judgment for the Engineer/Architect to issue clear direction to the Contractor on how to proceed.

ARTICLE 22 – OWNER’S RIGHT TO DO WORK

If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the Owner after seven (7) calendar days written notice to the Contractor, may correct such deficiencies itself or by use of other contractors without prejudice to any other remedy it may have, and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due to the Contractor.

ARTICLE 23 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE OR CONVENIENCE

A. TERMINATION FOR CAUSE

The Owner shall have the right to terminate the employment of the Contractor, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies that may be available to the Owner, in the event that the Contractor:

a) Is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of the Contractor's insolvency;

b) Fails to supply enough skilled workmen, properly operating equipment, or proper materials to perform the work required under the contract in a timely and proper fashion and to assure prompt completion of the work;

c) Fails to make prompt payment to subcontractors, or payments for materials or labor;

d) Persistently disregards law, ordinances or the instructions of the Engineer/Architect, or otherwise violates any provision of the contract or contract documents;

e) Performs the work unsuitably or neglects or refuses to remove rejected materials or correct work that has been rejected by the Engineer/Architect after being provided written notice and opportunity to cure within a reasonable period of time;

f) Discontinues prosecution of the work;

g) Fails to resume work which has been discontinued within a reasonable time after being furnished notification to do so;

h) Fails to complete the project within the contract time, or any extension of the contract time or accepted substantial completion date established within an approved revised construction schedule;

i) Fails to perform or carry on the work in an acceptable manner within a reasonable time after being furnished written notification to do so;

4752.02 15 00700

Page 16 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

j) Fails to secure, replace, and/or maintain the insurance required under Article 32.

Then upon written notification by the Engineer/Architect to the Owner that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, may terminate the employment of the Contractor. The Owner shall give the Contractor seven (7) calendar days written notice of its intent to terminate the Contractor's employment for one or more of the causes stated herein above. In the event of any such termination, the Owner will serve written notice thereof upon the surety and the Contractor, and the surety shall have the right to take over and perform the contract; provided however, that if the surety does not perform the contract or does not commence performance thereof within thirty (30) calendar days from the date of the service of such notice, the Owner may take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method it may deem expedient.

In the event that the Contractor's employment is terminated as aforesaid, he shall not be entitled to receive any further payment under the contract until all incomplete work has been satisfactorily completed and all deficient and/or defective work has been repaired and/or remedied. If following final acceptance of the project, the unpaid balance of funds remaining in the contract exceeds the cost and expense required to complete the project, including compensation for additional engineering, managerial, administrative services, and legal expenses, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. However, if the cost and expense required to complete the project exceeds the unpaid balance of funds remaining in the contract, the Contractor shall forfeit the right to claim any additional payment under the contract.

The foregoing provisions are in addition to and not in limitation of any other right or remedies available to the Owner under the contract. Furthermore, nothing contained in this Article shall affect the right of the Owner to impose and collect liquidated damages from the Contractor and/or the Surety in accordance with the provisions of Article 5, supra.

B. TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE

Owner may, at any time, terminate this Agreement or any portion thereof, for Owner’s convenience, upon providing written notice to Contractor. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for all work completed through the date notice was provided (less payments already received) and reasonable demobilization and restocking charges incurred and reasonable overhead and profit based upon industry standards on the work performed. In no event shall Contractor be entitled to payment of overhead and profit on work not performed. In the event it is determined that Contractor was wrongfully terminated for cause, pursuant to Article 23A, such termination shall be automatically converted to a termination for convenience under and payment made as provided under this Article.

ARTICLE 24 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT

If the work should be stopped by order of any court or other public authority for a period of three (3) months or more, through no act or fault of the Contractor or of anyone employed by him, then the Contractor, upon ten (10) calendar days written notice to the Owner and the Engineer/Architect, may stop work or terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner

4752.02 16 00700

Page 17 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 payment for all work satisfactorily performed and materials delivered to the job site through the date of Notice of Termination.

ARTICLE 25 - TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK

The Owner shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly or in part as he may deem appropriate where the Contractor fails to perform the work in accordance with plans and specifications. In the event that the Owner suspends the work as a result of the failure of the Contractor to comply with plans and specifications, the Contractor shall not be entitled to assert claims for additional time and/or money to complete the project and shall remain liable for satisfactory completion of the contract within the contract time. An order to suspend the work for periods exceeding one calendar day shall be in writing and shall include specific reason for the suspension.

ARTICLE 26 - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS

The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the work provided such occupancy or use does not substantially impede the Contractor's progress. Such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed or partially completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

The Owner shall be responsible for any damages incurred as a direct result of his use of the portion of the work except when such damages occur as a result of incomplete work or faulty workmanship or materials.

ARTICLE 27 - ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION, TELEPHONE AND CABLE TELEVISION FACILITIES

The Contractor shall make all necessary or required provisions and shall perform all work required by his operations under the contract and incident to any interference with electrical transmission, telephone and cable television facilities, with their operations, or with the maintenance of traffic or service thereon, all in a manner satisfactory to the Owner or operations thereof and to the Engineer/Architect.

The cost of providing and maintaining all necessary or required watchmen, signals, guards, temporary structures and other facilities, of making necessary repairs, replacements, or similar operations, if required, shall be paid for by the Contractor.

ARTICLE 28 - UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to exercise due and reasonable care in locating the existing underground utilities as accurately as possible, ahead of the actual construction work. Prior to commencement of work, Contractor shall contact Louisiana One Call to have any utility located in his area(s) of work notified of the work that will be performed by the Contractor.

In the event that construction operations are to be done in the vicinity of the underground utility lines as shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer/Architect and a representative of the respective companies, prior to doing any work in the area. This

4752.02 17 00700

Page 18 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 notification shall be given far enough in advance of proposed construction to avoid any delay in operations.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for repairing or having repaired any and all damages to underground utilities, lines, fixtures, equipment, etc. that may result from his construction operations at no cost to the Owner. Contractor shall further defend, indemnify, and hold forever harmless the Owner, its employees, agents, representatives, directors, officers, elected and appointed officials, and/or from any and all claims which may be asserted by any persons or parties whomsoever for damages to underground utilities, lines, fixtures, equipment, etc. related to and/or resulting from any work performed by Contractor under the contract, including all claims, demands, causes of action and/or rights of action which may be asserted as a result of the sole negligence, liability, and/or fault of the Contractor, his employees, agents, and representatives, and/or the joint and/or concurrent negligence, liability, and/or fault of the Contractor with any other persons or parties whomsoever whether said lines are indicated on the drawings or not.

ARTICLE 29 - WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE

Contractor warrants that all materials provided pursuant to this Contract shall be new unless otherwise indicated and all work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner.

All work herein specified and/or as indicated on the plans shall be warranted and guaranteed against defects in construction, including faulty workmanship and defective materials, for a period of not less than one (1) calendar year from the date of recordation of final acceptance of the work or for such longer periods as may be set forth in the specifications. The Contractor shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, repair and/or replace any damaged or failed portions of the work which may develop during said one year period, and damage to other work caused by such damages or failures, at his own expense and without cost to the Owner.

Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provisions in the Contract Documents nor partial or entire occupancy of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.

Nothing contained in this Article shall be deemed to limit the liability or responsibility of the Contractor for damages resulting from poor workmanship, including defective materials.

ARTICLE 30 - PAYMENT

The Owner hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor as full compensation for all work performed under the contract, and/or supplemental agreements thereto, the monetary value of the actual quantities in the completed work according to the schedule of unit prices and/or lump sum prices set forth in attached proposal and/or duly authorized supplements thereto, and made a part of the contract.

Partial payments under the Contract shall be made at the request of the Contractor not more than

4752.02 18 00700

Page 19 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 once each month, based upon partial estimates agreed to by the Contractor and Engineer/Architect and shall be furnished to the Engineer/Architect and approved by the Engineer/Architect prior to transmittal to the Owner for approval and payment.

The partial estimates will be approximately stated, and all partial estimates and payments shall be subject to corrections in the estimate rendered following the discovery of any error in any previous estimates.

The payment of the partial estimate shall not be taken as verification that the work has been performed and that its quality is satisfactory and it will in no way serve as a release to the Contractor for the responsibility of any portions thereof. The work and any particulars relating thereto shall be subject to revision and adjustment by the Engineer/Architect and/or the Owner at any time prior to final payment, regardless of any previous action taken.

There shall be reserved from the payments provided for the Contract ten percent (10%) for contracts less than $500,000 or five percent (5%) for contracts of $500,000 or more, of the estimates submitted, said sum to constitute a trust fund for the protection of and payment to any person or persons, mechanic, subcontractor or materialmen who shall perform any labor upon such contract, or the doing of said work, and all persons who shall supply such person or persons or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of such work, and shall be withheld for a minimum of forty-five (45) calendar days after substantial acceptance of the completed contract.

After the expiration of the forty-five (45) calendar day period, the reserve in excess of a sum sufficient to discharge the claims of materialmen and laborers who have filed their claims, together with a sum sufficient to defray the cost of such action and to pay attorneys' fees, shall be paid to the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and furnishing a clear lien and privilege certificate to the Owner at the expiration of the retainage period, and prior to payment of any reserve withheld.

ARTICLE 31 - PAYMENTS WITHHELD

In addition to the percentage provided for in Article 30 of these General Conditions, the Owner may withhold such amounts from any payment as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:

a) Defective work not remedied;

b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims;

c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors or for material or labor;

d) Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract time and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover damages for the anticipated delay;

4752.02 19 00700

Page 20 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

e) A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed within the time period remaining under the contract;

f) Damage to another contractor;

g) Failure to submit required reports; or

h) Modifications of the contract which necessitate the execution of change orders prior to payment of funds.

Furthermore, nothing contained in this Article shall be deemed to limit the right of the Owner to withhold liquidated damages as permitted under Article 5 from any amounts which may be due and owing the Contractor for work performed under the contract.

ARTICLE 32 - CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE

The attached certificate of insurance correlates directly with the minimum insurance requirements of the Contract. The Owner requires that the certificate of insurance be provided on a form acceptable to the Owner. This certificate of insurance shall be furnished to the Owner within ten (10) calendar days of notice of award.

The Contractor and any Subcontractors performing Work under the Contract shall be required to carry insurance as required herein.

The Contractor shall not commence work under the contract until he has obtained all insurance required by this paragraph, and until such insurance has been approved by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until the insurance required has been obtained and submitted. Proper certificates evidencing such insurance shall be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of work. All policies of insurance must contain provisions indicating that no cancellation or change in such insurance shall be effected for any cause without thirty (30) calendar days written notice being first given to the Owner.

The insurance company providing coverage must be acceptable to the Owner.

If at any time, any of the insurance policies required to be furnished by the Contractor (and Subcontractors) under the terms of this Article shall lapse, expire, or fail to comply with the requirements of this Article, the Contractor (or Subcontractor) shall procure and obtain such new insurance policies as may be required in order to comply with the requirements of this Article. Upon obtaining a new insurance policy, the Contractor (or the Subcontractor) insurance carrier/broker shall submit a new certificate of insurance to the Owner for approval. Upon failure of the Contractor (or the Subcontractor) to furnish, deliver and maintain such insurance as required by this Article, the Contract, at the election of the Owner, may be declared suspended, discontinued or terminated. Failure of the Contractor (or the Subcontractor) to maintain any required insurance shall not relieve the Contractor from any liability under the Contract, nor shall the insurance requirements contained in this Article be construed to conflict with the obligations of the Contractor regarding indemnification as set forth in Article 52.

4752.02 20 00700

Page 21 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

The requirements contained in this Article shall not be construed and are not intended to limit the Contractor’s obligations to indemnify and defend the Owner as contained in Article 52, but merely constitute minimum insurance requirements which must be provided to secure such obligations.

The Contractor (and Subcontractors) shall effect and maintain until final acceptance of the Work, insurance as follows:

I. Standard Worker’s Compensation Insurance - Coverage for all Worker’s Compensation claims as permitted under Louisiana State Law together with Employer’s Liability Coverage of $1 million minimum, per occurrence.

II. Commercial General Liability Insurance - Coverage under this policy must be provided on an “occurrence” basis, and not on a “claims made” basis. THE LAFAYETTE CITY-PARISH CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT, ITS OFFICIALS, VOLUNTEERS AND EMPLOYEES MUST BE NAMED AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED ON THE POLICY. All commercial general liability insurance shall, at a minimum, include coverage for the following:

A. Premises Operations $1 million per occurrence B. Independent Contractors $1 million per occurrence C. Products - Completed Operations $1 million per occurrence D. Contractual Liability $1 million per occurrence E. Broad Form Property Damage $1 million per occurrence

Additionally, where required by the Owner, the policy required by this Subsection shall also include Explosion, Collapse and Underground Hazard.

III. Business Automobile Liability Policy – Coverage under this policy shall include Business Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of at least $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit (CSL) for bodily injury and property damage per accident. If “Any Auto” coverage is carried, coverage for “Owned Auto,” “Non-Owned Auto” and “Hired Auto” will not be required. If Contractor (or Subcontractor) does not own an automobile (vehicle) and an automobile (vehicle) is utilized in the execution of the Contract, then “Hired” and “Non-Owned Auto” coverage is required.

IV. Umbrella Liability

In lieu of providing insurance at the limits required in Sections I, II and III of this Article, Contractors may fulfill the requirements of this Article by securing umbrella liability insurance coverage provided that the combined total of the primary and umbrella coverages satisfy the minimum required insurance limits set forth in Subsections I, II and III hereinabove.

V. Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government as an Additional Insured

The Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, its officials and employees must be named on all liability policies described above as additional insureds.

4752.02 21 00700

Page 22 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

VI. Primary Coverage

Coverage afforded the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, its officials, and employees as an insured applies as primary and not excess or contributing to any other insurance issued in the name of the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government.

VII. Waiver of Subrogation

Contractors (and Subcontractors) must obtain a Waiver of Subrogation from all insurance carriers providing coverage under Section I in this Article for any and all claims which could be asserted against the Owner, its employees, agents, representatives, officers, directors, elected and appointed officials.

VIII. Waiver of Insurance Requirements

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the Owner reserves the right at all times, in its discretion, to alter, amend, and/or waive insurance requirements set forth in this Article. Such alteration, amendment or waiver must be in writing to be valid.

ARTICLE 33 - BUILDERS RISK INSURANCE

The Contractor shall effect and maintain until substantial completion of the work, insurance for Builders Risk.

The Owner assumes no risk for loss by fire or other casualty to any portion of the construction project or equipment thereof, whether completed, in process of construction or installation, or stored on the premises, during the life of any contract for any portion of the construction except that the Contractor shall not be responsible for loss by fire or other casualty to such portions of the work which the Owner is using as set forth in Article 26 of these General Conditions, except that the Contractor shall assume all loss to said properties being used by the Owner if the damage occurs as a result of negligence on the part of the Contractor or as a result of work not completed by the Contractor.

When required by the Owner, the Contractor shall maintain during the life of the Contract insurance acceptable to the Owner against all risks, which shall include flood insurance if the project is located within a flood prone area. This insurance shall be an amount equal to the amount of the Contract with no greater than $1,000 deductible on contracts up to $300,000 and thereafter as required by the Owner. Such policy shall include the Owner as a named insured and shall be furnished to the Owner through its Risk Management Division prior to execution of the contract. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all deductibles.

The making of partial payments to the Contractor shall not be construed as creation of an insurable interest by or for the Owner or as relieving the various contractors or their sureties of responsibility from loss from all risks (fire, windstorm, explosion, vandalism, flood, etc.) occurring prior to substantial completion of the project.

4752.02 22 00700

Page 23 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 34 - PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND

Prior to the signing of the contract and within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor is notified that he is the successful bidder, unless an extension of time is granted by Owner, the Contractor will furnish good and solvent bond(s) issued by surety(s) deemed satisfactory to the Owner and in such form as shall be deemed acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of his duties and for the payment by the Contractor of all obligations arising from the work contemplated under the contract. The bond(s) shall be in an amount equal to 100% of the total contract price, plus any change orders. The bond(s) shall provide that the surety waives the requirement of notice of any change in the work necessary or desirable to fully complete the work as contemplated.

The bond(s) shall be executed by the Contractor with a surety, or insurance company, which is currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana Domiciled Insurance company with at least at A- rating in the latest printing of the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide to write individual bonds up to ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide, or by an insurance company that is either domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents and is licensed to write surety bonds. The bond(s) shall be written by a company licensed to do business in the State of Louisiana and who is contracted with the surety company or bond issuer as an agent of the company or issuer. Should the surety company become bankrupt or be removed from the State, the Contractor shall furnish a new bond without cost to the Owner.

The bond(s) provided by the Surety as required by this Article shall specifically stipulate that the Surety shall be bound and obligated by all terms and conditions contained in the contract and that in the event of a conflict between the terms, conditions, and limitations of the bond and those of the contract, that the terms of the contract shall be deemed to govern.

Said bond(s) shall be conditioned such that the Contractor will be bound to faithfully perform all the provisions of the Contract and will perform all work required under the contract, including labor and materials, in a good and workmanlike manner free of defects, within the contract time, and that the Contractor shall make payment of all obligations within the time specified to the satisfaction of the Owner and pay all laborers, mechanics, materialmen, and subcontractors, and all persons who supply such persons with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of such work, and that if the Contractor fails to comply with any of the aforesaid requirements, that the surety under the bond may be held liable and responsible for completion of any incomplete work contemplated under the contract and/or the repair of any deficient and/or defective work performed by the Contractor.

In the event that it should become necessary for the Owner to call upon and require the Surety to complete the work under the contract and/or to repair any deficient and/or defective work performed by the Contractor, the surety shall be entitled to be paid compensation for the work actually performed and satisfactorily completed by it solely in accordance with the payment provisions contained in the contract, and shall not be entitled to recovery of compensation from the Owner for any amounts for which the Contractor has been previously paid for work performed under the contract. The Surety shall not be entitled to be paid by the Owner for any

4752.02 23 00700

Page 24 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 costs incurred by Surety as a result of the repair of any defective and/or deficient work performed by the Contractor. Furthermore, in the event that it becomes necessary for the Owner to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the provisions of Article 5 hereinabove thereby reducing the balance of funds payable by the Owner under the contract, such shall in no way limit and/or reduce the liability of the Surety to perform and complete the remaining work contemplated under the contract in a satisfactory manner, and the Surety shall be bound and obligated to complete the same regardless of whether there are sufficient funds remaining in the balance of funds under the contract to pay the Surety for such work.

The surety company furnishing said bond(s) must have an agent or representative with a permanent office in the State of Louisiana, upon whom notices referred to in the Contract Documents may be served. Service of said notice to said agent or representative in the State of Louisiana shall be equal to service of notice to the president of the surety company or such other officer as may be concerned.

IT IS REQUIRED THAT THE SIGNATORIES SHOW INFORMATION ON BONDS AND POWER OF ATTORNEY AS INDICATED BELOW:

AGENT: TYPE NAME, LICENSE NUMBER, ADDRESS, AND TELEPHONE NUMBER BELOW SIGNATURE

POWER OF ATTORNEY: TYPE NAME, ADDRESS, AND TELEPHONE NUMBER BELOW SIGNATURE

Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney.

ARTICLE 35 - ASSIGNMENT

Neither party to the contract shall assign the contract or sublet it as a whole without written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or coming due to him hereunder without the previous written consent of the Owner.

No assignment of this contract shall be valid unless it shall contain a provision that the funds to be paid to the assignee under the assignment are subject to a prior lien for services rendered or materials supplied for performance of the work called for under the contract in favor of all persons, firms or corporations rendering such services or supplying such materials.

4752.02 24 00700

Page 25 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 36 - LIENS

Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall come due until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this contract, or receipts in full in lieu thereof, and, if required by the Owner, an affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information, the releases and receipts include all labor and material for which a lien could be filed; but if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or receipt in full, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any lien, construction cost, or attorney's fees.

ARTICLE 37 - SEPARATE CONTRACTS

The Owner reserves the right to contract for and perform additional work on or near the work to be performed by the Contractor under the contract. When separate contracts are let within the limits of one project, each contractor shall conduct his work so as not to hinder the progress of the work being performed by other contractors and shall cooperate with such other contractors and the Owner. The Contractor shall arrange his work and shall place and dispose of materials being used so as not to interfere with the operations of other contractors within the limits of the project.

The Contractor shall fully cooperate with other contractors in the arrangement for the materials and in the detailed execution of the work. The Contractor, including his Subcontractors, shall keep the Engineer/Architect fully informed of the progress and the detail work of other contractors and shall notify the Engineer/Architect immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors. Failure of the Contractor to keep the Engineer/Architect fully informed of the work progressing on the site and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others within a reasonable time shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of the status of the work as being satisfactory for proper coordination with his own work.

ARTICLE 38 - SUBCONTRACTS

The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty subcontractors on those parts of the work which, under normal contracting practices, are performed by specialty subcontractors.

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the selection and performance of all subcontractors. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claims for additional time and/or increase in the Contract sum due to problems with performance of a subcontractor. In the event that the Owner discovers that Contractor selected a subcontractor that has been debarred from performing work by Owner, Contractor shall be notified promptly and such subcontractor shall be replaced by the Contractor at Contractor’s expense.

The relationship between the Contractor and his subcontractors shall at all times be deemed to be a master-servant relationship, and the Contractor shall be fully liable and responsible to the Owner for all acts and omissions of his subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, to the same degree and extent as he is liable and responsible for the acts and omissions of his own employees and other persons directly employed by him.

4752.02 25 00700

Page 26 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to bind subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the General Conditions and other contract documents, plans, and specifications insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give the Contractor the same power as regards terminating any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor under any provision of the Contract Documents.

Nothing contained in this contract shall create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the Owner or Architect/Engineer. No subcontract will in any case relieve the Contractor of his responsibility under the contract and bond.

ARTICLE 39 - ENGINEER'S/ARCHITECT’S AUTHORITY

The Engineer/Architect shall give all orders and directions contemplated under this contract and specifications relative to the execution of the work. The Engineer/Architect shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the several kinds of work and materials which are to be paid for under this contract and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said work and the construction thereof. The Engineer's/Architect’s estimates and decisions shall be final and conclusive except as herein otherwise expressly provided. In case any question shall arise between the parties hereto relative to said contract or specifications, the determination or decision of the Engineer/Architect shall be a condition precedent to the right of the Contractor to receive any money or payment for the work under this contract offered in any manner or to any extent by such question. If in the opinion of the Owner, the Engineer/Architect’s estimates and decisions are in error or inappropriate, the Owner may review and form its own estimates and decisions. In this event the Owner will notify the Engineer/Architect of the Owner’s estimates and decisions for the Engineer/Architect to issue clear direction to the Contractor on how to proceed.

The Engineer/Architect shall decide the meaning and intent of any portion of the specifications and of any plans or drawings where the same may be found obscure or to be in dispute. Any differences or conflicts in regard to their work which may arise between the Contractor under this contract and other contractors performing work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Engineer/Architect. If in the opinion of the Owner, the Engineer/Architect’s decisions are in error or inappropriate, the Owner may review and form its own decisions. In this event the Owner will notify the Engineer/Architect of the Owner’s decisions for the Engineer/Architect to issue clear direction to the Contractor on how to proceed.

ARTICLE 40 - INSPECTION

The Engineer/Architect and his representative shall have free access at all times to all parts of the work, and to all materials intended for use in the work. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer/Architect with every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether or not the work as performed is in accordance with the requirements and intent of the specifications and the contract. The work will be inspected as it progresses, but failure to reject or condemn defective work or materials at the time it is done will in no way prevent its rejection whenever it is discovered. If work is covered prior to inspection and the Engineer/Architect requires it, the Contractor shall, at any time before the acceptance of the work, remove or uncover such portions

4752.02 26 00700

Page 27 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017 of the finished work as may be directed. If the work is found to be satisfactory, Contractor shall be entitled to compensation for costs actually incurred in re-covering the work. If work uncovered is found to be unsatisfactory, Contractor shall be responsible for cost to correct and close such work.

ARTICLE 41 - AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTOR

The Inspector will be authorized to inspect all work done and materials furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or to any parts of the work and to the preparation or manufacture of the materials to be used.

He may be stationed at the work site to report to the Engineer/Architect as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed and to call attention whenever it appears that materials furnished or work performed fails to fulfill requirements of the specifications. The Inspector will have authority to reject materials or suspend work until the question at issue can be referred to and settled by the Engineer/Architect. The Inspector will not be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, or release any requirement of these specifications, nor to approve or accept any portion of the work, nor will he be authorized to issue instructions contrary to the plans and specifications. He will in no case act as foreman nor will he interfere with management of the work.

ARTICLE 42 - FINAL CLEANING UP

Prior to Notice of Acceptance and Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the Owner's property all surplus or discarded materials, weeds, bushes, rubbish, temporary structures and equipment. He shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the work, and shall leave the site of the work in a neat and presentable condition throughout.

ARTICLE 43 - REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT

In the case of annulment of this contract before completion, from any cause whatever, the Contractor shall promptly remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the owner, if notified to do so by the Owner, and in the event he fails to do so, the Owner shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor. Such expense shall be deducted from any payment due the Contractor.

ARTICLE 44 – SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Upon notice from the Contractor that it believes the project has reached substantial completion, and before final acceptance, the Engineer/Architect will make an inspection of the Work. Prior to the inspection by the Engineer/Architect, the Contractor shall, if applicable, notify the Engineer/Architect that the Project is ready for inspection by the State Fire Marshal’s office or its representative. “Substantial Completion” is defined as the date on which the Work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents in order that the Owner can occupy and use the project for its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion shall be specified in the Notice of Acceptance.

4752.02 27 00700

Page 28 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

A prerequisite to the Work/project being accepted by the Owner as substantially complete is the Owner’s receipt of the executed Roofing Contractor’s and Roofing Manufacturer’s guarantees, where roofing work is a part of the Contract or twenty-five (25) percent of the entire value of the roof being included within the “Punch List” as described in this Article. In such event, and only with respect to that portion of the Project for which Owner takes occupancy and has issued a Notice of Acceptance identifying the date that the entirety of the Project, whichever is applicable, has reached Substantial Completion, the warranties shall begin to run on the entirety of the Project that has been accepted as substantially complete from the date of the acceptance of Substantial Completion as identified in the Notice of Acceptance.

If the Owner or its representative determines the Project is substantially complete, the Owner shall issue a Notice of Acceptance identifying the date the Project reached Substantial Completion and attach a punch list identifying the remaining items that must be completed before Final Acceptance and final payment. The Owner will then file an official Notice of Acceptance with the Office of the Clerk of Court and will forward one copy of the recorded acceptance to the Contractor and Engineer/Architect.

If the inspection discloses any work as being unsatisfactory or incomplete and such work generates a formal punch list, the Engineer/Architect will give the Contractor instructions for correction of same, and the Contractor shall immediately comply with such instructions. Upon satisfactory completion of the corrections, when a “Punch List” is generated, the Engineer/Architect shall prepare a “Recommendation of Acceptance” incorporating the punch list and submit to the Owner. Upon approval of the Recommendation of Acceptance, the Owner may issue a Notice of Acceptance of the Contract which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion.

Any punch list generated by the Engineer/Architect shall be accompanied by a cost estimate to correct the particular items of work the Engineer/Architect has developed. The cost estimate shall be developed based on mobilization, labor, material, and equipment costs of correcting each punch list item and shall be retained from monies owed to the Contractor, above and beyond the standard retainage. The cost of these items shall be prepared in the same format as the schedule of values. The Engineer/Architect shall retain his working papers used to determine the punch list items cost estimates should the matter be disputed later. The Owner shall not withhold from payment more than the value of the punch list. Punch list items completed shall be paid upon the expiration of the forty-five (45) day lien period. After that payment, none of the remaining funds shall be due the Contractor until all punch list items are completed and are accepted by the Engineer/Architect.

If the dollar value of the punch list exceeds the amount of funds, less retainage amount, in the remaining balance of the Contract, the Project shall not be accepted as Substantially Complete. If the funds remaining are less than required to complete the punch list work, the Contractor shall pay the difference. The provisions listed above shall not be subject to waiver.

Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work/project as provided in the Notice of Acceptance, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner and Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by the

4752.02 28 00700

Page 29 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

Owner and Contractor, security, maintenance, heat and utilities shall become the Owner’s responsibility on the date of Substantial Completion. In the instance where the Owner has accepted the Work/project as substantially complete and issued a Notice of Acceptance, and the Contractor must remain on the premises to complete the “Punch List” or for whatever reason, the Contractor shall maintain Commercial General Liability insurance, Auto Liability insurance and Worker’s Compensation insurance as set forth herein until the expiration of the forty-five (45) day lien period or upon Final Acceptance of the work/project, whichever is later. Builder’s Risk insurance may be cancelled only with the written permission of the Owner or the Owner’s representative at Substantial Completion.

If the punch list is not completed within forty-five (45) days, through no fault of Owner or Engineer/Architect, the Owner may, but is not required, to place the Contractor in default. Thereafter, the Owner shall notify the Surety. If the Surety has not completed the punch list within forty-five days of receipt of notification, the Owner may, but is not required to, complete the remaining punch list items. Any costs incurred shall be paid for first out of any remaining Contract funds. If the costs incurred exceed the remaining Contract funds, the Contractor and its Surety shall be liable for such costs.

Upon completion of the punch list, Contractor shall request Final Inspection.

ARTICLE 45 – FINAL INSPECTION

Whenever the work provided for, or contemplated by the contract, shall have been satisfactorily completed and all punch list items completed, the Engineer/Architect shall be notified in writing that said work is completed and ready for final inspection. The Engineer/Architect shall, unless otherwise provided, make the final inspection within a reasonable length of time after the receipt of such notification.

If all construction provided for in the contract is found completed to his satisfaction, that inspection shall constitute the final inspection and the Engineer/Architect will make recommendation to the Owner for final acceptance and notify the Contractor in writing of this recommendation of acceptance.

ARTICLE 46 – WARRANTY WORK

The Contractor shall perform any warranty work which is required during a period of one (1) calendar year from the time of the recorded date of substantial completion of the work. Such warranty work shall include but is not limited to proper filling of settled trenches or earth fill and repairing of damage caused by such settlement, repairing cracks or other failures in streets, manholes or other structures, or other reasonable repairs. Written notice shall be given by the Owner or his representative when warranty work is deemed necessary. In the event that the repairs are not made within thirty (30) calendar days of date of the notice, the Owner may have the work performed by other parties and shall notify the Contractor’s bonding company of such action to be taken. Costs arising from such repairs shall be paid by the Contractor and/or its Surety.

4752.02 29 00700

Page 30 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 47 - NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF

Any notice to any Contractor from the Owner relative to any part of this contract shall be in writing and considered delivered and the service thereof completed, when said notice is posted, by certified or registered mail, to the said Contractor at his last given address, or delivered in person to the said Contractor or his authorized representative on the work.

ARTICLE 48 - PROHIBITED INTERESTS

No official of the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to negotiate, make, accept or approve, or take part in negotiating, making, accepting, or approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with the construction of the project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this contract or in any part hereof. No officer, employee, architect, attorney, engineer, or inspector of or for the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to exercise any legislative, executive, supervisory or other similar function in connection with the construction of the project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part hereof, any material supply contract, subcontract, insurance contract, or any other contract pertaining to the project.

ARTICLE 49 - PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY

The Contractor shall at all times use due diligence avoid causing unreasonable obstructions to traffic while performing the work contemplated under the contract. The convenience of the general public, the residents along and adjacent to the project, and the protection of persons and property are of prime importance and shall be adequately provided for by the Contractor. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the project shall be kept accessible to the fire apparatus at all times and no material or obstructions shall be placed within 10 feet of any such hydrant. No section of a road shall be closed to the public except by express permission of the Engineer/Architect. During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall provide for local traffic to private property within the closed portion of the work.

ARTICLE 50 - COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC UTILITIES

It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify all the public utilities or other parties interested to make all necessary adjustments of public utility fixtures and appurtenances within or adjacent to the limits of construction. Unless otherwise specified, these adjustments are to be made by the owner of the utilities.

ARTICLE 51 - SANITARY ARRANGEMENTS

The Contractor shall make arrangements for the use of existing sanitary toilet facilities or shall construct, where permitted on the premises, approved temporary toilet conveniences, properly enclosed, for the use of all workmen employed on the project. He shall maintain the same in a sanitary condition from the beginning of the work until substantial completion, and shall then remove and disinfect the premises. All facilities shall be constructed and maintained in strict compliance with the local and state sanitary codes.

4752.02 30 00700

Page 31 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 52 - INDEMNIFICATION

In the contract to be awarded, the Contractor does and will agree to defend, indemnify, and hold forever harmless the Owner and their respective employees, agents, representatives, officers, directors, elected and appointed officials, and any and all other persons for whom they may be deemed liable and/or answerable, to the extent permitted by law, from and against any and all claims, demands, causes of action, and/or rights of action arising out of or resulting from the performance of any of the work and/or obligations contemplated under the Contract, including, but not limited to, any and all claims for damages, losses, expenses and/or attorney’s fees which result from any breach by the Contractor of any of the terms, provisions, conditions, and/or limitations of the contract, as well as any and all claims resulting from the sole negligence, liability, strict liability, and/or fault of the Contractor and/or the joint and/or concurrent negligence, liability, strict liability, and/or fault of the Contractor with any other persons or parties whomsoever.

The Contractor further agrees that he will defend, indemnify, and hold forever harmless the Owner, its employees, agents, representatives, officers, directors, elected and appointed officials, and any and all other persons or parties whomsoever, to the extent permitted by law, of and from any and all claims growing out of the lawful demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanic, materialmen, and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. The Contractor shall at the Owner’s request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If the Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on the Contractor, either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, direct, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged.

Notwithstanding the aforesaid, nothing contained herein shall be deemed to limit the obligations of any insurance company providing coverage in accordance with the terms of this Contract to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner, its employees, agents, representatives, officers, directors, elected and appointed officials, and any and all other persons or parties whomsoever to the full extent of their insurance contract and/or as required by law.

ARTICLE 53 - EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY

a) In connection with the execution of this contract, the Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated

4752.02 31 00700

Page 32 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

Government setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

b) The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin.

c) The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.

d) The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice, to be provided advising the labor union or workers' representative of the Contractor's commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.

e) The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the Contracting agency and Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders.

f) In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be cancelled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further governmental contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or by order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.

g) The Contractor will include the provisions of paragraphs (a) through (g) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as may be directed by the Secretary of Labor as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance.

Provided, however, that in the event the Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United States.

4752.02 32 00700

Page 33 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

ARTICLE 54 - BUDGETED FUNDS

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the contract, the parties agree that the maximum amount payable under the contract shall be that which is the amount budgeted by Owner for said Project. In the event the total amount of the contract is increased by reason of additional quantities or any other reason, so as to exceed the amount budgeted, the parties agree that Owner shall not be liable for the amount of such increase until and unless said budget is amended as provided for in the Owner’s Home Rule Charter to allow for such increased amount. The Owner shall not authorize Change Orders, Payments for Extra or Deleted Work or Claims for Extra Costs as described in Articles 19 and 20 of these General Conditions without revising the budgeted amount accordingly.

ARTICLE 55 – NON-APPROPRIATION OF FUNDS

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the contract, the effectiveness and validity of the contract is contingent upon the appropriation of funds to fulfill the requirements of the contract. If the Owner, after a diligent and good faith effort, fails to appropriate sufficient monies to provide for payments under the contract, the contract is void. Also, the continuation of this contract into a new fiscal year (i.e., 11/1-10/31) is contingent upon the appropriation of funds to fulfill the requirements of the contract for such fiscal year. If Owner, after a diligent and good faith effort, fails to appropriate sufficient monies to provide for payments under this contract, the obligation to make payment under this contract shall terminate on the last day of the fiscal year for which funds were appropriated.

Prior to the commencement of Work and thereafter at the written request of Contractor, Owner shall provide Contractor with evidence of Project financing. Evidence of such financing shall be a condition precedent to Contractor’s commencing or continuing the Work. Contractor shall be notified to any material change in Project financing.

ARTICLE 56 - PARTICIPATION BY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES

The Lafayette Consolidated Government strongly encourages the participation of SEBs (Small Emerging Business Enterprise) in all contracts or procurements let by the Lafayette Consolidated Government for goods and services and labor and material. To that end, all contractors and suppliers are encouraged to utilize SEBs in the purchase or subcontracting of materials, supplies, services and labor and material in which disadvantaged businesses are available. Assistance in identifying said businesses may be obtained by calling (337) 291-8410.

ARTICLE 57 – STOCKPILED MATERIALS

With the prior consent of Owner, Contractor may purchase in advance materials to be used in the construction of the work and may stockpile same at a location agreed upon by Owner. However, notwithstanding prior payment for same, the risk of loss as a result of damage, theft, or otherwise to said stockpiled materials shall remain with Contractor and advance payment shall in no way relieve Contractor from its obligation to install said stockpiled materials as and when needed to complete the work. Owner shall require Contractor to execute an acknowledgement of Contractor’s continuing risk of loss and shall additionally require consent to the payment from

4752.02 33 00700

Page 34 GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISED June 2017

Contractor’s bonding company.

Payment for material and equipment stored off the project site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such material and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance storage and transportation to the project site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

ARTICLE 58 – HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

If the Contractor encounters asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or any other hazardous material or substance at the Project site, Contractor shall immediately cease work on the Project, or in the affected area, immediately notify the Owner in writing and await further direction by the Owner.

Upon receipt of notice of discovery of any hazardous materials or substances, Owner shall investigate and ensure that the hazardous materials or condition are remediated. Once the hazardous materials are remediated, Owner shall provide Contractor with written certification from independent testing laboratory that the hazardous conditions have been removed or rendered harmless.

Contractor shall be entitled to adjustment in the Contract time to the extent Contractor’s time for completion has been materially impacted by the presence of hazardous materials or conditions, and such condition was not caused by Contractor. In the event the hazardous material caused the Contractor to incur additional expense, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor under the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Articles 19 and 20 of these general Conditions.

Contractor shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances brought to the site by Contractor and costs to remediate or remove such hazardous materials unless the hazardous materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 59 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION

The parties shall use their best efforts to resolve all disputes in an amicable fashion. Prior to filing suit by either party with respect to any claims, or disputes arising between the parties, the disputes shall be submitted first to non-binding mediation. The mediation shall be conducted in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association. If the parties cannot agree to a private mediator, then the mediator shall be selected by the American Arbitration Association, upon the filing of a demand for mediation

If the dispute is not resolved by mediation within 60 days from the request for mediation, then either party may, but is not required to, institute legal proceedings. The parties agree that the 15 th Judicial District in and for the Parish of Lafayette, State of Louisiana shall have the sole jurisdiction in any action brought under the contract, or related to this Project. Alternatively, by written agreement of Owner and Contractor, the parties may elect to have all disputes resolved by arbitration.

4752.02 34 00700

SECTION 00820 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS

ARTICLE 1. INTRODUCTION

The work covered by these specifications shall include furnishing all plant, labor, supervision, materials, equipment and incidentals which may be required to complete “ EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION ” for the LAFAYETTE UTILITIES SYSTEM AND the LAFAYETTE CITY-PARISH CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT, LAFAYETTE, LOUISIANA" as shown on the contract drawings.

The work includes the removal of existing boiler, heat exchanger, gas mixing equipment, floating secondary roof, pumps, valves, and other equipment associated with the anaerobic digesters, the installation of a new boiler/heat exchanger, sludge pump, floating roof, piping and valves, structural work, gas line appurtenances, piping, instrumentation and controls, electrical facilities and other appurtenant and related items of construction.

ARTICLE 2. CONTRACT DRAWINGS

The work shall conform to the contract drawings titled “ EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION ” for the LAFAYETTE UTILITIES SYSTEM AND the LAFAYETTE CITY-PARISH CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT, LAFAYETTE, LOUISIANA", dated December 2017, prepared by Domingue, Szabo & Associates, Inc., Consulting Engineers, Lafayette, Louisiana, all of which form part of the Contract Documents. A total of three sets of final plans and contract documents will be furnished to the Contractor after the contract has been executed. Additional sets of documents required by the Contractor will be furnished at cost (to Contractor) upon request.

ARTICLE 3. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR

All payments to the Contractor are obligations of the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, Lafayette, Louisiana, and shall be made from funding arranged by the Owner.

Prior to the first payment, the Contractor shall have furnished on Owner approved forms and shall have received approval of: (a) a detailed estimate or schedule giving a complete line item breakdown of the contract price, and (b) itemized estimates of the amounts of work to be done by months for the purpose of scheduling partial payments thereon. A partial payment form shall be up-dated and be submitted monthly or less frequently for approval and processing for periodic progress payments to the Contractor.

ARTICLE 4. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

Prior to beginning construction, a pre-construction conference shall be held between the Contractor, the Owner and the Engineer and/or representatives of each to review responsibilities and procedures of each interested party, to review the requirements of the plans and specifications, to review the work priorities and schedules, project administration and disbursement procedures. This meeting will be prearranged by the Owner.

4752.02 1 00820

ARTICLE 5. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A proposed graphical construction progress schedule and a line item cost schedule of values shall be furnished by the Contractor before the Pre-Construction Conference. The schedule of values shall be subject to review and approval by the Owner. The final construction progress schedule and the final, approved schedule of values must be available prior to start of construction.

ARTICLE 6. NOTICE TO PROCEED

No work on the Contracts shall commence until the Owner has issued a Notice to Proceed directing the Contractor to proceed according to the Contract Documents. The date specified in the Notice to Proceed shall be the date on which the Contract time shall start.

ARTICLE 7. COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND COMPLETION

The Contractor will be required to commence work under this contract within ten (10) calendar days of the date specified in the written Notice to Proceed, and he shall be required to complete all work on the project within the number of calendar days stated in the agreement.

ARTICLE 8. DETERMINATION OF CONTRACT TIME FOR COMPLETION

The Contractor shall perform fully, entirely, and in a satisfactory and acceptable manner, the work contracted, within the number of calendar days stipulated in the bid. Time shall be computed as the number of consecutive calendar days elapsed from the effective date stated in the Notice to Proceed.

The following number of days for the corresponding months shall be considered as the anticipated number of days that could be lost due to adverse weather conditions. The Contractor may be allowed additional days if the total number of lost days due to weather for the entire contract period exceeds those listed below (total for months during contract period).

January 11 days July 6 days February 10 days August 5 days March 8 days September 4 days April 7 days October 3 days May 5 days November 5 days June 6 days December 8 days

ARTICLE 9. STORAGE OF MATERIALS

It shall be required that all materials be stored in an appropriate manner by the Contractor. The materials shall be adequately protected from the weather and shall be kept clean. All electrical equipment and all mechanical equipment having moving parts or not intended for outdoor service shall be stored inside weather tight buildings until installation and shall at all times be properly protected to prevent weather damage or physical damage.

4752.02 2 00820

ARTICLE 10. PRIVATE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY

The Contractor shall carry on his work in a manner to protect public and private property. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damages or alleged damages to private or public property which may result from his operations. All land which has been disturbed in any manner by construction operations shall be accurately graded for drainage, cleared of all debris and extraneous materials, be re-seeded and be left in a neat and presentable condition. No burning of trash, brush, wood or debris on the site will be permitted, except as conducted in accordance with regulations of the State and Local fire regulations and air control requirements.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange for access on or use of any private property, except for the existing utilities permits and easement rights of the Owner of such properties.

ARTICLE 11. EQUIPMENT DAMAGE TO STREETS

The Contractor shall provide on his equipment such devices necessary to prevent damage to surfaced streets, drives and parking areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing any unauthorized breaks or damage to the street, drives and parking area surfaces at no additional cost to the Owner.

ARTICLE 12. GUARANTEE

All work as herein specified and/or as indicated on the plans shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year, unless otherwise noted, from the date of recordation of the final acceptance of the work. The Contractor shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, make good any defects in materials or workmanship which may develop during said one-year period, and any damage to other work caused by such defects or the repairing of same, at his own expense and without cost to the Owner.

ARTICLE 13. CORRECTIONS

The Contractor shall perform all corrective work that is required during a period of one year from the time of acceptance of the contract. Such corrective work shall include proper filling of settled trench or earth fill and repairing of damage caused by such settlement, repairing cracks or other failures in structures, pipes, materials, equipment, instruments, or other reasonable repairs or corrections. Written notice shall be given by the Owner or his representative that such work is deemed necessary. In the event that the repairs are not made within thirty (30) days of date of the notice, the Owner may have the work performed by other parties. Costs arising from such repairs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

ARTICLE 14. TESTING LABORATORY

An independent testing laboratory shall be employed and be paid by the Owner to perform tests as required. The Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory in furnishing and obtaining samples of materials for testing, as may be required by the Engineers. The laboratory will perform services upon the request of the Engineer.

4752.02 3 00820

ARTICLE 15. COMMUNICATIONS

The Contractor shall maintain an adequate public communication system. He shall provide the Owner and the Engineer with a night number to call so that he may be advised of any emergency or other matter needing his attention. He shall have available at all times proper equipment and personnel to handle emergency conditions or other matters requiring immediate attention.

ARTICLE 16. MAINTENANCE OF DRAINAGE

The Contractor shall maintain adequate drainage during the process of construction. Performance of this work shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, covered under the contract price.

ARTICLE 17. ADJUSTING UTILITIES

The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying all public or private utility owners affected by the work at least one week prior to the time any work is contemplated on or adjacent to the utility. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages done by him to any utilities structures. All excavation shall be done by hand in the immediate vicinity of underground utilities lines. Sewerage and other utility lines shall be maintained in service and/or shall be relocated by the Contractor as required by the contract documents.

ARTICLE 18. SAFETY STANDARDS

With respect to all work performed under the contract, the Contractor shall comply with the safety standards requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) of 1970 (Public Law 91-596), as amended.

ARTICLE 19 ATTESTATIONS AFFIDAVIT REQUIREMENTS

In accordance with La. R.S. 38:2227, LOW BIDDER on this project must submit the completed Attestation Clause (Past Criminal Convictions of Bidders) form found in the bid documents. The Attestation Clause form shall be RECEIVED by Office of Purchasing & Property Management Division of Finance & Management, no later than ten days after opening of quotes. The submission should be identified with the name of the bidder, project name, project number and the words ATTESTATION CLAUSE. Form may be sent via US mail, express mail or hand delivered to:

Physical Address: Mailing Address Lafayette Consolidated Government Lafayette Consolidated Government Purchasing & Property Management Purchasing & Property Management 705 W. University Avenue PO Box 4017-C Lafayette LA 70506 Lafayette LA 70502

ARTICLE 20. SURVEYS

Site construction control reference points, horizontal and vertical, will be initially furnished by the Owner. These shall be maintained by the Contractor, who shall lay out and be responsible for all lines, elevations and measurements, as required in Article 13 of Section 00700, General 4752.02 4 00820 Conditions. THIS ARTICLE SUPERSEDES ARTICLE 13 OF SECTION 00700; CONSTRUCTION STAKING SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.

ARTICLE 21. COORDINATION OF WORK

The Contractor shall schedule work so as to minimize interference with the operation of the Owner’s facilities. The Contractor shall coordinate all work requiring connection to existing pipelines or structures with the Owner. All construction work affecting plant operations shall be approved by the Owner.

No units or pipes may be put out of service as long as the units affected by the construction are in operation. The Owner shall schedule a shutdown of a particular unit as required to make connections after adequate notice from the Contractor.

The Contractor shall give the Owner a minimum of seven (7) days notice when a unit or pipe shut down is required and will furnish the Owner a written schedule indicating the start time and duration that the particular unit or pipe will be out of service. Additional notice may be required for vessels requiring emptying.

ARTICLE 22. QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturers of equipment furnished on this project, must be able to show that they have at least three (3) installations operating successfully in the United States for the last three (3) years which incorporate the use of equipment meeting the specifications in every detail.

Manufacturers unable to meet the above requirements shall submit commitment from a bonding company for a maintenance bond guaranteeing that the equipment furnished and installed will perform in accordance with the Specifications. The amount of bond shall be sufficient to cover the cost of completely removing the installed equipment and furnishing and installing new equipment which meets the Specifications, and shall be for a minimum dollar value of three times the total manufacturer's cost of the equipment so guaranteed, payable to the Owner. The bond shall be in force for a period of four (4) years, commencing on the date of termination of the Contractor's performance bond guaranteeing the work. The bonding company shall be licensed in the State of Louisiana. The bonding company must have a policy holder rating of at least an "A" or better financial rating and a Class 10 or better General Policy Holders rating according to the latest A.M. Best Company rating. This maintenance bond shall be in addition to other requirements of these specifications.

ARTICLE 23. - MISCELLANEOUS WORK

There shall be no specific payment for any items to be removed, replaced or adjusted as required on the plans or in these documents, or for other necessary work unless specifically included as a bid item. Payment for bid item shall be considered to include payment for other work not specified as a separate bid item.

ARTICLE 24. HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS

If within twenty-four (24) hours after written notice, the Contractor has not corrected or remedied a hazardous condition or defect, the Owner shall have the right to take the necessary 4752.02 5 00820 steps to correct same. All costs shall be charged to the Contractor and, if not paid, shall be withheld from his periodic estimate or from remaining moneys due him. The Owner and Engineer assume no responsibility for any hazardous condition or defect which is not properly resolved by the Contractor at any time during the contract.

ARTICLE 25. ACCEPTANCE

Refer to Section 01705. In addition to the fulfillment of all requirements for Project Close-out, each unit of equipment constructed in this contract and all new mechanical and electrical equipment shall have been operated satisfactorily for a period of not less than thirty (30) days before acceptance.

ARTICLE 26. LOUISIANA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION & DEVELOPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

The technical sections (Sections II through X) of the Louisiana Department of Transportation & Development Standard Specifications for Road and Bridges are hereby made a part of these specifications by reference and are as binding as if included herewith. Note that the Louisiana Department of Transportation & Development Standard Specifications for Road and Bridges shall only apply for items for which no conflicting information is included within these documents. The requirements of the Louisiana Department of Transportation & Development Standard Specifications for Road and Bridges relative to measurement and payment shall not apply to this contract – payment provisions shall be as specified in the applicable sections of the documents bound herein and any addenda thereto.

If there is a conflict between the DOTD Specifications and the Detailed Specifications bound herewith, the specifications bound herewith shall control.

The Engineer shall have the authority to waive specific requirements of the referenced LA DOTD technical specifications when it is determined by the Engineer that the quality and end result of the contract work will not be significantly affected by the waiver (e.g., frequency of testing samples, lot sizes, etc.).

ARTICLE 27. DISPOSAL

Disposal of all debris removed in performing all work in the contract shall be off-site and in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations.

ARTICLE 28. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Observe and comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project.

B. Observe and comply with all applicable safety and health standards published by the Secretary of Labor under Section 107, Part 1585 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act.

4752.02 6 00820 C. Observe and comply with all applicable procedures in the "Work Area Traffic Control Handbook" for work within the roadway or adjacent to the roadway. The closure of a lane requires notification and approval of the Public Works Department of the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government.

ARTICLE 29. STATUTORY EMPLOYER

The Lafayette City-Parish Government, as Project Owner, is declared and shall be the "Statutory Employer" of the Contractor's employees working on this project.

ARTICLE 30. PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO

Prior to beginning any construction activity on the project site, including but not limited to mobilization, the Contractor shall video the entire site, including structures and improvements within and adjacent to temporary and permanent easements, to establish pre-construction conditions. The digital video shall be submitted to the Engineer on a DVD for approval. Should the Engineer find that the video does not adequately establish pre-construction conditions, the Contractor shall re-video as directed by the Engineer. The video shall become the property of the Owner.

ARTICLE 31. PRIOR APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS - NON-SUBBID ITEMS

Whenever manufacturers or trade names are mentioned in these plans or specifications, the words "or approved equal" shall be assumed to follow whether or not so stated. Manufacturers or trade names are used to establish a standard of quality and performance for the particular application.

Equivalent products may be submitted for the Engineer's approval. Requests for approval must be submitted to the Engineer as soon as possible but no later than seven (7) days, excluding weekends and holidays, prior to bid date. Submission shall include manufacturer's name, model number, brochures, operational data, construction features and other data required for verification of conformity with specifications. A minimum of two copies of all data will be required. FAX submittals will not be accepted. The Engineer will issue an addendum listing items that are approved as equivalent to those specified.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BASE HIS BID SOLELY ON THOSE ITEMS SPECIFIED OR INCLUDED IN A "PRIOR APPROVAL ADDENDUM" AS NO OTHER ITEMS WILL BE ACCEPTABLE.

ARTICLE 32. APPROVED EQUALS

If a potential supplier wishes to submit for prior approval a particular product other than a product specified in the contract documents, he shall do so no later than seven (7) days, excluding weekends and holidays, prior to the opening of bids.

4752.02 7 00820 ARTICLE 33. PROJECT ENGINEER The consulting engineers for this project are Domingue, Szabo & Associates, Inc., 102 Asma Boulevard, Suite 305, Lafayette, Louisiana 70508, telephone (337) 232-5182. FAX (337) 237- 7132.

ARTICLE 34. EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS AND SITE

Bidders shall thoroughly examine the site of the project and be familiar with the drawings and specifications. The failure or omissions of any bidder to examine the site or any form, instrument, addendum, or other documents shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligations with respect to his bid or to the Contract. The submission of a bid shall be taken as prima facie evidence of compliance with this Article.

ARTICLE 35. USE OF ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS

All engineering documents including Drawings, Specifications, and Reports provided by the Engineer (DS&A) to Client (LUS) or Contractor in conjunction with this Contract are instruments of service in respect to only the subject project. DSA shall retain ownership of said documents whether or not subject project is completed. Said documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by the Client, Contractor or others, whether directly or indirectly by reference or adoption, on any extensions of the subject project or on any other project or on any other site.

The Engineer (DS&A) assumes no responsibility for re-use and/or references by others in their work (e.g. Odor Control Design Engineers) to Drawings, Specifications, and Reports provided by the Engineer (DS&A) to Client (LUS) or Contractor whether in regard to accuracy, applicability, or for any other purposes.

ARTICLE 36. SITE CONSTRAINTS

The Contractor shall be responsible for all sheeting, shoring and bracing required to construct the project within the project site and to protect existing structures and utilities at no direct pay. The land made available by the Owner for staging, stockpiling of material and storage of material is limited to the project site. The Contractor is responsible to arrange for additional storage/staging area if required at no direct pay.

ARTICLE 37. VERIFICATION OF COMPATIBILITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

ALL manufacturers, including those named in the specifications, shall thoroughly review the documents for compliance with all specified requirements and compatibility with the specified arrangements and dimensions. Any changes to dimensions, arrangements, or any specified requirements, including connecting equipment and piping, shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer no less than ten (10) working days prior to the scheduled bid opening. Unless stated otherwise by addendum, the equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for any and all redesign required to accommodate their equipment. All drawings and calculations detailing the deviations from the plans and specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer with the shop drawings for approval. Drawings must be in AutoCad 2000 or more recent format and must be stamped by an Engineer licensed in the State of Louisiana. Submit both hard copies and

4752.02 8 00820 electronic copies for approval. The Contractor will be responsible for reimbursing the Owner for all costs associated with the Engineering review of the submitted modifications.

ARTICLE 38. INSURANCE – (ARTICLE 32 – GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISION)

The successful contractor will be required to furnish an ACORD certificate of insurance as follows:

I. Standard Worker's Compensation Insurance - Coverage for all Worker's Compensation claims as permitted under Louisiana State Law together with Employer's Liability Coverage of $1,000,000 minimum, per occurrence.

II. Commercial General Liability Insurance - Coverage under this policy must be provided on an "occurrence" basis, and not on a "claims made" basis. THE LAFAYETTE CITY- PARISH CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT, ITS OFFICIALS, EMPLOYEES AND VOLUNTEERS MUST BE NAMED AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED ON THE POLICY. All comprehensive general liability insurance shall include coverage for the following:

A. Premises Operations $1,000,000 B. Independent Contractors $1,000,000 C. Products - Completed Operations $1,000,000 D. Contractual Liability $1,000,000 E. Broad Form Property Damage $1,000,000

Additionally, the policy required by this Subsection shall also include Underground Explosion and Collapse with a minimum coverage of $1,000,000.

III. Business Auto Liability Policy

BODILY BODILY PROPERTY INJURY INJURY DAMAGE per person per accident per accident

A. Any Auto $ 1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 B. Owned Autos $ 1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 C. Non-Owned Autos $ 1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 D. Hired $ 1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000

If Coverage A - Any Auto is carried, Coverages B, C, & D will not be required. If the Contractor does not own an automobile (vehicle) and an automobile (vehicle) is utilized in the execution of the contract, then hired and non-owned coverage is required.

Any other requirements of Article 32, not addressed above, shall be applicable.

ARTICLE 39 – BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE – (ARTICLE 33 – GENERAL CONDITIONS REVISION)

Builders Risk insurance is not required on this project. 4752.02 9 00820

ARTICLE 40. AFFIDAVIT

The successful bidder will be required to execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit found hereafter in these Specifications.

ARTICLE 41. SIGNATURE AUTHORITY

Failure to submit written evidence of signature authority with proposal shall be cause for rejection of proposal. A corporate resolution meets this requirement. A copy of the Louisiana Secretary of State’s website DOES NOT meet this requirement.

END OF SECTION 00820

4752.02 10 00820 Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government Code of Ordinances Chapter 78, Article III, Division 2

EXCAVATIONS

ARTICLE III. EXCAVATIONS

DIVISION 1. GENERALLY

Secs. 78-61—78-80. Reserved.

DIVISION 2. CITY OF LAFAYETTE

Subdivision I. In General

Sec. 78-81. Territorial Applicability.

The provisions of this division apply only in the city.

Sec. 78-82. Inspection of Restoration Work.

An inspector from the public works department may be assigned to inspect the work site of an excavation on a periodic basis to ensure that proper workmanship and materials of acceptable quality are being used in the restoration work. The inspector shall act only as an aid in accomplishing the results as outlined in this division. The presence of an inspector does not relieve the permittee of the obligation to fully comply with the intent of this division.

(City Code 1965, § 19-22)

Sec. 78-83. Correction of Unacceptable Work.

(a) Should any person or owner of utilities fail to replace materials, fail to restore areas to their original conditions, or in any way fail to comply with conditions of this division, after he has been notified by the public works department that such work is unacceptable, the city- parish consolidated government shall have the right to perform the necessary work or restoration to original condition and charge the cost, plus a 25 percent administrative charge, to the permittee doing the excavation work. It is provided, however, that no such

1 June 6, 2000 work shall be undertaken by the public works department until the permittee doing the excavation work shall have had an opportunity to do the work himself within at least ten days after notice has been given to him. Proper notice shall consist of notification by certified mail or by personal delivery.

(b) When the party doing the excavation work fails to respond to proper notice as set forth in subsection (a) of this section and the city-parish consolidated government is required to perform the necessary work of restoration to original condition, the actual cost to the city- parish consolidated government, plus a 25 percent administrative charge in having to perform the work, is declared to be the obligation of the permittee doing the excavation work. After the city-parish consolidated government has performed the necessary work of restoration to original condition, the city-parish consolidated government shall invoice the permittee doing the excavation work for the actual cost of the work performed, plus a 25 percent administrative charge, and the permittee shall have ten days in which to pay the invoice in full. If the permittee fails to pay the invoice in full within ten days, the city- parish consolidated government shall have the right to enforce collection of the actual cost, together with the cost of prosecuting the suit, in any court of proper jurisdiction.

(c) In addition thereto, the public works department shall have the right to revoke a permit issued under this division upon any violation by the permittee of this division, and the public works department shall also have the right to refuse a future permit to a person or owner of utilities who has, in the past, failed to comply with all the requirements of this division.

(City Code 1965, § 19-23)

Sec. 78-84. Failure of Work; Warranty.

(a) Should settlement occur over restored trenches or excavations or should there occur any other failure due to faulty construction, within a period of one year after restoration, it shall be the obligation of the permittee who did the work to correct the settlement and/or failure, including refilling, tamping and repaving, resodding and reseeding.

(b) The public works department shall notify, by certified mail or by personal delivery, the permittee of any condition due to settlement and/or any other failure of restoration. The permittee shall have ten days after receipt of the notice to make the necessary corrections, including opening, refilling, tamping and repaving, resodding and reseeding, as may be required by the public works department.

(c) If the permittee fails to respond to proper notice as set forth in subsection (b) of this section, the city-parish consolidated government shall have the right to perform the necessary corrective work. If the city-parish consolidated government performs the necessary corrective work, the actual cost, plus a 25 percent administrative charge to the city-parish consolidated government in having to perform the work, is declared to be an obligation of the permittee who did the excavation work. After the city-parish consolidated

2 June 6, 2000 government has performed the necessary corrective work, the city-parish consolidated government shall invoice the permittee for the actual cost, plus a 25 percent administrative charge, and the permittee shall have ten days in which to pay the invoice in full. If the permittee fails to pay the invoice in full within ten days, the city-parish consolidated government shall have the right to enforce collection of the actual cost, plus a 25 percent administrative charge, plus all costs of prosecuting the suit, in any court of proper jurisdiction.

(d) In addition thereto, the public works department shall have the right to revoke a permit upon any violation by the permittee of this division, and shall also have the right to refuse a future permit to a person or owner of utilities who has, in the past, failed to comply with all the requirements of this division.

(City Code 1965, § 19-24)

Sec. 78-85. Compliance with Specifications.

It shall be the duty of a permittee under this division to do all work in strict accordance with the specifications, terms and conditions set out in his application and permit, and any failure to comply therewith shall be punishable in accordance with section 1-9. In addition thereto, the permittee shall be liable to the city-parish consolidated government for any cost, expense or liability incurred by the city-parish consolidated government by reason of the failure of the permittee to strictly comply with such specifications, terms and conditions.

(City Code 1965, § 19-25)

Sec. 78-86. Trenching in Grass Areas.

Trenching in grass areas or planting spaces shall be replaced in a condition close to that which existed prior to the excavation, particularly regarding sod or grass and proper elevation of the finished surface. All excess material shall be removed and overgraded to ensure no obstructions to mowing operations. In planting areas, no trench or excavation shall be made that will remove or endanger any shrubbery, flowers, trees or other planting. Should it be determined that a trench should be excavated at a location that would cause removal of or endanger any planting, special arrangements shall be made with the public works department, operations division, for the work prior to making excavations.

(City Code 1965, § 19-21)

Secs. 78-87--78-100. Reserved.

3 June 6, 2000

Subdivision II. Permit

Sec. 78-101. Required; Exceptions.

It shall be unlawful for any person or owner of utilities, private or public, to make any excavation or opening in or boring below any street, alley, sidewalk, boulevard, neutral ground or planting space located within the public right-of-way without first obtaining a permit from the public works department. If emergency repairs are necessary to restore or maintain service, the entity making the emergency repairs need not obtain a permit in advance of making the repairs, but shall comply with all other applicable provisions of this division. The permit shall be obtained at the first reasonable opportunity after such emergency repairs have commenced. No permit is required under this division whenever any person has been awarded a public contract pursuant to the laws of the state and for the construction of improvements on behalf of the city- parish consolidated government. Work crews of the city-parish consolidated government shall not be required to obtain a permit for right-of-way excavation outside pavement areas, but they shall adhere to construction specifications contained in this division.

(City Code 1965, § 19-16)

Sec. 78-102. Duties of Permittee.

(a) Protection of existing structures and facilities; submission of plans. It shall be the duty and obligation of all applicants for permits under this division to make all investigations necessary to locate all existing underground utilities, structures, pipelines, conduits, etc., in the area where work is contemplated. It shall be the duty and obligation of the permittee to maintain and protect any and all existing structures, etc., within the limits of the work area. Any applicant for a permit to perform excavations within the public right-of-way shall submit sufficient data, plans, specifications, drawings, etc., which clearly define the proposed work, and also plans for restoration. The permit must be secured prior to the commencement of any work. Any work within the public right-of-way that is underway without a permit will be stopped by the city-parish consolidated government immediately upon detection, and no further work will be allowed until the proper permit is issued for that work.

(b) Deposit; restoration of site. No deposit shall be required for a permit to perform work within the right-of-way. However, the permittee is fully responsible to restore the work area to a condition as good or better than the original condition.

(c) Protection of public safety. It shall be the duty and obligation of the permittee to safeguard the public by maintaining the necessary guards, barricades and safety lights, in accordance with article IV of this chapter. The permittee shall maintain the street, alley or sidewalk surface in a good and safe condition, and the permittee shall hold the city-parish

4 June 6, 2000 consolidated government harmless from any claim for damages or personal injury as a result of such work by the permittee.

(City Code 1965, § 19-17)

Secs. 78-103--78-120. Reserved.

Subdivision III. Installation Standards for Utility Lines

Sec. 78-121. Definitions.

The following words, terms and phrases, when used in this subdivision, shall have the meanings ascribed to them in this section, except where the context clearly indicates a different meaning:

Arterial street means a street used primarily for through traffic, carrying heavy loads and large volumes of traffic.

Residential street means a street used primarily for access to abutting properties for traffic turning off arterial streets.

(City Code 1965, § 19-18)

Cross references: Definitions generally, § 1-2.

Sec. 78-122. Water Lines.

Standards for installation of water lines are as follows:

(1) Arterial streets. Must be bored. Any six-inch outside pipe barrel diameter line or greater must be encased. The casing must be installed by boring such that the bore hole is not greater by two inches than the outside barrel diameter of the casing. Any water line less than six inches outside barrel diameter must be bored such that the bore hole is not greater by two inches than the outside diameter of the bell of the water pipe. If this requirement cannot be met, then the six-inch or less barrel diameter water line must be encased. In either event, the crown of the bore hole shall be not less than 42 inches below the surface of the pavement. Taps into existing facilities under arterial streets that exist at less than 42 inches from the pavement are allowed.

(2) Residential streets. Water lines may be installed by cutting the street or by boring. If boring is used, the bore hole diameter must not be over two inches larger than the pipe

5 June 6, 2000 bell diameter. The crown of the bore hole must be not less than 42 inches below the pavement surface.

(City Code 1965, § 19-18(a))

Sec. 78-123. Gravity Sewer Lines.

Standards for installation of gravity sewer lines are as follows:

(1) Arterial streets. All gravity sewer lines must be bored such that the diameter of the bore hole is not larger than the outside diameter of the gravity sewer pipe barrel (not flange) plus three inches; if this requirement cannot be met, the sewer pipe must be encased. The casing must be installed by boring such that the bore hole is not greater by two inches than the outside barrel diameter of the casing. The crown of the bore hole must be not less than 42 inches below the pavement surface, unless it is required to tie into existing lines.

(2) Residential streets. The gravity sewer line may be installed by street cut or bored. If bored, the diameter of the bore hole shall not be larger than the outside diameter of the gravity sewer pipe barrel (not flange) plus three inches; if this requirement cannot be met, the sewer pipe must be encased and the bore hole diameter must be within two inches of the diameter of the casing. In either event, the crown of the bore hole shall be not less than 42 inches below the surface of the pavement, unless it is required to tie into existing lines.

(City Code 1965, § 19-18(b))

Sec. 78-124. Sewer Force Mains.

Standards for installation of sewer force mains are as follows:

(1) Arterial streets. Must be bored. Any six-inch outside pipe barrel diameter line or greater must be encased. Boring and casing requirements are the same as for water lines under arterial streets.

(2) Residential streets. May be installed by street cut or bored. Boring and casing requirements are the same as for water lines under residential streets.

(City Code 1965, § 19-18(c))

Sec. 78-125. Electrical Lines.

Standards for installation of electrical lines are as follows:

6 June 6, 2000

(1) Arterial streets. Must be bored. Boring and casing requirements are the same as for gravity sewer lines under arterial streets.

(2) Residential streets. May be installed by street cut or bored. If bored, requirements are the same as for gravity sewer lines under arterial streets.

(City Code 1965, § 19-18(d))

Sec. 78-126. Gas Lines.

Standards for installation of gas lines are as follows:

(1) Arterial streets. Must be bored. Any six-inch outside pipe barrel diameter or greater must be cased. The same requirements apply as for water lines under arterial streets, except that any gas line operated under pressure greater than 200 pounds per square inch must be cased, regardless of its diameter.

(2) Residential streets. May be installed by street cut or bored. If bored, the same requirements apply as for water lines under arterial streets, except that any gas line operating under pressure greater than 200 pounds per square inch must be cased, regardless of its diameter.

(City Code 1965, § 19-18(e))

Sec. 78-127. Telephone and Television Cable.

Standards for installation of telephone and television cable are as follows:

(1) Arterial streets. Must be bored. Boring and casing requirements are the same as for gravity sewer lines under arterial streets.

(2) Residential streets. May be installed by street cut or bored. If bored, requirements are the same as for gravity sewer lines under arterial streets.

(City Code 1965, § 19-18(f))

Secs. 78-128--78-140. Reserved.

7 June 6, 2000 Subdivision IV. Street Cuts and Bores

Sec. 78-141. General Standards.

General standards for street cuts and bores are as follows:

(1) When pipes are encased, the casing shall extend through the street from ditch line to ditch line or to not less than two feet beyond the back of the curb. Pipes or casings shall be not less than 42 inches below the pavement surface or less than 24 inches below the theoretical flow line of the side ditches. Crossing shall be made at as nearly a right angle to the roadway center as possible. No existing drainage structures may be used for the purpose of pipe crossing. If a street is cut, it shall be done one half at a time, thereby allowing traffic on the other half; except that with proper justification and public works department approval, the entire street may be cut at one time.

(2) When pipes are installed and all necessary tests are approved, the restoration work shall then be completed before the beginning of construction on another section of the project.

(City Code 1965, § 19-19(a))

Sec. 78-142. Trenching and Backfilling.

Trenching and backfilling procedures for street cuts and bores shall be in accordance with sound engineering practices and the following procedures:

1) All excavations shall be shored and sheeted if necessary to prevent the walls of the trench from caving into the excavation.

2) It shall be the duty and the obligation of the permittee to barricade the excavation or cover the opening, as is necessary to ensure a safe working area, and the permittee shall hold the city-parish consolidated government harmless from any claim for damages or personal injury as a result of such work by the permittee.

3) All backfill shall be select A-4 soil classification, as per the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials' classification system for soils, and shall be free of all foreign matter. Soil that is dug out of the excavation may be used for backfill if it meets this soil classification and is approved by the public works department. The backfill soil must be sufficiently dry, or moist, in order to attain proper compaction.

4) All excavations through streets, alleys, sidewalks or other structures shall be backfilled under the control of an independent testing laboratory hired by the permittee. The testing laboratory shall approve the backfill soil and test each layer of compaction soil for density. The testing laboratory shall furnish the public works department a laboratory report certifying the density test results.

8 June 6, 2000

5) All backfill under the roadway pavement shall be mechanically tamped in six-inch to eight- inch layers up to the subgrade to 95 percent of standard proctor density. In areas outside the roadway pavement, the backfill shall be compacted to 90 percent of standard proctor density.

6) An alternate method of backfill for trenches through streets, alleys, sidewalks or other structures shall be to entirely fill the trench to subgrade with Fill-Crete, which is a cementitious grout mixture of sand, cement and water, in the following proportions:

a. Cement: 188 pounds.

b. Sand: 3,010 pounds.

c. Water: 46.2 gallons.

This mix design will produce one cubic yard of mixture and takes into consideration a 5.7 percent moisture level in the sand aggregate. Concrete or any alteration of this mix is not acceptable and must be removed at the permittee's expense.

(City Code 1965, § 19-19(b))

Sec. 78-143. Concrete Pavement Restoration.

Concrete pavement restoration for street cuts and bores shall be in accordance with sound engineering practices and the following procedures:

(1) A 4,000 psi (minimum) concrete shall be used for street or alley pavement restoration and a 2,500 psi (minimum) concrete shall be used for sidewalk and curb restoration.

(2) A saw cut shall be made at least two inches deep into pavement in such a method as to produce a straight, clean edge around the patch to be restored.

(3) If a street cut is made within two feet of an existing crack or pavement joint, the cut shall be extended past the crack.

(4) If a street cut is made within three feet of an existing curb, it and the intermediate pavement shall be removed and restored. (5) All excavated material, as well as debris left by the contractor, shall be hauled out of the work area and disposed of by the permittee.

(6) All loose material within the trench is to be removed and the top and inside edge of the cut pavement is to be swept clean.

9 June 6, 2000 (7) All trenches backfilled with soil backfill shall be mechanically tamped. Sand backfill shall not be used beneath any pavement or around any drainage structure. Sand backfill may be used only if specifically approved by the public works department in writing.

(8) An epoxy bonding agent is to be applied to the inside edge of the cut immediately before pouring concrete. The epoxy resin system to be used must be first approved by the public works department. The epoxy bonding agent may be eliminated by installing steel dowels which will bind the new pavement to the old existing pavement and provide for load transfer. These dowels must be installed in a manner acceptable to the public works department.

(9) An independent testing laboratory shall be hired by the permittee to design and control the concrete mixture to be used. The laboratory shall make four test cylinders of the concrete mixture and test them at three, five, seven and 28 days for compressive strength. The laboratory shall furnish the city-parish consolidated government with a report certifying the compressive strength test results. This is not required for pours of less than two cubic yards.

(10) All concrete placement, vibration and form work and curing shall be in accordance with the 1982 edition of the Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, section 601. The finished texture shall be a broom finish.

(11) Traffic may not resume on the newly restored pavement until a compressive strength of 3,000 psi is obtained from the laboratory-prepared concrete test cylinders. The permittee shall provide for effective traffic control and maintenance during the concrete curing period.

(12) If the restoration encompasses a contraction or expansion joint, the permittee shall replace it. The new joint shall match the original design and be of the same quality.

(13) Minimum patch width shall be four feet wide.

(14) The existing concrete pavement shall be cut back a minimum of 12 inches past the vertical trench wall, allowing the newly restored pavement to be supported on the existing road base.

(15) The minimum thickness of restored pavement shall be the thickness of the existing pavement or ten inches, whichever is greater.

(City Code 1965, § 19-19(c))

Sec. 78-144. Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Restoration.

Asphaltic concrete pavement restoration for street cuts and bores shall be in accordance with sound engineering practices and the following procedures:

10 June 6, 2000

(1) The asphalt pavement shall be saw cut, or cut in such a method as to produce a straight, clean edge around the patch.

(2) All trenches are to be mechanically tamped as mentioned in section 78-142, if soil backfill is used. Sand backfill shall not be used beneath any pavement or around any drainage structure. Sand backfill may be used only if specifically approved by the public works department in writing.

(3) Full-depth asphaltic concrete shall be compacted from the subgrade to the finished pavement grade in layers not to exceed four inches in thickness.

(4) Full-depth asphaltic concrete shall be a minimum thickness of eight inches below the existing asphalt pavement surface or to the bottom of the existing base, whichever is greater.

(5) All asphaltic concrete, as well as tack coating, shall conform to the specifications of the state department of transportation and development. All asphaltic concrete shall be type 1 wearing course or type 3 wearing course, as specified by the Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, 1982 edition.

(6) Prior to compacting asphaltic concrete within the trench or the restoration of the pavement, a tack coat shall be applied to the top and the inside edge of the existing cut asphaltic concrete pavement once it is swept clean.

(7) Compaction of the asphaltic concrete shall be obtained by mechanical tampers or rollers that will adequately compact the asphaltic concrete in all areas of the trench. The compaction tools must be approved by the public works department.

(8) When the final layer of asphalt is laid down to be compacted, it shall be a thickness of 20 percent more than the desired compacted thickness. This will compact flush with the plane of the existing pavement. Example: If the desired thickness is 2 1/2 inches, lay down three inches, since 2.5" x 0.2 = 0.5" + 2.5" = 3.0".

(9) The finished asphalt shall be finished rolled until all creases are removed from the new pavement.

(10) The newly restored asphalt shall be protected by means of a flagman or some effective barrier to prevent traffic from driving on the patch until it has sufficiently cooled.

(11) On all asphalt streets, except those that have full-depth asphalt bases, a Portland cement concrete base may be used instead of a full-depth asphalt as mentioned in this section. The concrete base shall be a minimum 4,000 psi, and shall be placed over the compacted subgrade and shall have a minimum thickness of eight inches or to the bottom of the existing base, whichever thickness is greater. A 1 1/2-inch space shall be left between the restored base and the top of the existing asphaltic concrete surface to provide for the correct

11 June 6, 2000 restoration of the new asphaltic concrete pavement. The same requirements for concrete mentioned in section 78-143 apply here. Traffic may not resume on the newly restored base and asphalt pavement until the concrete base reaches a compressive strength of 3,000 psi.

(12) Asphaltic concrete pavement restoration over a Portland cement concrete base shall be as follows:

a. Sweep clean the top of the concrete base and the top and inside edge of the cut existing asphaltic concrete pavement.

b. Apply a tack coat to both the top of the concrete base and the inside and top edge of the cut existing asphaltic concrete pavement.

c. Restore the layer of asphaltic concrete, as described in this section, taking into consideration an additional 20 percent laydown thickness of the hot asphaltic concrete.

d. Compaction and protection of the restored asphaltic concrete shall be as described in this section.

(City Code 1965, § 19-19(d))

Sec. 78-145. Boring.

Street borings shall begin at the outfall end of the pipe, whenever possible. If the grade at the boring end is below the ground surface, suitable pits or trenches shall be excavated for the purpose of conducting the operations and for placing the joints of pipe. Adequate sheeting and bracing shall be provided to prevent earth cave-ins. The method used shall be such as not to weaken or damage the overburden. The pipe shall not vary laterally or vertically by more than three inches in ten feet from the intended straight line and grade. Any variation shall be regular, and no abrupt changes in direction shall be permitted. Any pipe damaged or misaligned shall be removed and replaced. The use of water and other fluids in connection with boring operations shall be permitted only to the extent necessary to lubricate the cuttings. Jetting shall not be permitted. Any overcutting of the bore hole shall be remedied by pressure grouting the entire length of the installation.

(City Code 1965, § 19-20)

Secs. 78-146--78-170. Reserved.

12 June 6, 2000

Dear Bidder:

As an economic development initiative, the Lafayette City-Parish Council has adopted the Small and Emerging Business Program. This program will assist you in identifying subcontractors who may be able to provide you with competitive pricing for your bids.

Attached is a list of contractors who are recognized by the Lafayette Consolidated Government as a Small and Emerging Business. Whenever you have an opportunity, please consider subcontracting with one of these businesses. By subcontracting with these businesses you will not only find competitive pricing, but you will contribute to the economic development of Lafayette Parish. As you peruse this list, you may discover that you have subcontracted with some of these businesses in the past.

Your participation is this economic development initiative is greatly appreciated.

Sincerely,

Shaun P. Williams Title VI/ADA Coordinator

LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT CERTIFIED SMALL EMERGING BUSINESS LIST AS OF 4/22/16

SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Accounting Services, Accounting Assistant 5002 N/A system installation, 124 Hummingbird Lane and training Lafayette, LA 70506 337-989-8107, Fax 337-989-9245

Air Conditioning Comfort Innovations, LLC 3025 Twelve Oaks Avenue Baton Rouge, LA 70820 225-937-5538 [email protected]

Advertising, Marketing, Universal Communications 90610 N/A And Silk Screening 114 W. Vermilion Ste. 208 Lafayette, LA 70501 337-237-1612, Fax 337-294-2244

Auto Body & Paint Malveaux’s Collission & Restoration N/A 905 Cameron Street Lafayette, LA 70503 337-261-1954

Auto Body & Paint Shop Rapid Paint and Body Shop N/A 1605 N. Bertrand Drive Lafayette, LA 70503 337-291-2556, Fax 337-291-2824

Building Construction JD’s Rebar and Construction, Inc. 1348 Rapides Avenue Alexandria, LA 71301 318-561-2977 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

Building Construction Overton Construction 90505 30133 P. O. Box 216 Livonia, LA 70755 225-637-3805, Fax 225-637-4884

Building Construction, World Wide Contractors 90505 37335 Electrical, Curbs, and 305 Kesington Drive Bldg. Constr., Elec. Work (Statewide), Mechanical Gutters Lafayette, LA 70508 Work, Specialty Instu. & Calibration

Building Contractor First Millennium Construction, LLC 908 Arthur Street Lafayette, LA 70501 337-593-2200 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

Building Contractor T.J.J Builders 90513 N/A 123 Tournior Street Lafayette, LA 70506 337-234-6285

Building Maintenance Lewis Services 90513 N/A P. O. Box 81187 Lafayette, LA 70598 337-232-0675

SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Building Maintenance Michael’s Janitorial 90513 N/A 135 Kennedy Drive Lafayette, LA 70501 337-344-8772

Building Material Metal Studs 11000 N/A 606 Cobblestone Road Lafayette, LA 70508 337-234-9797, Fax 337-235-8388

Building Consulting PFSG, Inc. 2306 Kaliste Saloom Road Lafayette, LA 70508 337-984-4431, Fax 337-984-4432

Caterers Café Evergreen 90638 N/A 1601 Eraste Landry Road Lafayette, LA 70506 337-232-8284

Civil Engineering ILSI Engineering C 1946 1100 Poydras Ste. 2775 New Orleans, LA 70163 504-523-1619, Fax 504-523-9258

Child Care & Learning Whiz Kids Early Childhood Learning Center N/A Center 4011 Moss Street Lafayette, LA 70507 337-233-7370, Fax 337-233-7370

Chiropractic Services Dr. John Sullivan, Chiropractor N/A 105 Interpendence Blvd., Ste 1 Lafayette, LA 70506 337-984-9276, Fax 337-984-9276

Clearing & Grubbing, Derouen’s Heavy Equipment 90509, 90550 19229 Demoltion 1131 La Maison Road specialty: Culverts and drainage structures Duson, LA 70529 specialty: Earthwork, drainage and levees 337-873-6336 specialty: Furnishing and spreading materials

Clearing & Grubbing, Overton Construction Co. Inc. 90509, 90550 30133 Demoltion P. O. Box 1186 Building Construction, Highway, Street and Carencro, LA 70520-1186 Bridge Construction 337-896-3237, Fax 337-896-4269 specialty: Demolition Work

Coating & Pressure Acadiana Pressure Washing Service N/A Washing Services 114 Dogwood Drive Lafayette, LA 70501 338-234-7086

Commercial Construction C-core, Inc. 45365 7258 Grand Prairie Highway Rayne, LA 70578 337-873-6410 [email protected]

Commercial and C&E Contractors of Lafayette 90583 N/A Residential Renovations 211 Liberty Avenue, Apt. 231 Lafayette, LA 70508 337-981-8255

SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Commercial and B&M Industries, Inc. 90583 N/A Residential Renovations 113 Nolan Broussard, LA 70518 337-837-2771

Communications Deep South Communications, LLC Construction 17555 George O’Neal Baton Rouge, LA 70817 225-802-9000 [email protected]

Computer Sales & Compu Star 5001 N/A Service 2671 Main Highway Breaux Bridge, LA 70517 337-291-2505

Computer Sales & E & E Computers, LLC 5001 N/A Service 2808 West Pinhook Road, #5 Lafayette, LA 70508 337-233-2446

Computer Sales & Express Computers 5001 N/A Service 103 West Main Broussard, LA 70508 337-367-8368, Fax 337-839-0046

Computer Sales & Qsystem Computers Inc. 5001 N/A Service 7104 Highway 103, Ste. 101 Washington, LA 70589-4420 1-800-214-0927

Computer Sales & Total Computer Solutions, Inc. 5001 N/A Service 3419 NW Evangeline Thruway., Ste. A-8 Carencro, LA 70520 337-886-2827, Fax 337-886-7666

Computer Systems Design Swill Services, Inc. 218 Martin Oaks Drive Lafayette, LA 70501 337-453-2000 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

Computer Network RC3 Consulting 5001 N/A Consulting 211 Adrienne Street Lafayette, LA 70502 337-236-3220

Cosmetologist/Hair Hair Plus N/A Stylist 1602 North University Lafayette, LA 70501 337-233-7841

Custom Furniture Heem’s Woodworks & Custom Furniture 90583 N/A 112 Prejean Road Carencro, LA 70520 337-886-8673

Data Processing Professional Documents, Inc. N/A 209 Halcott Drive Lafayette, LA 70503 337-988-5434

SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Distributors Btrewster Procurement Group, Inc. 90703 N/A (Industrial & Office) 509 ½ Steveson Street Lafayette, LA 70501 337-291-9009

Distributors Gulf Coast Industrial Supply, Inc. N/A (Industrial) 524 Cedar Crest Court Lafayette, LA 70501 337-216-0976

Distributors ORB Enterprises, Inc. (Wholesale foods) 819 Whitmore Road Scott, LA 70583 337-873-6874

Distributors Papa Jeabert’s Inc. Inc 3020 N/A (Kitchen equipment) 530-C W. Pinhook Lafayette, LA 70503 337-267-4468, Fax 337-236-6781

Drafting Harris Design N/A 128 Demande Blvd., Ste. 212 Lafayette, LA 70503 337-266-9900, Fax 337-266-9916

Dragshoes Gueydan Mfg., Inc. P. O. Box 59 Gueydan, LA 70548 800-952-9335, Fax 337-536-7926

Electrical Contractor CA-Par Electric, Inc P. O. Box 1323 Kenner, LA 70063 504-465-3750

Electrical Contractor C & S Coatings Inspections, Inc. 90530 N/A 207 Wilbourn Street Lafayette, LA 70506 337-981-1876

Electrical Contractor Curtis Nelson Electric, LLC 5718 Fremin Road, Lot #1 New Iberia, LA 70560 337-369-7973 [email protected]

Engineering Services Syntergy 821 Westford Street Carencro, LA 70520 337-781-4979 [email protected]

Electrical Contractor Metro Electric & Maintenance 90530 29357 Telecommunications P. O. Box 5021 Electrical (statewide) Lafayette, LA 70502 337-232-3539, Fax 337-232-9067 (Certified DBE)

Employment Services Express Employment Professionals 100 Beauvias Avenue, B-3 Lafayette, LA 70507 337-896-6066 [email protected] SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Environmental Services Environmental Sampling 90680 25438 335 Teljean Road specialty: Hazardous Waste Treatment or Removal Lafayette, LA 70503 specialty: Install, Repair or Close Underground 337-989-7070 Storage Tanks

Exercise Equipment LL Fitness, Inc. N/A 117 D Cason Road Broussard, LA 70518 337-837-1965

Fencing A-1 Affordable Fencing Company 90541 7258 Grand Prairie Highway Rayne, LA 70578 337-873-7889 [email protected]

Fencing Ercon Corporation 90541 N/A P. O. Box 61770 Lafayette, LA 70596-1770 337-837-4118, Fax 337-837-2252

Financial Services Francis Financial Group, LLC 400 Poydras Street, Suite 2400 New Orleans, LA 70130 504-566-3958 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

Flowers D & S Flowers & Rental N/A 1602 North University Avenue Lafayette, LA 70501 337-289-6850, Fax 337-593-9187

Food Product ORB Enterprises, Inc. N/A Development and 819 Whitmore Road Wholesale Scott, LA 70583 337-873-6874, Fax 337-873-4456

General Freight Trucking For the Family Truckin’ LLC 701 Teurlings Drive Lafayette, LA 70501 337-347-1716 [email protected]

General Freight Trucking JDA Trucking, Inc. 299 St. Espirit Road Carencro, LA 70520 337-280-6439 (Certified DBE)

General Freight Trucking S.C.K. Trucking & General Construction Building Construction P. O. Box 403 Paulina, LA 70763 225-869-0824 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

General Freight Trucking Wilbert Simon Trucking 3317 Livington Road New Iberia, LA 70560 337-364-0139 [email protected]

SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Gift, Novelty, and Cajun Country Store, Inc. N/A Souvenir Shop 401 Cypress Street Lafayette, LA 70501 337-233-7977, Fax 337-233-0764

Human Resource Janus Resources 90622 N/A Consulting P. O. Box 51853 Lafayette, LA 70505 337-233-8696, Fax 337-367-5454

Insurance Claims P & M Investigations N/A Investigations P. O. Box 90741 Lafayette, LA 70509 337-593-8246

Interior Design A Plus Interiors Consultant 518 St. Patrick Street Lafayette, LA 70506 337-856-8556, Fax 337-237-0964

Janitorial Services & Fuselier’s Janitorial 90614, 10650 N/A Supplies 502 12 th Street Lafayette, LA 70501 337-234-9600

Janitorial Supplies & Justice Janitorial Services, LLC Services 13632 Goodwood Drive Baton Rouge, LA 70815 225-273-7447 [email protected]

Janitorial Supplies & Sharp & Clean 561740 – Carpet and Upholstery Cleaning Services Services 203 Milton Estates 561720 – Janitorial Services Youngsville, LA 70592 B45 – Janitorial Services 337-303-8628 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

Janitorial Supplies & Sherman & Associates Services P. O. Box 1169 Carencro, LA 70520 337-886-7889 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

Janitorial Supplies & Williams Cleaning Wizards 561720 - Janitorial Serivces Services P. O. Box 454 B48 – Commercial Cleaning Maurice, LA 70555 B45 – Janitorial Services (Certifiede DBE)

Landscaping & Lawn Lewis Services Care P. O. Box 81187 Lafayette, LA 70598 337-233-0675

Landscaping & Lawn World Wide Contractors 90555 37355 Care 305 Kensington Drive Building Construction, Electrical, Mechanical Lafayette, LA 70508 337-826-4395

SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Landscaping & MICO, Inc. 90555 Construction 1300 West Elm Street Eunice, LA 70535 337-457-0701, Fax 337-546-0395

Limited Food Creole Fried Chicken N/A Restaurant 01 ½ Lacobie Street Lafayette, LA 70501 337-866-4774, Fax 337-993-2368

Machine Work & Hebert’s Machine Shop Fabrication 1005 American Legion Drive Rayne, LA 70578

Medical Supplies Lafayette Medical Enterprises Inc N/A 116 Kol Drive Broussard, LA 70518 337-837-4394

Men’s Clothing Fit For A King N/A Apparel and Accessories 406 Attakapas Road Lafayette, LA 70501 337-261-1131, Fax 337-235-5070

Oil & Gas Maintenance Superior Group, Inc. N/A Environmental Cleanup, P. O. Box 191 Heavy Equipment Youngsville, LA 70592 Operation 337-856-8512, Fax 337-857-8830 (Certified DBE)

Oil & Gas Maintenance Huntington Oilfield Services, LLC Sandblasting and Painting, and Equipment Cleaning Environmental Cleanup, 200 Midway Street Heavy Equipment Lafayette, LA 70506 Operation 337-235-5274, Fax 337-234-4200 Mobile 337-846-3212 www.huntingtonoilfieldservices.com

Oil & Gas Maintenance Diesel Fuelmasters, LLC Environmental Cleanup, 942 Fire Tower Road Heavy Equipment P. O. Box 18 Operation Spearsville, LA 71277 863-993-3835

Optometry Service Specs Optical, Inc. N/A 431 B East Pont Des Mouton Road Lafayette, LA 70507 337-593-8777

Painting and Wall Blue Ribbon Painting 238990, 238320 N/A Covering Contractor 2900 West Willow Street Lot 58 Scott, LA 70583 337-654-3584 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

Painting, Specialty W Group Incorporated Coating, Drywall 113 Country Morning Court Lafayette, LA 70508 337-381-0634 [email protected]

SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Pest Control Al’s Pest Control 90607 N/A 109 Northern Avenue Lafayette, LA 70501 337-233-5692

Pipe & Fittings Plastics of Rayne 31000 N/A 141 Llame Road Rayne, LA 70578

Plumbing, Heating & Prejean Service Company, Inc. 90616, 90628 21325 Air Conditioning 209 Stamp Street Building Construction, Mechanical Work (Restricted) Lafayette, LA 70501 Plumbing (Statewide) 337-237-3167, Fax 237-8949

Pressure Washing, Acadiana Pressure Washers N/A Coating Services 324 Dewey Street Lafayette, LA 70501-4212 337-234-7086

Private Home Health Always Care Assisted Home Living N/A Medical Services 201 Open Meadows Lafayette, LA 70506 337-981-6060, Fax 337-981-6063

Procurement Brewster Procurement Group N/A Outsourcing 509 ½ Stevenson Street Lafayette, LA 70501 337-291-9009

Production Machining Savant Precision Machine, Inc. 112 Pine Park Drive Lafayette, LA 70508 337-235-9646, Fax 337-235-3611

Promotion and Lucky Cat Records N/A Distribution of Recorded 217 Jackson Street Music and Concerts Lafayette, LA 70501 337-269-5153

Restaurant Creole Fried Chicken N/A 4102 North University Carencro, LA 70520 337-886-4774

Restaurant Café Evergreen N/A 1313 East Simcoe Street Lafayette, LA 70501 337-269-0019, Fax 337-269-0019

Retail Sale of Women Amy Claire, Inc. N/A Apparel & Accessories 3809 Ambassador Caffery Ste. 104C Lafayette, LA 70503 337-981-2692, Fax 337-989-9100

Roofing C&C Noel, Inc. 19111 99 Beth Drive specialty: Roofing and Sheet Metal, Siding Lafayette, LA 70503

Roofing, Solar Panels Louisiana Solar Solutions 49541 311 Red Oak Circle Lafayette, LA 70506 337-298-0011 [email protected] SERVICE TYPE COMPANY NAME COMMODITY CODE LICENSED CONTRACTOR

Sandblasting and Paining Huntington Oilfield Services, LLC Sandblasting and Painting and Equipment Cleaning 200 Midway Street Lafayette, LA 70506 337-235-5274, Fax 337-234-4200 Mobile 337-849-3212 www.huntingtonoilfieldservices.com

Security Guard Service Beson Security N/A 2600 South Loop West Ste. 210 Houston, LA 77054 713-661-2090, Fax 713-661-2102

Security Guard Services Cresent Gaurdian Incorporated 4640 S. Carrolton Avenue, Ste. 100 New Orleans, LA 70119 504-483-7811 (Certified DBE)

Sign Manufacturing Insignia Graphics, Inc. 90554 N/A 3419 N. W. Evangeline Thruway, B-8 Carencro, LA 70520 337-896-5184, Fax 337-873-6978

Spice and Poultry Papa Jeabert’s Inc. 3020 N/A Cooker Manufacturer 126 Evangeline Drive Lafayette, LA 70501 337-267-4468, Fax 337-236-6781

Traffic Signs & Devices, Larry Richard & Associates 90554, 30050, N/A Barricades 3113 Avery Island Road 50000 New Iberia, LA 337-365-0159, Fax 337-365-0025 (Certified DBE)

Traffic Signs & Devices, Rufco, Inc. 90554, 30050, 38343 Barricades, Pavement 806 C East Main Street 50000, 50011 specialty: Highway Signs Markings Broussard, LA 70518 337-405-3612, Fax 337-993-2524

Chemical Secrets 2112 Forrest Hill Haughton, LA 71037 337-949-2124 [email protected]

Traffic Signs & Devices, Strip Force 1, Inc. Barricades, Pavement 128 Thrush Loop Markings Lafayette, LA 70508 337-984-9008, Fax 337-981-9720 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

Telecommunication New Orleans Teleport Inc. DBA Causplus Services P. O. Box 51808 Lafayette, LA 70505-1808 337-262-6080 [email protected] (Certified DBE)

BIDDER/CONTRACTOR QUESTIONNAIRE

Company Name: ______

Contact Person: ______

Address: ______

______

Phone: ______Fax: ______

Contract Title: ______

1. Did you subcontract with Small and Emerging Businesses (SEB)?

2. If you answer to question number one is yes, please list the SEB you intend to use and if applicable please rate their performance on this contract.

(Circle Which Applies)

______Excellent, Very Good, Good, Bad, Very Bad

3. If your experience with using a SEB was bad or very bad, please explain

______

VENDOR INFORMATION FORM

(As per Article 10, please make information as clear and legible as possible)

Please complete the following information and return this form with your bid. This information is needed if you are awarded the bid:

PROJECT NAME

COMPANY NAME

CONTACT PERSON (If other than person who signed bid)

SIGNATURE

TITLE

MAILING ADDRESS (As it appears on the contract/purchase order, if awarded to your company)

CITY/STATE/ZIP

TELEPHONE NUMBER

FAX NUMBER

E-MAIL ADDRESS:

NO ALTERNATE OR OPTIONAL BIDS WILL BE ACCEPTED OR READ UNLESS CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM TO: Lafayette Consolidated Government BID FOR: EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT 705 W. University Avenue ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION PO Box 4017-3 FOR THE LAFAYETTE UTILITIES SYSTEM AND THE Lafayette, Louisiana 70502 LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT

(Owner to provide name and address of owner) (Owner to provide name of project and other identifying information)

The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he; a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and completion of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by: Domingue, Szabo & Associates, Inc. and dated: December 2017 (Owner to provide name of entity preparing bidding documents)

Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the followingADDENDA: (Enter the number the Designer has assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging)

TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated "Base Bid" * but not alternates) the sum of: Dollars ($ )

ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices designated as alternates in the unit price description.

Alternate No. 1 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the sum of: N/A Dollars ($ N/A )

Alternate No. 2 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the sum of: N/A Dollars ($ N/A )

Alternate No. 3 (Owner to provide description of alternate and state whether add or deduct) for the sum of: N/A Dollars ($ N/A )

NAME OF BIDDER:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE NUMBER: NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER**:

DATE:

THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE TO BE INCLUDED WITH THE SUBMISSION OF THIS LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM: * The Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices. Otherwise it is not required and need not be included with the form. The number of unit prices that may be included is not limited and additional sheets may be included if needed.

**A CORPORATE RESOLUTION OR WRITTEN EVIDENCE of the authority of the person signing the bid for the public work as prescribed by LA R.S. 38:2212(B)5.

BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier's check as prescribed by LA R.S. 38:2218(A) attached to and made a part of this bid.

4752.02 1 00300 BID OR PROPOSAL BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS , That we ______, as Principal (Bidder) and ______, as Surety are held and firmly bound under the President and Council, Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, (hereinafter called the Owners) in the full and just sum of five (5%) percent of the total amount of this proposal, including all alternates, lawful money of the United States, for payment of which sum, well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents.

Surety represents that it is listed on the current U. S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies as approved for an amount equal to or greater that the amount for which it obligates itself in this instrument or that it is a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A - rating in the latest printing of the A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. If surety qualifies by virtue of its Best's listing, the Bond amount may not exceed ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the latest A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide.

Surety further represents that it is licensed to do business in the State of Louisiana and that this Bond is signed by surety's agent or attorney-in-fact. This Bid Bond is accompanied by appropriate power of attorney.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that, whereas said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal to the Obligee on a Contract for: EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT – ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION, Capital Improvements Program, for Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government.

NOW, THEREFORE, if the said Contract be awarded to the Principal and the Principal shall, within such time as may be specified, enter into the Contract in writing and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the Contract with surety acceptable to the Obligee, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise this obligation shall become due and payable.

PRINCIPAL (BIDDER) SURETY

BY: BY: AUTHORIZED OFFICER-OWNER-PARTNER AGENT OR ATTORNEY-IN-FACT(SEAL)

4752.02 1 00320 East Wastewater Treatment Plant Anaerobic Digester Rehabilitation __ 770-18-025 Name of Project Project No.

STATE OF ______

PARISH OF ______

ATTESTATIONS AFFIDAVIT

Before me, the undersigned notary public, duly commissioned and qualified in and for the parish and state aforesaid, personally came and appeared Affiant, who after being duly sworn, attested as follows:

LA. R.S. 38:2227 PAST CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS OF BIDDERS

A. No sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporated, director, or manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes:

(a) Public bribery (R.S.14:118) (c) Extortion (R.S. 14:66) (b) Corrupt influencing (R.S.14:120) (d) Money laundering (R.S. 14:23)

B. Within the past five years from the project bid date, no sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes, during the solicitation or execution of a contract or bid awarded pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes:

(a) Theft (R.S. 14:67) (f) Bank fraud (R.S. 14:71.1) (b) Identity Theft (R.S. 14:67.16) (g) Forgery (R.S. 14:72) (c) Theft of a business record (h) Contractors; misapplication of (R.S. 14:67.20) payments (R.S. 14:202) (d) False accounting (R.S. 14:70) (i) Malfeasance in office (R.S. 14:134) (e) Issuing worthless checks (R.S. 14:71)

L.A. R.S. 38:2212.10 Verification of Employees

A. At the time of bidding, Appearer is registered and participates in a status verification system to verify that all new hires in the state of Louisiana are legal citizens of the United States or are legal aliens.

B. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall continue, during the term of the contract, to utilize a status verification system to verify the legal status of all new employees in the state of Louisiana.

C. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall require all subcontractors to submit to it a sworn affidavit verifying compliance with Paragraphs (A) and (B) of this Subsection.

4752.02 1 00330

East Wastewater Treatment Plant Anaerobic Digester Rehabilitation __ 770-18-025 Name of Project Project No.

L.A. R.S. 23:1726 (B) Certification Regarding Unpaid Workers Compensation Insurance

A. R.S. 23:1726 prohibits any entity against whom an assessment under Part X of Chapter 11 of Title 23 of the Louisiana Revised Statues of 1950 (Alternative Collection Procedures & Assessments) is in effect, and whose right to appeal that assessment is exhausted, from submitting a bid or proposal for obtaining any contract pursuant to Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 and Chapters 16 and 17 of Title 39 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950.

B. By signing this bid / proposal, Affiant certifies that no such assessment is in effect against the bidding / proposing entity.

______NAME OF BIDDER NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

______DATE TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE OF BIDDER

______SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER/AFFIANT

Sworn to and subscribed before me by Affiant on the _____ day of ______, 20_____.

______Notary Public

4752.02 2 00330

CONTRACT FORM LABOR, MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES

THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this ______day of ______,______, by and between the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, Lafayette, Louisiana, and ______of______, in the State of , Party of the Second Part, hereinafter called the "Contractor".

WITNESSETH:

WHEREAS: The Purchaser has caused the necessary Contract Documents to be prepared for defining a construction project to be installed for the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, consisting of

EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ANAEROBID DIGESTER REHABILITATION

WHEREAS: The Purchaser has advertised for bids from Contractors, has received said bids, analyzed same and duly awarded a contract to the "Contractor, Party of the Second Part", for construction as hereinafter set forth and as stated more in detail in the quotation and related Contract Documents to wit: Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form, General Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, Performance and Payment Bonds, and Plans, all of which documents are made a part of this contract: and

WHEREAS: It is agreed and understood that the construction and installation of the above enumerated work by the Contractor shall be completed, accepted and ready for use within the days specified as follows: within 365 calendar days from the effective date of the Notice to Proceed. In default thereof, the Contractor shall be liable for liquidated damages in the amount as provided in Article 31 of the General Conditions of these Specifications.

NOW, THEREFORE, it is hereby agreed that for the sum of ______($______) to be paid by the Purchaser to the Contractor, the Contractor agrees to perform all work in accordance with the Contract Documents, plans and specifications which are as much a part of the agreement as if repeated verbatim herein.

IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD between the parties hereto that the Contractor shall accept and the Purchaser will pay for the work as described above at the prices stipulated in the bids and the payment shall be made at the time and in the manner set forth in the specifications.

4752.02 1 00500

Page 2 Contract Document

IN WITNESS THEREOF: The Parties of the First and Second Parts have hereto set their hands and seals on the day and year above written.

Executed in Two (2) Counterparts

LAFAYETTE CITY-PARISH CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT LAFAYETTE, STATE OF LOUISIANA

WITNESSES:

______BY: ______JOEL ROBIDEAUX MAYOR – PRESIDENT ______

CONTRACTOR'S WITNESSES: CONTRACTOR, PARTY OF THE SECOND PART

______BY: ______Signature

______NAME: ______Type or print name

TITLE: ______Type or print title

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS :

That we, the undersigned as Principal, and a Corporation duly authorized to transact business in the State of Louisiana, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, existing under the laws of the State of Louisiana, in the penal sum of ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which will and truly to be made, the said surety does hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents as follows:

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a Contract with the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, bearing the date of , for EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION which shall be completed before 365 Calendar Days , upon certain terms and conditions, completely set out in said Contract; and

WHEREAS, it was one of the conditions of award by the Consolidated Government, pursuant to which the contract hereinabove referred to was entered into, that these presents shall be executed:

NOW, THEREFORE the conditions of this obligation are such that if the Principal shall in all respects fully comply with the terms and conditions of said Contract and his obligations thereunder, including the specifications, proposals and plans therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made on such plans and specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Consolidated Government against or from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or loss, to which the Consolidated Government may be subjected by reason of any wrongdoing, misconduct, want of care or skill, negligence, or default including patent infringement on the part of the Principal, his agents or employees, in the execution of performance of said Contract, and shall promptly pay all claims for damages or injury to property and for work done, or skill, tools, machinery, supplies, labor and materials furnished and debts incurred by the Principal in or about the performance of the work contracted for, this obligation to be void.

And the Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, or alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the specifications.

4752.02 1 00610

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND

This bond shall be for the use of the Consolidated Government and all persons doing work or furnishing skill, tools, machinery or materials for the purpose of the Contract herein above referred to.

In Testimony whereof, the Principal and the Surety have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed in two (2) counterparts this ______day of ______, ______.

EXECUTED IN TWO (2) COUNTERPARTS WITNESSES:

______

______BY ______

______

______BY ______LA. LICENSE NO. ______

4752.02 2 00610

AFFIDAVIT

STATE OF______

PARISH OF______

This _____ day of ______, 20___, personally came and appeared before me, the undersigned Notary Public, duly commissioned and qualified within and for the Parish of ______, State of______, ______, who, after being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he has been selected as Contractor for the Lafayette Consolidated Government on the EAST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ANAEROBIC DIGESTER REHABILITATION and that he does hereby certify in compliance with L.R.S. 38:2224 that he has employed no person, corporation, firm, association or other organization, either directly or indirectly, to secure the Contract for the above mentioned public project, other than persons regularly employed by him whose services in connection with the construction of said public project or in securing the Contract for same were in the regular course of their duties for him; and, that no part of the contract price received, or to be received, by him was paid or will be paid to any person, corporation, firm, association or other organization for soliciting the Contract, other than the payment of their normal compensation to persons regularly employed by him whose services in connection with the construction of said public project were in the regular course of their duties for him, and further declares that he has in no way entered into a collusion to increase the cost of the project and has no knowledge of such collusion on the part of any sub-contractor or suppliers of material to him for this project.

APPEARER FURTHER DECLARES that he will, in all respects, comply with the public contract laws of the State of Louisiana, including Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes, and particularly Section 2224 of said Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes.

______

Sworn to and subscribed before me this ____ day of ______, 20__.

______(Notary Public)

4752.02 1 00310

Page 1 of 1 LCG Form #825 (R/09/99) SECTION VI

CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Information purposes only THIS IS TO CERTIFY TO: LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT

P. O. BOX 4017-C LAFAYETTE, LOUISIANA 70502

That the following described policies in at least the face amounts shown below have been issued to: Name of Insured: Address of Insured: Effective for the policy periods shown within the State of LOUISIANA .

THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE NEITHER AFFIRMATIVELY NOR NEGATIVELY AMENDS, EXTENDS, OR ALTERS THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY POLICIES SHOWN BELOW. (CHECK APPLICABLE COVERAGES): LIMITS OF LIABILITY POLICY POLICY LIABILITY LIMITS, UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY TYPE OF POLICY AND COVERAGE COMPANY NUMBER PERIOD MINIMUM CONTRACT I. • STANDARD WORKER'S COMPENSATION STATUTORY EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY $1,000,000 LIABILITY IN THOUSANDS II. • COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE A.  Premises Operations B. Independent Contractor’s Liability  Bodily Injury $1,000 C.  Products-Completed Operations

D.  Contractual Liability E.  Broad Form Property Damage Property Damage $1,000 BI & PD Combined $1,000 POLICY DOES • DOES NOT  PROVIDE COVERAGE FOR UNDERGROUND EXPLOSION AND COLLAPSE HAZARD $1,000,000

LIABILITY IN THOUSANDS III. • BUSINESS AUTO LIABILITY Bodily Injury Per Accident $1,000 A.  Any Auto Bodily Injury Per Accident $1,000 B.  Owned Property Damage $1,000 C.  Non-Owned D.  Hired BI & PD Combined $1,000 IV.  UMBRELLA LIABILITY BI & PD Combined NOTE: Lower primary limits will be accepted if Umbrella Liability Coverage is provided with limits of at least $500,000 in excess of primary coverage shown in this certificate. V. • Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, its officials, employees, and volunteers shall be listed as additional insured on all liability policies. VI.  Coverage afforded the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government, its officials, employees, and volunteers as insureds, applies as primary and not excess or contributing to any other insurance issued in the name of the named or additional insured(s). VII. • A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of the named additional insureds on the Workers’ Compensation Insurance policy. IN THE EVENT OF CANCELLATION OF THE POLICY OR POLICIES OR MATERIAL CHANGES IN SUCH POLICIES, THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER SHALL RECEIVE THIRTY (30) DAYS PRIOR WRITTEN NOTICE OF SUCH CANCELLATION OR CHANGE AT THE ADDRESS STATED ABOVE BEFORE SUCH CANCELLATION OR CHANGE IS EFFECTIVE AGAINST THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.

THE ATTACHED CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CORRELATES BY: DIRECTLY WITH THE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE: CONTRACT. THE LAFAYETTE CONSOLIDATED GOVERNMENT ADDRESS: REQUIRES THEREFORE THAT HIS PARTICULAR CERTIFICATE BE USED FOR APPROVAL OF THE CONTRACT. Date:

SECTION 01068 - DEFINITIONS & STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

DEFINITIONS:

General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other contract documents, including drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated therein. Certain terms used in contract documents are defined generally in this article. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of contract documents.

General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of Division 1 Sections, General Requirements, apply to entire work of contract.

Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in contract documents. Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross- reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specially noted.

Directed, Requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted", mean "directed by Engineer", "requested by Engineer", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Engineer's responsibility into Contractor's area of construction supervision.

Approve: Where used in conjunction with Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be held to limitations of Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Special Conditions. In no case will "approval" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of contract documents.

Project Site: The space available to Contractor for performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project.

Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, furnishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

4752.02 1 01068 Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

Installer: The entity (person or firm) engaged by Contractor or its subcontractor or sub- subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of work at project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in operations they are engaged to perform.

Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at project site or elsewhere; and to report and (if required) interpret results of those inspections or tests.

FORMAT & SPECIFICATION EXPLANATIONS:

Specification Production: None of these explanations will be interpreted to modify substance of requirements. Portions of these specifications have been produced by Engineer's standard methods of editing master specifications, and may contain minor deviations from traditional writing formats. Such deviations are a normal result of this production technique, and no other meaning will be implied or permitted.

Format Explanation: The format of principal portions of these specifications can be described as follows; although other portions may not fully comply and no particular significance will be attached to such compliance or non-compliance:

Sections & Divisions: For convenience, basic unit of specification text is a "section", each unit of which is named and numbered. These are organized into related families of sections, and various families of sections are organized into "divisions", which are recognized as the present industry-consensus on uniform organization and sequencing of specifications. The section title is not intended to limit meaning or content of section, nor to be fully descriptive of requirements specified therein, nor to be an integral part of text.

Underscoring: Used strictly to assist reader of specification text in scanning text for key words in content (for quick recall). No emphasis on or relative importance of text is intended where underscoring is used.

Imperative Language: Used generally in specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities which must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor, or when so noted, by others.

Specification Content: Because of methods by which this project specification has been produced, certain general characteristics of content, and conventions in use of language are explained as follows:

Specification Methods: The techniques or methods of specifying to record requirements varies throughout text, and may include "prescriptive", "open generic-descriptive", "compliance with standards", "performance", "proprietary", or a combination of these. The method used for specifying one unit of work has no bearing on requirements for another unit of work.

4752.02 2 01068

Overlapping & Conflicting Requirements; Where compliance with 2 or more industry standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, more stringent requirement (which is generally recognized to be most costly) is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into contract documents (not by way of reference to an industry standard) clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is to be fulfilled. Refer apparently-equal-but-different requirements, and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum for the work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with requirements, indicated numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for context to requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for decision before proceeding.

Specialists; Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires (or at least implies) that specific work be assigned to specialists or expert entities, who must be engaged for performance of those units of work. These must be recognized as special requirements over which Contractor has no choice or option. These assignments must not be confused with (and are not intended to) jurisdictions and similar conventions. One purpose of such assignments is to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is recognized as "expert" for indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, final responsibility for fulfillment of entire set of requirements remains with the Contractor.

Trades: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of titles such as "carpentry" in specification text, implies neither that the work must be performed by an accredited or unionized tradesperson of corresponding generic name (such as "carpenter"), nor that specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradesperson of that corresponding generic name.

DRAWING SYMBOLS:

General: Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols used on drawings are those symbols recognized in the construction industry for purposes indicated. Where not otherwise noted, symbols are defined by "Architectural Graphic Standards," published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

4752.02 3 01068 INDUSTRY STANDARDS:

General Applicability of Standards: Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect (and are made a part of contract documents by reference) as if copied directly into contract documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith.

Referenced standards (referenced directly in contract documents or by governing regulations) have precedence over non-referenced standards which are recognized in industry for applicability to do work.

Non-referenced standards recognized in the construction industry are hereby defined, except as otherwise limited in contract documents, to have direct applicability to the work, and will be so enforced for performance of the work.

Publication Dates: Except as otherwise indicated, where compliance with an industry standard is required, comply with standards in effect as of date of contract documents.

Copies of Standards: Provide where needed for proper performance of the work; obtain directly from publication sources.

Abbreviations & Names: Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in specifications or other contract documents they are defined to mean the industry recognized name of trade association, standards generating organization, governing authority or other applicable to context of text provision. Refer to "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in large libraries. A list of acronyms or abbreviations and names is included in Section 01070.

GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES:

General: The procedure followed by Engineer has been to contact governing authorities where necessary to obtain information needed for the purpose of preparing contract documents; recognizing that such information may or may not be of significance in relation to Contractor's responsibilities for performing the work. Contact governing authorities directly for necessary information and decisions having a bearing on the performance of the work.

SUBMITTALS:

PERMITS, LICENSES & CERTIFICATES: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certificates, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable)

END OF SECTION 01068

4752.02 4 01068 SECTION 01070 - ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General, Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

DEFINITIONS:

General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other contract documents, including the drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in the contract documents are defined generally in this article. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the work to extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the contract documents.

General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of Division 1 sections. General Requirements apply to entire work of Contract and, where so indicated, to other elements of work which are included in the project.

Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in the contract documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated," it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

Directed, Requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," "accepted," and "permitted" mean "directed by Engineer," "requested by Engineer," etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Engineer's responsibility into Contractor's area of construction supervision.

Approve: Where used in conjunction with Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be held to limitations of Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will "approval", by Engineer be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of the contract documents.

Project Site: The space available to Contractor for performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of project site is shown on the drawings, and may or may not be identical with description of the land upon which project is to be built.

Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying,

4752.02 1 01070 working to dimension, finishing, curing protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

Installer: The entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub- subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in operations they are engaged to perform.

FORMAT AND SPECIFICATION EXPLANATIONS:

Sections and Divisions: For convenience, basic unit of specification text is a "section," each unit of which is named and numbered. These are organized into related families of sections, and various families of sections are organized into "divisions," which are recognized as the present industry-consensus on uniform organization and sequencing of specifications. The section title is not intended to limit meaning or content of section, nor to be fully descriptive of requirements specified therein, nor to be an integral part of text.

Each section of specifications has been subdivided into 3 (or less) "parts" for uniformity and convenience (Part 1 - General, Part 2 - Products, and Part 3 - Execution). These do not limit the meaning of and are not an integral part of text which specifies requirements.

Subordination of Text: Portions of specification text are subordinated to other portions in the following (traditional) manner (lowest level to highest): Indented (from left margin) paragraphs and lines of text are subordinate to preceding text which is not indented, or which is indented by a lesser amount.

Paragraphs and lines of text are subordinate to subarticle titles, which are printed in upper/lower-case lettering.

Subarticles are subordinate to article titles, which are printed in upper-case lettering.

Subordination (if any) of certain sections (or portions of sections) to other sections is described within those sections.

4752.02 2 01070

Section Numbering: Used to facilitate cross-references in contract documents. Sections are placed in Project Manual in numeric sequence; however, numbering sequence is not complete, and listing of sections at beginning of Project Manual must be consulted to determine numbers and names of specification sections in the contract documents.

Page Numbering: Numbered independently for each section; recorded in listing of sections (Index or Table of Contents) in Project Manual. Section number is shown with page number at bottom of each page, to facilitate location of text in Project Manual.

Project Identification: Name, number and date of the contract documents are recorded on the cover of the bound booklet. The Engineer's project number is used on the bottom left margin of each page of specifications to minimize possible misuse of specifications, or confusion with other project specifications.

Specifying Methods: The techniques or methods of specifying to record requirements varies throughout text, and may include "prescriptive," "open generic-descriptive," "compliance with standards," "performance," "proprietary," or a combination of these. The method used for specifying one unit of work has no bearing on requirements for another unit of work.

Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more industry standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, most stringent requirement (which is generally recognized to be also most costly) is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the contract documents (not by way of reference to an industry standard) clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is to be fulfilled. Refer apparently- equal-but-different requirements, and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

Contractor's Options: Except for overlapping or conflicting requirements, where more than one set of requirements are specified for a particular unit of work, option is intended to be Contractor's regardless of whether specifically indicated as such.

Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum for the work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically

4752.02 3 01070 indicated, actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with requirements, indicated numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for decision before proceeding.

Specialists; Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires (or at least implies) that specific work be assigned to specialists or expert entities, who must be engaged for performance of those units of work. These must be recognized as special requirements over which Contractor has no choice or option. These assignments must not be confused with (and are not intended to interfere with) normal application of regulations, union jurisdictions and similar conventions. One purpose of such assignments is to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is recognized as "expert" for indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, final responsibility for fulfillment of entire set of requirements remains with Contractor.

Trades: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of titles such as "carpentry" in specification text, implies neither that the work must be performed by an accredited or unionized tradesman of the corresponding generic name (such as "carpenter"), nor that specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradesmen of that corresponding generic name.

Abbreviations: The language of specifications and other contract documents is of the abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self-explanatory nature have been included in the text. Specific abbreviations have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of specification requirements with notations on drawings and in schedules. These are frequently defined in section at first instance of use. Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of the contract documents so indicates.

DRAWING SYMBOLS:

INDUSTRY STANDARDS:

Reference standards (referenced directly in contract documents or by governing regulations) have precedence over non-referenced standards which are recognized in industry for applicability to work.

4752.02 4 01070 Non-referenced standards are hereby defined to have no particular applicability to the work, except as a general measurement of whether work complies with standards recognized in construction industry.

Publication Dates: Except as otherwise indicated, where compliance with an industry standard is required, comply with standard in effect as of date of contract documents.

Copies of Standards: Provide where needed for proper performance of the work; obtain directly from publication sources.

Abbreviation and Names: Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in specifications or other contract documents they are defined to mean the industry recognized name of trade association, standards generating organization, governing authority or other entity applicable to context of text provision. Refer to "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in large libraries.

Abbreviations and Names: The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in contract documents are defined to mean the associated names. Both names and addresses are subject to change, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up-to-date as of date of contract documents:

AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Ave. NW; Washington DC 20006; 202/862-5100

AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association 35 E. Wacker Drive; Chicago, IL 6060l; 312/782-8256

AAN American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. 230 Southern Blg.; Washington, DC 20005; 200/737-4060

AASHTO American Assoc. of State Highway & Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol; Washington, DC 20001; 202/624-5800

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists P.O. Box 12215; Research Triangle Park, NC 27709; 919/549-8141

ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150 Redford Stat.; Detroit, MI 48219; 313/532-2600

ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories 1725 K Street, NW; Washington, DC 20006; 202/659-3766

4752.02 5 01070 AGA American Gas Association 1515 Wilson Blvd.; Arlington, VA 22209; 703/841-8400

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 20 N Wacker Dr.; Chicago, IL 60606; 312/984-5400

AI The Asphalt Institute Asphalt Inst. Bldg.; College Park, MD 20740; 301/927-0422

A.I.A. American Insurance Association 85 John Street; New York, NY 10038; 212/433-4400

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 1221 Ave. of the Amer.; New York, NY 10020; 212/764-0440

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th St., NW; Washington, DC 20036; 202/452-7100

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W Hampden Ave.; Englewood, CO 80110; 303/761-3212

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. 30 W. University Dr.; Arlington Heights, IL 60084; 312/394-0150

ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway; New York, NY 10018; 212/354-3300

APA American Plywood Association P.O. Box 2277; Tacoma, WA 98401; 206/272-2283

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 815 N. Fort Myer Dr.; Arlington, VA 22209; 703/524-8800

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 345 East 47th St.; New York, NY 10017; 212/644-7940

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th St.; New York, NY 10017; 212/644-7722

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race St.; Philadelphia, PA 19103; 215/299-5400

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 5055 S. Chesterfield Rd; Arlington, VA 22206; 703/671-9100

4752.02 6 01070 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association 7735 Old Georgetown Rd.; Bethesda, MD 20014; 301/652-3109

AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau 2772 S. Randolph St.; Arlington, VA 22206; 703/931-8180

AWS American Welding Society, Inc. 2501 NW 7th St.; Miami, FL 33125; 305/642-7090

AWWA American Water Works Association, Inc. 6666 W. Quincy Ave., Denver, CO 80235; 303/794-7711

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 60 East 42nd St.; New York, NY 10017; 212/682-8142

BIA Brick Institute of America 1750 Old Meadow Rd; McLean VA 22101; 703/893-4010

CDA Copper Development Association, Inc. 405 Lexington Ave.; New York, NY 10017; 212/953-7300

CE Corps of Engineers (U. S. Dept. of the Army) Washington, DC 20315; CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 80 North LaSalle St.; Chicago, IL 60601; 312/372-5059

CS Commercial Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept. of Commerce) Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402;

DHI Door and Hardware Institute 1815 N. Ft. Myer; Arlington, VA 22209; 703/527-2060

EIA Electronics Industries Association 2001 Eye St., NW; Washington, DC 20006; 202/457-4900

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (U.S. Dept. of Transportation) 800 Independence Av., SW; Washington, DC 20590

FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M St., NW; Washington, DC 20554; 202/632-7000

FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association 3310 Harrison; Topeka, KS 66611; 913/266-7013

FHA Federal Housing Administration (U.S. Dept. of HUD) 451 - 7th St. SW; Washington, DC 20201

4752.02 7 01070 FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike; Norwood, MA 02062 617/762-4300

FS Federal Specification (General Services Admin.) Bldg. 197, Washington Navy Yard SE; Washington, DC 20407

FTI Facing Tile Institute 500 12th St., SW; Washington, DC 20024; 202/484-5558

GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Ave.; Evanston, IL 60201; 312/491-1744

HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association PO Box 6246; Arlington, VA 22206; 703/671-6262

IRI Industrial Risk Insurers 85 Woodland St.; Hartford, CT 06102; 203/525-2601

LPI Lightning Protection Institute 48 N Ayer St.; Harvard, IL 60038; 815/943-7211

MCA Mechanical Contractors Association of America, Inc. 5530 Wisconsin Ave.; Washington, DC 20015; 301/654-7960

MIA Marble Institute of America P.O. Box 8156; West Palm Beach, FL 33407; 305/832-2577

MIL Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Dept. of Defense) Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Ave.; Philadelphia, PA 19120

MLSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 221 N LaSalle St.; Chicago, IL 60601; 312/346-1862

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. 5203 Leesburg Pike; Falls Church, VA 22041; 703/998-7996

NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Mfrs. 100 S. Marion St.; Oak Park, IL 60302; 312/383-7725

NAPF National Association of Plastic Fabricators, Inc. 4720 Montgomery Ln.; Washington, DC; 20014; 301/656-8874

NBS National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Dept. of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 6845 Elm St.; McLean, VA 22101; 703/790-8650

4752.02 8 01070

NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA)

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc. 7315 Wisconsin Ave.; Washington, DC 20014; 301/657-3110

NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc. 600 Third Ave.; New York, NY 10016; 212/986-1545

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 L St. NW; Washington, DC 20037; 202/457-8400

NFPA National Fire Protection Association 470 Atlantic Ave.; Boston, MA 02210; 617/482-8755

N.F.P.A. National Forest Products Association (Successor to NLMA) 1619 Massachusetts Ave., NW; Washington, DC 20036 202/797-5800

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association 332 S. Michigan Ave.; Chicago, IL 60604; 312/427-2810

NPA National Particleboard Association 2306 Perkins Pl.; Silver Spring, MD 20910; 301/587-2204

NSF National Sanitation Foundation (nsf) 3475 Plymouth Rd; Ann Arbor, MI 48106; 313/769-8010

NSSEA National School Supply & Equipment Association 1500 Wilson Blvd.; Arlington, VA 22209; 703/524-8819

NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. 3166 Des Plains Ave.; Des Plains, IL 60018; 800/323-9736

NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association, Inc. 205 West Touhy Ave.; Park Ridge, IL 60068; 312/823-6747

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (U.S. Dept. of Labor) Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402

PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 20 N. Wacker Dr.; Chicago, IL 60606; 312/346-4071

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute 5342 Blvd. Pl.; Indianapolis, IN 46208; 317/251-5298

PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc. 1911 N. Fort Myer; Arlington, VA 22209; 703/527-5257

4752.02 9 01070 PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept. of Commerce) Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402

PTI Post-Tensioning Institute 301 W.Osborn, Suite 3500; Phoenix, AZ 85013; 602/265-9158

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 1030 15th St., NW; Washington, DC 20005; 202/833-2635

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (Grading Rules) 627 Montgomery; San Francisco, CA 94111;

SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association 1140 Connecticut, NW; Washington, DC 20036; 202/223-1360

SDI Steel Deck Institute PO Box 3812; St. Louis, MO 63122; 314/965-1741

S.D.I. Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Cnt. N.; Cleveland, OH 44107; 216/226-7700

SHLMA Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturers Association 805 Sterick Blg.; Memphis, TN 38103; 901/525-8221

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 3310 Harrison St.; Topeka, KS 66611; 913/266-7036

SJI Steel Joist Institute 1703 Parham Rd.; Richmond, VA 23229; 804/288-3071

SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 8224 Old Courthouse Rd.; Vienna, VA 22180; 703/790-9890

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules) P. O. Box 846; Pensacola, FL 32594; 904/434-2611

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 5th Avenue; Pittsburgh, PA 15213; 412/578-3327

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. PO Box 326; Princeton, NJ 08540; 609/921-7050

TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association 7 Kirby Plaza; Mt. Kisco, NY 10549; 914/241-2284

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 207 East Ohio St.; Chicago, IL 60611; 312/642-6969

4752.02 10 01070 WCLB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules) PO Box 23145; Portland, OR 97223; 503/639-0651

WIC Woodwork Institute of California PO Box 1666; Fresno, CA 93717

WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 7900 Westpark Drive; McLean, VA 22101; 703/790-9790

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (Grading Rules) 1500 Yeon Blg.; Portland, OR 97204; 503/224-3930

W.W.P.A. Woven Wire Products Association 108 W. Lake St.; Chicago, IL 60601; 312/332-6502

GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES:

General: The procedure followed by the Engineer has been to contact governing authorities where necessary to obtain information needed for the purpose of preparing the contract documents; recognizing that such information may or may not be of significance in relation to the Contractor's responsibilities for performing the work. Contact governing authorities directly for necessary information and decisions having a bearing on the performance of the work.

All work performed on this contract shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition NEC, and the Southern Standard Building Code. The Contractor must obtain necessary permits from the local building code authority.

SUBMITTALS:

Permits, Licenses and Certificates:

For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable)

END OF SECTION 01070

4752.02 11 01070 SECTION 01150 - SCHEDULES, REPORTS, PAYMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL:

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

COORDINATION:

Coordinate both the procedural timing and the listing (naming and sequencing) of reports/activities required by provisions of this section and other sections, to afford consistency and logical coordination between submitted reports or lists. Maintain coordination and correlation between separate reports by updating at monthly or shorter time intervals. Make appropriate distribution of each report and updated report to entities involved in the work including Engineer and Owner. In particular, provide close coordination of progress schedule, schedule of values, listing of subcontracts, schedule of submittals, progress reports, and payment requests.

PRELIMINARY PROGRESS SCHEDULE:

Bar-Chart Schedule: At or prior to the pre-construction conference submit preliminary bar-chart progress schedule indicating a time bar for each major category or unit of work to be performed at site, properly sequenced and intermeshed, and showing completion of the work sufficiently in advance of date established for "substantial completion of the work." With submittal of bar chart, submit a tabulation (by date ) of submittals required during first 60 days of Construction Time; as required either directly by date/period relation in contract documents, or necessitated by lead times related to individual time bars shown on schedule for associated work. At Contractor's option, submittal dates may be shown on bar-chart schedule, in lieu of being tabulated.

Superimpose an S-curve on schedule to show "estimated" total dollar-volume of work performed at any date during Contract Time: with a column of cost figures in left-hand margin, ranging from zero to Contract Sum.

FULLY-DEVELOPED PROGRESS SCHEDULE:

Bar-Chart Schedule: Based on preliminary development of progress schedule (if any), and whatever updating and feedback may have occurred, during project start-up, secure critical time commitments for performing major elements of the work. Within 28 days of date established for "commencement of the work", submit a comprehensive bar-chart type progress schedule indicating (by coded symbols) a time bar for each major category or unit of work to be performed at site, and including minor units which are, nevertheless, involved in overall sequencing of the work. Arrange schedule to graphically show major sequences required in intermeshing of work, and to show how substantial completion is

4752.02 1 01150 scheduled to allow for Engineer's procedure for certification thereto. Prepare and maintain schedule on sufficiently wide sheet or series of sheets, of stable transparency or other reproducible stock, to show required data clearly for entire Construction Time, and to permit reproduction for required distribution.

Phasing: Arrange schedule with notations to show how sequence of work is affected by requirements for phased completion, coordination with use of existing facilities, limitations of continued occupancies, non-interruptable services, partial occupancy prior to substantial completion, site restrictions, provisions for future work, seasonal variations, environmental control, and similar provisions of the total project. Refer to the other sections of Division 1 and other contract documents for requirements.

Individual Work Stages: By uniform targeted symbols and cross hatched bars, show significant stages for each category or unit of work, including (where applicable), but not necessarily limited to, subcontracts, submittals, purchases, mockups, fabrication, sample testing, deliveries, installation, testing, adjusting, curing, start up and placement into final use and operation. Within long bars showing fabrication or installation of major units of work (3 months and longer) show estimated percentage-of-completion markers at 10 percent increments. As each unit of work progresses, mark each long bar with a contrasting mark (at 10 percent increments) to show actual percentage-of-completion.

Area Separations: Arrange schedule with an individual time bar for each major area of construction of each major category or unit of work where it must be sequenced or intermeshed with other work as needed for structural completion, permanent space enclosure, completion of mechanical/electrical work, substantial completion or other recognized stage of completion for overall work in that area.

Cost Correlation: Immediately below date line at heading of chart, provide a double-line cost correlation line ("precalculated" and "actual") to show dollar-volume of work performed as of same dates used for preparation of payment requests. Refer to subsequent article for cost reporting and payment procedures. Use those same dates as primary vertical lines of schedule. In so far as it is practical to do so, use same units of work in progress schedule as indicated in the schedule of values" required by General conditions and further specified herein.

Superimpose an S-curve on schedule (only first sheet for multiple-sheet schedule) to show "precalculated" dollar-volume against time at any point during Contract Time; with a double column of figures in left-hand margin ranging from zero dollars to Contract Sum, and from zero percent to 100. As work progresses and on each date used in payment requests, plot a second S-curve showing "actual" dollar-volume of work performed.

Distribution: Following initial submittal to and response by Engineer, print and distribute progress schedule to Engineer (3 copies), Owner, separate contractors (if any), principal subcontractors and suppliers or fabricators, and others with a need-to-know schedule- compliance requirement. Post copies in project meeting rooms and field (temporary)

4752.02 2 01150 offices. Distribute and post subsequent updated issues to same entities, when revisions are made; except delete entities from distribution when they have completed assigned work and are no longer involved in performance of scheduled work.

SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:

General: Immediately following development and acceptance of fully developed progress schedule, prepare complete schedule of work-related submittals. Submit within 10 days of date required for establishment of progress schedule. Correlate submittal schedule with listing of principal subcontractors, as required by the General Conditions, and with the "listing of products" or "procurement schedule" as specified in "Products and Substitutions" sections and elsewhere in contract documents.

Form: Prepare schedule in chronological sequence of "first submittals." Show category of submittal, name of subcontractor, generic description of work covered, related section numbers, activity or event number on progress schedule, scheduled date for first submission, and blank columns for actual date of submittal, resubmittal, and final release or approval by Engineer.

PROGRESS MEETINGS, REPORTING:

General: In addition to specific coordination meetings for each element of work, and project meetings for other purposes, hold general progress meeting each month with time coordinated with preparation of payment request. Require each entity then involved in planning, coordination or performance of work to be properly represented at each meeting. Review each entity's present and future needs including interface requirements, time, sequences, deliveries, access, site utilization, temporary facilities and services, hours of work, hazards and risks, housekeeping, change orders, and documentation of information for payment requests. Discuss whether each element of current work is ahead of schedule, on time, or behind time in relation with updated progress schedule. Determine how behind-time work will be expedited, and secure commitments from entities involved in doing so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current work and subsequent work will be completed within Contract Time. Review everything of significance which could affect progress of the work.

Initial Progress Meeting: Schedule initial progress meeting, recognized as "Pre- Construction Meeting", for a date approved by Owner prior to commencement of the work. Use it as an organizational meeting, and review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

Reporting: Within 3 days after each progress meeting date, distribute copies of minutes- of-the-meeting to each entity present and to others who should have been present. Include a brief summary (in narrative form) of progress of the work since previous meeting and report.

4752.02 3 01150 Schedule Updating: Immediately following each progress meeting where revisions to progress schedule have been made or recognized, revise progress schedule. Reissue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

Daily Reports: Prepare a daily report, recording the following information concerning events at the site; and submit duplicate copies to Engineer at regular intervals not exceeding weekly intervals.

List of subcontractors at the site. List of separate contractors at the site. Approximate count of personnel at the site. High/low temperatures, general weather conditions. Accidents (refer to accident reports). Meetings and significant decisions. Unusual events (refer to special reports). Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Emergency procedures, field orders. Orders/requests by governing authorities. Change orders received, implemented. Services connected, disconnected. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. Partial completions, occupancies. Substantial completions authorized.

SCHEDULE OF VALUES:

General: Prepare schedule of values, as required by General, Conditions, in coordination with the preparation of progress schedule. Form for the schedule shall be in accordance with Owner's standard and be acceptable to the Owner. Correlate line items with other administrative schedules and forms required for the work, including progress schedule, payment request form, listing of subcontractors, schedule of allowances, schedule of alternates, listing of products and principal suppliers and fabricators, and schedule of submittals. Provide breakdown of Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of payment requests and progress reports. Break down principal subcontract amounts into several line items. Round off to nearest whole dollar, but with total equal to Contract Sum. Submit 3 copies of schedule of values to Engineer for acceptance and approval by Owner prior to final reproduction.

Material/Fabrication Values: For each unit of work where payment requests will be made on account of materials or equipment purchased/fabricated/delivered but not yet installed, show "initial value" for payment request and "value added" for subsequent stage or stages of completion on that unit of work.

Time Coordination: In coordination of initial submittals and other administrative "start- up" activities, submit preliminary schedule of values to Engineer at earliest feasible date

4752.02 4 01150 prior to start of construction (or at pre-construction meeting) and final schedule no later than 7 days before initial payment request is to be submitted.

Listing; Arrange schedule with columns to indicate generic name of item or units, related specification sections, subcontractor, supplier/manufacturer/fabricator, change orders (numbers) which have affected value, dollar value of item, and percentage of Contract Sum (to nearest one-hundredth percent and adjusted to total 100 percent).

PAYMENT REQUESTS:

General: Except as otherwise indicated, sequence of progress payments is to be regular, and each must be consistent with previous applications and payments. It is recognized that certain applications involve extra requirements, including initial application, application at times of substantial completion, and final payment application.

In addition to the official set of As-Built drawings required upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit Progress As-Built drawings with each months pay request. Progress As-Built drawings shall meet the requirements stated in Section 01705 with the exception that black and white copies of the record drawings maintained by the contractor may be submitted as Progress As-Builts drawings.

Waivers of Lien: For each payment application, submit waivers of lien from every entity ( including Contractor) who could lawfully and possibly file a lien in excess of $100 arising out of Contract and related to the work covered by payment.

Submit partial waivers for amount requested (prior to deduction or retainage) on each item; and when application shows completion of item, submit final or full waivers. Owner reserves right to designate which entities involved in the work must submit waivers.

Payment Application Times: Unless otherwise agreed to in pre-construction conference, the "date" for each progress payment is as indicated in Owner-Contractor Agreement or, if none is indicated therein, it will be as noted in Article 3 – Payments to Contractor , of Section 00820, Special Conditions. The period of construction work covered by each payment request is period indicated in Owner-Contractor Agreement or, if none is indicated therein, it is period ending on the last day of the calendar month and starting day following end of the preceding period.

Payment Application Forms: Forms shall be similar to Owner's standard, or similar suitable forms submitted to Engineers and approved by Owner.

Application Preparation: Except as otherwise indicated, complete every entry provided for on the form, including certification and execution by authorized persons. Incomplete applications will be returned by Engineer without action. Entries must match current data of schedule of values and progress schedule and report. Listing must include amounts of

4752.02 5 01150 change orders issued prior to first day of the "period of construction" covered by application.

Initial Payment Application: The principal administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of first payment application can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation:

Listing of subcontractors and principal suppliers and fabricators.

Schedule of values.

Progress schedule (preliminary if not final).

Schedule of principal products.

Schedule of submittals (preliminary if not final).

Listing of Contractor's staff assignments. Copies of acquired building permits and similar authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for current performance of the work.

Initial progress report, including report of pre-construction meeting.

Application at Time of Substantial Completion: Following issuance of Engineer's final "certificate of substantial completion," and also in part as applicable to prior certificates on portions of completed work as designated, a "special" payment application may be prepared and submitted by Contractor. The principal administrative actions and submittals which must proceed or coincide with such special applications can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation:

Warranties, guarantees, maintenance agreements and similar provisions of contract documents.

Test/adjust/balance records, maintenance instructions, meter readings, start-up performance reports, and similar change-over information germane to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance of completed work.

Transmittal of required project construction records to owner.

Final cleaning of the work.

Application for reduction (if any) of retainage, and consent of surety.

Advice to Owner on coordination of shifting insurance coverages, including proof of extended coverages as required.

4752.02 6 01150 Final progress photographs, where required.

Proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid.

Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.

Change over of door locks and other Contractor's access provisions to Owner's property.

Final Payment Application: The administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of final payment application can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limitation:

Completion of project close-out requirements.

Consent of surety for final payment.

Non-Lien certificate from Parish Clerk of Court dated at least 45 days after date Owner's acceptance is recorded.

Application Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each payment application, complete with attachments. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing those attachments, and recording appropriate information related to application in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Transmit to Engineer by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable)

END OF SECTION 01150

4752.02 7 01150 SECTION 01205 - PROCEDURES & CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

COORDINATION & MEETINGS:

General: Prepare and distribute to each entity performing work at project site, a written memorandum of instructions on required coordination activities, including required notices, reports and attendance at meetings.

Coordination Drawings: Where work by separate entities requires off-site fabrication of products and materials which must be accurately interfaced and closely intermeshed to produce required results, prepare coordination drawings to indicate how work shown by separate shop drawings will be interfaced, intermeshed, and sequenced for installation. Comply with submittal requirements of "Submittals" section.

SURVEYS & RECORDS/REPORTS:

General: Working from existing lines and levels, and as shown in relation to the work, establish and maintain bench marks and other dependable markers to set lines and levels for the work at each story of construction and elsewhere on site as needed to properly locate each element of entire project. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown (within recognized tolerances if not otherwise indicated) do not scale drawings to determine dimensions.

Survey Procedures: Verify layout information shown on drawings, in relation to reference points and existing bench marks, before proceeding with layout of actual work. As work proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb (where applicable). Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise Engineer promptly upon detection of deviations exceeding indicated or recognized tolerances. Record deviations which are accepted (not corrected) on record drawings.

LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF SITE:

General: In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements shown on drawings, and indicated by other contract documents, administer allocation of available space equitably among entities needing access and space, so as to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total work of project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

TRADESPERSONS & WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS:

General: Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons performing work at site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship needed to produce required quality- levels for workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for

4752.02 1 01205 applications indicated. Remove and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacements.

INSPECTIONS, TESTS & REPORTS:

General: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in determination of probable compliances of work with requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for those compliances, or for general fulfillment of requirement of contract documents. Specified inspections and tests are not intended to limit Contractor's quality control program. Afford reasonable access to agencies performing test and inspections.

Owner's Tests: Where tests or inspections are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage independent testing agency to perform required services, except that in the event of a test failure, the Contractor shall pay for retesting.

Extent of Laboratory Tests & Inspections:

The Engineer will recommend to the Owner the type and number of tests to be performed on this project. The Contractor shall be advised of the number and type of tests to be performed by the Testing Laboratory. The Contractor is responsible for supplying concrete that meets the concrete design mixes specified under Division 3 of the Contract Documents.

Cooperation of Contractor:

The Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory and:

Make available, without cost, samples of all materials to be tested in accordance with applicable standard specifications.

Furnish such nominal labor and sheltered working space as is necessary to obtain samples at the project.

Advise the laboratory of the identity of materials sources and instruct the suppliers to allow test or inspections by the laboratory.

Notify the laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for completions of initial tests and assignment of inspection personnel.

Notify the laboratory sufficiently in advance of cancellation of required testing operations. The Contractor shall be responsible to the laboratory for charges due to failure to notify if requirements for testing are canceled.

Qualification of Testing Agencies: Except where manufacturer's testing facilities are indicated as acceptable, engage independent testing laboratories specializing in required services and complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by ACIL.

Reports: Submit test/inspection reports, including agency's analysis of results and recommendations where applicable, to Engineer or other parties the Owner may specify, and submit copies directly to governing authorities where required or requested.

4752.02 2 01205

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS:

Pre-Installation Conferences: Well in advance of installation of every major unit of work which requires coordination and interfacing with other work, meet at project site with installers and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators who are involved in or affected by unit of work, and in its coordination or integration with other work which has preceded or will follow. Advise Engineer of scheduled meeting dates. At each meeting review progress of other work and preparation for particular work under consideration. Record significant discussions of each conference, and record agreements and disagreements, along with final plan of action. Distribute record of meeting promptly to everyone concerned, including Engineer.

Do not proceed with the work if associated pre-installation conference cannot be concluded successfully. Instigate actions to resolve impediments to performance of the work, and reconvene conference at earliest date feasible.

Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and to report unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent these are more explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in contract documents.

Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged and defective items.

Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it is installed; true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not otherwise indicated. Allow for expansions and building movements. Provide uniform joints widths in exposed work, organized for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to Engineer for final decision.

Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each installation.

Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion which will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, in coordination with entire work. Isolate each unit of work from non-compatible work, as required to prevent deterioration.

Coordinate enclosure (closing in) of work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize necessity of uncovering work for that purpose.

4752.02 3 01205 Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry recognized standard mounting heights for applications indicated, including handicapped requirements. Refer questionable mounting height choices to Engineer for final decision.

CUTTING & PATCHING:

General: Do not cut-and-patch structural work in a manner resulting in reduction of load- carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio; submit proposed cutting and patching to Engineer for structural approval before proceeding. Do not cut-and-patch operational elements and safety- related components in a manner resulting in reducing of capacities to perform in the manner intended or resulting in decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. Do not cut-and-patch work which is exposed on exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of building, in a manner resulting in reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of cut-and-patch work, both as judged solely by Engineer. Remove and replace work judged by Engineer to be visually unsatisfactorily or otherwise objectionable manner.

Engage Original Fabricator/Installer to perform cutting-and-patching of structural work, operational/safety-related components, and visually-exposed work; or, if not available, engage only recognized experts; employ only proven methods.

Materials: Except as otherwise indicated or approved by Engineer, provide materials for cutting- and-patching which will result in equal-or-better work than work being cut-and-patched; in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable. Use materials identical with original materials where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby.

Temporary Support & Protection: Provide adequate temporary support for work to be cut, to prevent failure. Do not endanger other work. Provide adequate protection of other work during cutting-and-patching, to prevent damage; and provide protection of the work from adverse weather exposure.

Cut work by methods least likely to damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Where physical cutting action is required, cut work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Core drill openings through concrete work.

Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work.

Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining, in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching.

CLEANING & PROTECTION:

General: During handling and installation of work at project site clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period.

4752.02 4 01205 Limiting Exposure of Work: To the extent possible through reasonable control and protection methods, supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposures during construction period.

END OF SECTION 01205

4752.02 5 01205 SECTION 01340 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

The types of submittal requirements specified in this section include shop drawings, product data, samples and miscellaneous work-related submittals. Individual submittal requirements are specified in applicable sections for each unit of work. Refer to other Division 1 sections and other contract documents for requirements of administrative submittals.

Definitions: Work-related submittals of this section are categorized for convenience as follows:

Shop drawings include specially-prepared technical data for this project, including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements, and similar information not in standard printed form for general application to a range of similar projects.

Product data include standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not specialty-prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among available choices printed therein.

Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials, products and units of work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of work; either for limited visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis.

Mock-ups are a special form of samples, which are too large or otherwise inconvenient for handling in specified manner for transmittal of samples submittals.

Maintenance submittals related directly to the work (non-administrative) include warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, physical work records, quality testing and certifying reports, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field measurements data, operating and maintenance manuals, overrun stock, and similar information, devices and materials applicable to the work and not processed as shop drawings, product data or samples.

GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:

Scheduling: Where appropriate in administrative submittals (listing of products, manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors, and in job progress schedule), show principal work-related submittals and time requirements for coordination of submittal activity with related work in each instance.

4752.02 1 01340 Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinated preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of Engineer's review with another.

Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and provide space for Engineer's "Action" marking. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor's office and not stamped by the Contractor will be returned by Engineer "without action".

Each submittal shall be named using the following format:

“Specification Section Number – Submittal Number – Revision” Specification Number – Applicable Specification Section number for the submittal. Submittal Number – Identifies the sequential number of the submittal for the referenced section, beginning with the number 1. Revision – Letter to identify the revision of the referenced submittal number, beginning with the letter A.

Example: Submittal No. 02719-2-C, Refers to the third revision of the second submittal for material or products specified in Section 02719 – PIPING.

SPECIFIC-CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections, comply with requirements specified herein for each indicated category of submittal. Provide and process immediate submittals, where required between initial and final, similar to initial submittals.

Shop Drawings: Provide newly-prepared information, on prints, with graphic information at accurate scale, with name of preparer indicated (firm name). Show dimensions and note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in the work shown. Indicate compliance with standards, and special coordination requirements. Do not allow shop drawing copies without appropriate final "Action" markings by Engineer to be used in connection with the work.

Drawings: Seven (7) blueline or blackline prints; Five (5) will be retained and remainder will be returned.

Printed Documents: Submit seven prints, (plus two additional prints where required for maintenance manuals plus number of prints needed for distribution to others (other than Engineer); five will be retained and remainder will be returned, one of which is to be marked up and maintained by the Contractor as "Record Document".

Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system; and mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project. Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements which have been checked, and

4752.02 2 01340 special coordination requirements. Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at project site, available for reference by Engineer and others.

Submittals: Do not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until compliance with requirements of contract documents has been confirmed by Contractor. Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated. Initial submittal is final submittal unless returned promptly by Engineer, marked with an "Action" which indicates an observed non-compliance. Submit seven copies, plus two additional copies (which will be returned) where required for maintenance manuals.

Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products or systems until final copy of applicable product data is in possession of installer.

Samples: Provide units identical with final condition of proposed materials or products for the work. Provide full set of optional samples where Engineer's selection is required. Prepare samples to match Engineer's sample where so indicated. Include information with each sample to show generic description, source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards. Samples are submitted for review and confirmation of color, pattern, texture, and "kind" by Engineer. Engineer will not "test" samples (except as otherwise indicated) for compliance with other requirements, which are therefore the exclusive responsibility of Contractor.

Submittal: At Contractor's option, provide preliminary submittal of a single set of samples for Engineer's review and "Action". Otherwise, initial submittal is final submittal unless returned with "Action" which requires submittal. Submit three sets of samples in final submittal; one set will be returned.

Mock-Ups: Mock-ups and similar samples specified in individual work sections recognized as a special type of sample. Comply with requirements for "samples" to greatest extent possible, and process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.

Inspection & Test Reports: Classify each as either "shop drawing" or "product data", depending upon whether report is uniquely prepared for project or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at point of production, and process accordingly.

Warranties: Refer to "Products" section for specific general requirements on warranties, product workmanship bonds, and maintenance agreements. In addition to copies desired for Contractor's use, furnish two executed copies, except furnish two additional (conformed) copies where required for maintenance manuals.

Survey Data: Refer to "Procedures" section for specific general requirements on property surveys, field measurements, quantitative records of actual work, damage surveys, photographs and similar data required by individual work sections of these specifications. None of specified copies will be returned.

Records of Actual Work: Furnish three copies, one of which will be returned for inclusion in "Record Documents" as specified in "Close-out" section.

Standards; Where copy submittal is indicated, and except where specified integrally with "Product Data" submittal, submit a single copy for Engineer's use. Where workmanship at

4752.02 3 01340 project site and elsewhere is governed by standard, furnish additional copies to fabricators, installers and others involved in performance of the work.

Close-out Submittals: Refer to individual work sections and to "close-out" sections for specific requirements on submittal of close-out information, materials, tools and similar items.

Record Documents Copies: Furnish one set for Engineer to use in preparing final As- Built drawings (markup may serve as part of submittal to Owner).

Maintenance/Operating Manuals: Furnish three bound copies and one electronic copy unless otherwise noted in specific specification sections.

Materials & Tools: Refer to individual work sections for required quantities of spare parts, extra and overrun stock, maintenance tools and devices, keys and similar physical units to be submitted.

General Distribution: Provide additional distribution of submittals (not included in foregoing copy submittal requirements) to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, governing authorities and others as necessary for proper performance of the work. Include such additional copies in transmittal to Engineer where required to receive "Action" marking before final distribution. Record distributions on transmittal forms.

ACTION ON SUBMITTALS:

Engineer's Action: Where action and return is required or requested, Engineer will review each submittal, mark with "Action", and where possible, return within two weeks of receipt. Where submittal must be held for coordination, Contractor will be so advised by Engineer without delay.

Action Stamp: Engineer's action stamp, for use on submittals to be returned to the Contractor, is self-explanatory as marked.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable)

END OF SECTION 01340

4752.02 4 01340 SECTION 01505 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

Definitions: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication by Engineer that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

General: In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules/recommendations of franchised utility companies, comply with specific requirements indicated and with applicable local industry standards for construction work.

ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI A 10-Series standards on construction safety.

NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations".

Conservation: Install and operate temporary facilities and perform construction activities in a manner which reasonably will be conservative and avoid waste of energy and materials including water.

JOB CONDITIONS:

General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need.

Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at locations which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects.

PARTS 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS & EXECUTION, TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES:

The types of services required include, but not by way of limitation, water, sewerage, surface, drainage, electrical power and telephones. Where possible and reasonable, connect to existing

4752.02 1 01505 utilities for required services; and comply with service companies' recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations.

Contractor to pay all costs for services unless otherwise indicated.

Potable Water: Water connection (pay all connection fees) to system. Verify availability and usage at site and as authorized.

Non-Potable Water: Where non-potable water is used, mark each outlet with adequate health- hazard warning signs.

Sewer Sediment: Maintain sewers and temporary connecting sewers in a reasonably clean, non- clogged condition during construction period. At time of substantial completion if elements of work are affecting inflow of sewage, clean sewers.

Temporary Power: Provide service with ground-fault circuit interrupter features, activated from each circuit of 20-amp or less rating. Contractor shall pay all costs for service and for power used.

TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES:

The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, water distribution, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation, electrical power distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs, ladders and roads. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.

Contractor shall Pay all costs for temporary facilities unless otherwise indicated.

Water Distribution: Provide hose lengths sufficient to reach necessary areas of construction work. Prevent freezing of water distribution by either prompt drainage after each use, or by suitable protection. Do not allow water to flow when not necessary for work.

Enclosure: Provide temporary enclosure where reasonably required to ensure adequate workmanship and protection from weather and unsatisfactory ambient conditions for the work, including enclosure where temporary heat is used. Provide fire-retardant treated lumber and plywood. Provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where day lighting of enclosed space would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary lighting. Also, provide dust-tight separations between work and existing facilities that remain in use.

Erect enclosures so that at no time is any exit, exitway, or passage, or any fire lane required by code, law, or regulation blocked or restricted so as to violate such code, law, or regulation.

Minimum disruption of operation and use of existing facilities and access to those facilities is required. Cooperation with the Owner to minimize inconvenience is essential.

4752.02 2 01505 Heating: Heat with self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters, bearing UL, FM or other approved labels appropriate for application. Vent fuel-burning heaters, and equip units with individual- space thermostatic controls. Use electric-resistant space heaters only where no other, more energy-efficient, type of heater is available and allowable.

Electrical Power: Provide weatherproof, grounded, power distribution system sufficient to accommodate construction operations requiring power, use of power, use of power tools, electrical heating, lighting, and start-up testing of permanent electric-powered equipment prior to its permanent connection to electrical system. Provide overload protection. Locate multiple outlets (not less than 4-gang), spaced so that entire area of construction can be reached by power tools on a single extension cord of 100' maximum length.

Lighting: Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship everywhere; by combined use of daylight, general lighting, and portable plug-in task lighting. Provide general lighting with local switching which will enable energy conservation during periods of varying activity (work-in-progress, traffic only, security-check, lock-up, etc.).

Access Provisions: Provide ramps, stairs, ladders and similar temporary access elements as reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during installation. Comply with reasonable requests of governing authorities performing inspections. When permanent stairs are available for access during construction, cover finished surfaces with sufficient protection to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion.

Roads & Parking: Except as otherwise indicated, develop subgrade and subbase of permanent roadways and parking areas at earliest possible date, and provide temporary surfacing to serve as temporary roads during construction. Surface sufficiently to provide all-weather, uninterrupted access to construction area, for every form of transportation which can be reasonably expected. Maintain temporary roads and parking areas during construction. Extend temporary roadway development and surfacing in and around construction site as reasonably required to accommodate construction activities. When no longer needed as temporary roadways, remove temporary surfacing and restore subbases to conditions required by contract documents for permanent development.

SECURITY/PROTECTION PROVISIONS:

The types of temporary security and protection provisions required include, but not by way of limitation, fire protection, barricades, warning signs/lights, site enclosure fence, building enclosure/lookup, personnel security program (theft prevention), environmental protection, and similar provisions intended to minimize property losses, personal injuries and claims for damages at project site. Provide security/protection services and systems in coordination with activities and in a manner to achieve proper and required effectiveness.

Fire Extinguishers: Provide types, sizes, numbers and locations as would be reasonably effective in extinguishing fires during early stages, by personnel at project site. Post warning and quick- instructions at each extinguisher location, and instruct personnel at project site, at time of their first approval, on proper use of extinguishers and other available facilities at project site. Post local fire department call number on each telephone instrument at project site.

4752.02 3 01505 Building Enclosures & Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure building against unauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary enclosures at ground floor and other locations of possible entry, with locked entrances.

Environmental Protection Procedures: Provide facilities, establish procedures, and conduct construction activities in a manner which will ensure compliance with regulations controlling construction activities at project site. Enforce strict discipline on activities related to generation of wastes, pollution of air/water/soil, generation of noise, and similar harmful or deleterious effects which might violate regulations or reasonably irritate persons at or in vicinity of project site.

TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES:

The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, field offices, storage sheds, fabrication sheds, sanitary facilities, drinking water, first aid facilities, bulletin board, telephones, clocks, thermometer, project identification signs, clean-up facilities, waste disposal service, rodent/pest control and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of personnel at the site including Owner's and Engineer's personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by Engineer; and, if not otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities.

Field Office: Provide office space, suitably finished, furnished, equipped, locked, heated, air conditioned, lighted and wired with electrical power. Equip office with minimum of one telephone line and one instrument, plan table, and plan rack to hold working drawings and shop drawings. Provide tack-board material for posting of notices, progress schedule and similar information. Provide shelf space adequate for storage of approved samples.

In addition, Contractor shall provide facilities for use of Engineer's project representative. Provide office space for one professional person, suitably finished, furnished, equipped, locked, heated, air conditioned, lighted and wired with electrical power; not less than 250 square feet floor area. Equip office with one telephone line and one instrument, and not less than two duplex convenience power outlets. In addition to one desk and four chairs (1 swivel), furnish office with one 36" x 96" plan table, and plan rack to hold two complete sets of working drawings and shop drawings.

Sanitary Facilities: At Contractor's option, provide either piped (wet) toilet facilities or self- contained toilet units of type acceptable to governing authorities, adequate (at all stages of construction) for use of personnel at project site. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel when both sexes are working (in any capacity) at project site. Existing facilities are not to be used by construction personnel.

Drinking Water: Provide dispenser-type, drinking water units; either piped with potable water or supplied with bottled water, adequate in number and locations for personnel at project site. Furnish paper cups and waste receptacles.

END OF SECTION 01505

4752.02 4 01505 SECTION 01605 - PRODUCTS & SUBSTITUTIONS:

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

DESCRIPTIONS OF REQUIREMENTS

Definitions: "Products" is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for project or taken from Contractor's stock of previously purchased products. "Materials" is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed or applied to form units of work. "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, etc.). Definitions in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in contract documents, including "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finishes", "accessories", "furnishing", "special construction", and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry.

Substitutions: The requirements for substitutions do not apply to specified Contractor options on products and construction methods. Revisions to contract documents, where requested by Owner, Engineer, are "changes" not "substitutions". Requested substitutions during bidding period, which have been accepted prior to bid, are included in contract documents and are not subject to requirements for substitutions as specified herein. Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities do not constitute "substitutions"; and do not constitute a basis for change orders, except as provided for in contract documents. Otherwise, Contractor's requests for changes in products, materials and methods of construction required by contract documents are considered requests for "substitutions", and are subject to requirements hereof.

Standards: Refer to Division 1 section "Definitions & Standards" for applicability of industry standards to products of project, and for acronyms used in test of specification sections.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

Source Limitation: To the greatest extent possible, for each unit of work, provide products, materials or equipment of a singular generic kind and from a single source.

Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractors selection of a product or material, select an option which is compatible with other products and materials ready selected (which may have been from among options for those other products and material). Total compatibility among options is not assured by limitations within contract documents, but must be provided by Contractor. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product/material selections. Note that only products listed in the prior approval part of the addendum to the contract or listed in the specifications may be included in the bid, see Section 00100.

4752.02 1 01605

PRODUCT DELIVERY-STORAGE-HANDLING

General: Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration and loss including theft. Control delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage of products at site and overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, provide delivery/installation coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage times for products recognized to by flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss.

WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES):

Categories of Specific Warranties: Warranties on the work are in several categories, including those of General Conditions, and including (but not necessarily limited to) the following specific categories related to individual units of work specified in sections of Division 2 through 16 of these specifications.

Special Project Warranty (Guarantee): A warranty specifically written and signed by Contractor for a defined portion of the work; and where required, countersigned by subcontractor, installer, manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor.

Specified Product Warranty: A warranty which is required by contract documents, to be provided for a manufactured product incorporated into the work; regardless of whether manufacturer has published a similar warranty without regard for specific incorporation of product into the work, or has written and executed a special project warranty as a direct result of contract document requirements.

Coincidental Product Warranty: A warranty which is not specifically required by contract documents (other than as specified in this Section); but which is available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer of product has published warranty in connection with purchases and uses of product without regard for specific applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warranty.

Refer to individual sections of Division 2 through 16 for the determination of units of work which are required to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specific requirements and terms of those warranties (or guarantees).

General Limitations: It is recognized that specific warranties are intended primarily to protect Owner against failure of the work to perform as required, and against deficient, defective and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources. Except as otherwise indicated, specific warranties do not cover failures in the work which result from:

(1) Unusual and abnormal phenomena of the elements, (2) The Owner's misuse, maltreatment or improper maintenance of the work, (3) Vandalism after time of substantial completion, or (4) Insurrection or acts of aggression including war.

Related Damages & Losses: In connection with Contractor's correction of warranted work which has failed, remove and replace other work of project which has been damaged as a result 4752.02 2 01605 of such failure, or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work.

Reinstatement of Warranty Period: Except as otherwise indicated, when work covered by special project warranty or product warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or restoration, reinstate warranty by written endorsement for the following time period, starting on date of acceptance of replaced or restored work.

A period of time ending upon date original warranty would have expired if there had been no failure, but not less than half of original warranty period of time.

Replacement Cost, Obligations: Except as otherwise indicated, costs of replacing or restoring failing warranty units or products is Contractor's obligation, without regard for whether Owner has already benefited from use through a portion of anticipated useful service lives.

Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right, at time of substantial completion or thereafter, to reject coincidental product warranties submitted by Contractor, which in opinion of Owner tend to detract from or confuse interpretation of requirements of contract documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCES:

General: The compliance requirements, for individual products as indicated in contract documents, are multiple in nature and may include generic, descriptive, proprietary, performance, prescriptive, compliance with standards, compliance with codes, conformance with graphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements, all of which must be complied with.

Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by contract document requirements, and governing regulations, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects. Required procedures include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following for various indicated methods of specifying:

Prior Approvals:

If a potential supplier wishes to submit for prior approval a particular product other than a product specified in the Contract Documents, he shall do so no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. The prime design professional shall furnish to both the public entity and the potential supplier written approval or denial of the product submitted. All such approvals shall be included in addenda issued prior to bidding. Such approvals shall include both a manufacturer and model or series number for each product approval. The Engineer has full responsibility for such approvals. The potential supplier is responsible for providing the Engineer with a complete submittal which must be specific to the product being proposed and which must contain all technical information required for the Engineer and the Owner to reach a conclusion as to the suitability of the particular product without the need to research additional information beyond the submittal. This information must include capacity, production flow, electrical, mechanical and structural requirement, weights and physical dimensions as well as a list of recent installations within Louisiana or the closest proximity hereto. Failure to provide an

4752.02 3 01605 adequate submittal may be adequate reason for rejecting a product. The Owner and the Engineer will be limited in time to evaluate a multitude of submittals. Therefore, it is important that submittals be specific and technically adequate.

Visual Matching: Where matching with an established sample is required, final judgment of whether a product proposed by the Contractor matches sample satisfactorily is Engineer's judgment.

Visual Selection: (a) Except as otherwise indicated, where specified products requirements include, "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or words of similar effect, the selection of manufacturer and basic product (complying with requirements) is Contractor's option, and subsequent selection of color, pattern and texture is Engineer's selection. (b) Where specified product requirements include, "...as selected from standard colors, patterns, textures available within the industry...", or words to that effect, selection of product (complying with requirements, and within established cost category) is Engineer's selection, including designation of manufacturer where necessary to obtain desired color, pattern or texture.

Proposed manufacturer shall have an adequate product selection equal to the average available in the industry.

SUBSTITUTIONS:

Substitutions are only allowed by approval prior to bid date as stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders or Special Conditions.

If a product that is specified becomes unavailable due to no fault of the Contractor after the Contract is awarded, an item that has been approved prior to bid date may be substituted. If prior approved items are unavailable or if no prior approval exists for the unavailable item, the Engineer will consider written requests from Contractor for substitution of products.

Conditions for Contractor Requested Substitution: Contractor's request for substitution will be received and considered after the Contract is awarded only when extensive revisions to contract documents are not required and changes are in keeping with general intent of contract documents; when timely, fully documented and properly submitted; and when one or more of the following conditions is satisfied, all as judged by Engineer. Otherwise, requests will be returned without action except to record non-compliance with these requirements.

Where required product, material or method cannot be provided within Contract Time, but not as a result of Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate various activities properly.

Where required product, material or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of the work, or cannot be properly coordinated therewith, or cannot be warranted as required, or will encounter other substantial non-compliances which are not possible to otherwise overcome except by making requested substitutions, which Contractor shall select from the remaining approved products to overcome such non-compatibility.

4752.02 4 01605 Where required product, material or method cannot receive required approval by a governing authority, and requested substitution can be so approved.

Engineer shall be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution.

Contractor's Representation: A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor:

Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.

Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the Product specified.

Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and make such other changes as may be required to make the Work complete in all respects.

Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become apparent.

Engineer will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify Contractor of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution.

Work-Related Submittals: Contractor's submittal of, and Engineer's acceptance of shop drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of contract documents, does not constitute an acceptable and valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof.

GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS:

General: Provide products which comply with requirements, and which are undamaged and unused at time of installation, and which are complete with accessories, turn, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for intended use and effect.

Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types which have been produced and used previously and successfully on other projects and in similar applications.

Continued Availability: Where additional amounts of a product, by nature of its application, are likely to be needed by Owner at a later date for maintenance and repair or replacement work, provide a standard, domestically produced product which is likely to be available to Owner at such later date.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable)

END OF SECTION 01605

4752.02 5 01605 SECTION 01705 - PROJECT CLOSE-OUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

Definitions: Close-out is hereby defined to include general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 2 through 16. Time of close-out is directly related to "Substantial Completion" and therefore may be either a single time period for entire work or a series of substantially complete portions of the work at different dates. That time variation (if any) shall be applicable to other provisions of this section.

PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

General: Prior to requesting Engineer's inspection for certification of substantial completion (for either entire work or portions thereof) complete the following and list known exceptions in request:

In progress payment request, coincident with or first following date claimed, show either 100% completion for portion of work claimed as "substantially complete" ... or list incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete.

Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract drawings.

Submit statement showing accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.

Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents.

Submit letters from subcontractors on company stationary stating that major equipment and/or systems are fully operational and installed in accordance with plans and specification requirements.

Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full and unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities, including (where required) occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.

Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, and similar final record information.

Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner.

4752.02 1 01705 Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys to Owner, and advise Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions.

Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of Owner's operating/maintenance personnel.

Discontinue and remove from project site temporary facilities and services along with construction tools and facilities, mock-ups, and similar elements.

Provide HVAC Test & Balancing Report.

Complete final cleaning up requirements. Touch-up or otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, Engineer will either prepare certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance.

Recordation: Have Certificate of Substantial Completion recorded with the Clerk of Court in the Parish in which the work has been performed.

PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE:

Note: The public law requires that final acceptance is not official until approval by a majority vote of the Public Agency is obtained. The Public Agency will not act on acceptance until all punch list items are completed.

Warranty period for all materials and systems required in all sections of the specifications shall begin on the date of recordation of acceptance in the Parish Courthouse .

General: Prior to requesting Engineer's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as required by General Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions (if any) in request:

Submit final payment request with final releases, Clear Lien Certificate from Clerk of Court, and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

Submit updated final statement, accounting for additional (final) changes to Contract Sum.

Submit certified copy of Engineer's final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, endorsed and dated by Engineer.

Submit consent of surety.

4752.02 2 01705 Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement, acceptable to Owner.

Revise and submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

Submit a release from surety.

Recordation & Final Invoices: Contractor shall be issued a notice of termination upon affirmative action of the Public Agency for final acceptance which shall be recorded by the Contractor with the Parish Clerk of Court. Upon presentation of a Certificate of Non-Mortgage ascertaining lien-free status dated not less than 46 days after the date of recordation of termination and upon presentation of a valid final invoice, the Engineer will recommend the processing of final payment to the Contractor.

Reinspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Engineer will reinspect the work. Upon completion of reinspection, Engineer will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. Engineer will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated.

Submittal to Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government for Final Acceptance:

Once ALL requirements listed herein have been met, the Engineer will submit the project to the Owner for review and determination of suitability for final acceptance. If the Owner agrees that all requirements for final acceptance have been met, the project will be put on the agenda of the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government Council for approval of final acceptance. If the Lafayette City-Parish Consolidated Government Council approves the final acceptance, the final acceptance will be recorded at the office of the Lafayette Parish Clerk of Court whereupon the 45 day lien period will commence.

RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS:

General: Specific requirements for record documents are indicated in individual sections of these specifications. Other requirements are indicated in General Conditions. General submittal requirements are indicated in "Submittals" sections. Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.

Maintain Louisiana State Fire Marshal's approved Contract Documents in temporary field office; documents furnished to Contractor by Engineer or Owner. Turn over to Owner for his permanent records upon completion of work.

Record Drawings: Maintain a white-print set (blue or black-line) of contract drawings and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with mark-up of actual installations which vary substantially from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawings is most capable of showing "field" conditions fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with

4752.02 3 01705 red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance to Owner, but was for some reason not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change-order numbers where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set. Upon completion, submit set to Engineer for preparation of final As-Builts for Owner's records.

In addition to the official set of As-Built drawings required upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit Progress As-Built drawings with each months pay request. Progress As- Built drawings shall meet the requirements stated above with the exception that black and white copies of the record drawings maintained by the contractor may be submitted as Progress As- Builts.

Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of specifications, including addenda, change orders and similar modifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark-up variations (of substance) in actual work in comparison with text of specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set to Engineer for Owner's records.

Record Product Data: Maintain two copies of each product data submittal and mark-up significant variations in actual work in comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in product as delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set to Engineer for Owner's records.

Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. Immediately prior to date of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to Engineer for Owner's records.

Maintenance Manuals: Organize maintenance-and-operating manual information into suitable sets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and indexed. Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, copies of warranties, wiring diagrams, recommended "turn around" cycles, inspection procedures, shop drawings, product data, and similar applicable information. Bind each manual of each set in a heavy-duty, 3-ring vinyl covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on both front and spine of each binder. Provide three complete sets for Owner's records.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)

4752.02 4 01705 PART 3 - EXECUTION

General Operating/Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing maintenance or operation, to meet with Owner's personnel at project site, to provide basic instructions needed for proper operation and maintenance of entire work. Include instructions by manufacturer's representatives where installers are not expert in the required procedures. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare parts and materials, lubricants, fuels, identification system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities. For operational equipment, demonstrate start-up, shut-down, emergency operations, noise and vibration adjustments, safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, energy effectiveness, and similar operations. Review maintenance and operations in relation with applicable warranties, agreements to maintain, bonds, and similar continuing commitments.

FINAL CLEANING:

General: Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Division 2 through 16. General cleaning during progress of work is specified in General Conditions and as temporary services in "Temporary Facilities" section of this Division. Provide final cleaning of the work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of work to normal "clean" condition expected for a first-class building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required:

Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.

Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials.

Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.

Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean; remove excess lubrication and other substances.

Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces.

Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean.

Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces.

Clean food service equipment to a condition of sanitation ready and acceptable for intended food service use.

Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency.

Clean project site (yard and grounds), including landscape development areas, of litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains,

4752.02 5 01705 petrochemical spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even textured surface.

Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection of project, and to rid project of rodents, insects and other pests.

Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Engineer, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of the work to protect previously completed work during remainder of construction period.

General Close-out Requirements:

Final Cleaning: At close-out time, clean or reclean entire work to normal level for "first class" maintenance/cleaning of projects of a similar nature. Remove nonpermanent protection and labels, clean exposed finishes, touch-up minor finish damage, remove debris and broom-clean non-occupied spaces, sweep and wash paved areas, police yards and grounds, and perform similar clean-up operations needed to produce a "clean" condition as judged by Engineer.

Compliances: Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do not burn waste materials at site, or bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property, or discharge volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems; remove waste materials from site and dispose of in a lawful manner. Where extra materials of value remaining after completions of associated work have become Owner's property, dispose of these to Owner's best advantage as directed.

END OF SECTION 01705

4752.02 6 01705

SECTION 01710 - CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Maintain premises free from accumulations of waste, debris and rubbish caused by construction operations.

At completion of Work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials. Clean all sight-exposed surfaces. Leave project clean and ready for occupancy.

Cleaning required for specific trades or work: Specification Section pertaining to that trade or work.

REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:

Codes and Standards: Applicable Federal, State and local codes and regulations relative to environmental safety regulations.

Hazards Controls: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.

Pollution Control: Conduct clean-up and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

1. Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on the project site is prohibited. 2. Disposal of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner) in storm or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways is prohibited.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

CLEANING MATERIALS:

Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.

Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

4752.02 1 01710

PART 3 – EXECUTION

DURING CONSTRUCTION:

Keep work area and all occupied property in a neat and orderly condition at all times. Oversee and ensure that building and grounds are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. Sprinkler dusty debris with very fine water mist to control accumulation of dust. Do not use water in quantity so as to puddle. Do not allow waste and other materials such as rubbish, debris, wrappers, etc., to accumulate and become unsightly or hazardous. Promptly remove equipment and excess materials as they become no longer needed for the progress of work. At not less than every day during progress of work, clean up work areas and access, and dispose of waste materials, rubbish, and debris. Legally dispose of at public or private dumping areas off Owner's property. At the completion of Work, restore work area to its original condition. Lower waste materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights. Keep street and access to site free of rubbish and debris.

Contractor shall be responsible for damage to or destruction of property of any character resulting from the work or caused by defective work or the use of unsatisfactory materials or workmanship.

Contractor shall be responsible for preservation of all private property, trees, fences, etc., along the adjacent street, right-of-way, etc., and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage or injury thereto. He shall use suitable precautions to prevent damage to pipes, conduits and other structures.

If damage to any structures, utilities, or other improvement occurs by reason of Contractor's operations, even though special precautions have been employed, Contractor shall be entirely responsible for such damage and shall make all repairs as required to the satisfaction of Owner.

Contractor shall not injure, destroy, or trim landscaping without authorization by Owner. Damaged landscaping will be replaced by Contractor with new stock or with other stock satisfactory to Owner at the expense of Contractor.

FINAL CLEANING:

Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.

Remove grease, mastics, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces.

Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes.

Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

Clean stairwell, hatchways, and stocking area.

4752.02 2 01710 Prior to final completion of Owner occupancy, conduct an inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas to verify that entire Work area is clean.

END OF SECTION 01710

4752.02 3 01710 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to work of this section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings.

Excavation and filling are included as part of this work.

Preparation of subgrade for pavements is included as part of this work.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.

Testing and Inspection Services:

Owner will engage soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations.

JOB CONDITIONS:

Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. The Geotechnical report is available to the Contractor upon request for information purposes only. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are made available for convenience of the Contractor.

Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations.

Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with the Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of the utility owner.

Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

4752.02 1 02200 Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground structures and utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are active.

Use of Explosives:

The use of explosives for earthwork is not permitted.

Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.

Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SOIL MATERIALS

Definitions:

Satisfactory Soil shall be soil obtained from the project excavation if determined to be suitable for use in backfilling by the Engineer, or shall be select borrow fill meeting these specifications. Cohesive soils used for embankment or backfill shall be a lean clay with a liquid limit of less than 50 and a plasticity index less than 20. The material shall be placed on the site and either dried or moistened to get the moisture content within 3% of its optimum. The material shall then be compacted to the average density shown on the drawings or in the job specifications. The Engineer shall have the sole authority to determine the suitability of excavated material to use as fill.

Subbase Material: (Roadway Areas) Satisfactory soil materials compacted to required density.

Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100% passing a 1½" sieve and not more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve.

Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter.

Limestone Base Material, Maintenance Limestone, Embedment Limestone Surface Coarse: Crushed limestone, ASTM D124, Type 1, Gradation C, No. 610 Gradation, compacted per specifications.

4752.02 2 02200 PART 3 – EXECUTION

POTHOLING:

Potholing: Potholing shall be utilized during construction activities as required herein to prevent excavation damage to existing underground utilities for all open-cut excavations and trenchless installation methods. Potholing is the practice of digging a test hole to expose underground utilities to determine the horizontal and vertical location of the facility.

Methods: The following alternative methods shall be utilized for potholing.

Hand Digging: Hand digging is the method of excavating a pothole by manual means with hand-held, non- mechanical equipment such as a shovel.

Vacuum Excavation: Vacuum excavation shall consist of air or water pressure to break up the soil and a vacuum device to collect the spoil. The Contractor shall determine if air or water vacuum excavation shall be used dependent upon specific site and environmental characteristics. Soil type such as heavy clay may require water vacuum excavation. Air vacuum excavators shall be utilized if mud from water vacuum excavators cannot be disposed of properly. Air vacuum excavators shall be used if damage to utilities, such as cutting through cables, will occur with the use of water vacuum excavators.

Air: Air vacuum excavators shall utilize a high velocity air stream to penetrate, expand, and break-up the soil. The loosened particles of soil and rock shall be removed from the excavation through the use of a vacuum.

Water: Water vacuum excavation systems shall excavate the pothole using high-pressure water to reduce and loosen the soil. The wet soil and mud slurry shall be removed to a spoil tank using a vacuum.

Maximum pothole size shall be 12 inches in diameter or 12 inch x 12 inch square.

Construction drawings indicating the proposed construction and existing utilities shall be present and utilized during potholing activities. The construction drawings shall be compared to locate paint marks to determine if all existing utilities shown on the drawings have been identified in the field. If the drawings and locate paint marks do not match, additional potholing shall be completed to determine accurate locations.

If locate paint marks have improperly designated the location of a facility, and the facility is exposed during potholing, the facility owner and Louisiana One-Call shall be notified. The entity that exposed the facility shall document the horizontal and vertical location of the facility and communicate the information to the facility owner. If a utility cannot be located through potholing used in conjunction with construction drawings and locate marks, the facility owner and Louisiana One-Call shall be contacted

Potholing shall be completed to expose existing utilities, including mains and service lines, when open cut excavations are within the tolerance zone of the marked utility. The tolerance zone, also known as the “approximate location”, is a strip of land equal to the width of the underground utility plus two feet on each side.

4752.02 3 02200

For trenchless operations with a bore path that parallels a utility (mains and service lines) within 3 feet, potholing shall be completed at the beginning and end of the bore and every 50 feet along the route. For trenchless operations with a bore path that parallels a utility (mains and service lines) within 5 feet, potholing should be required at the beginning and end of the bore and every 200 feet along the route. Potholing shall be completed for all utilities (mains and service lines) crossing the path of trenchless operations.

In congested areas having several facilities in close proximity and/or crisscrossing each other, locates have greater potential to be less accurate. Potholing shall be utilized for excavations near congested utility areas.

Facilities exposed during potholing shall be protected throughout the project. Utilities that are rendered unsupported due to potholing shall be temporarily supported by shoring or other means. The utility shall be protected from heavy and sharp items falling into the excavation that could damage or cut the facility.

Potholes shall be restored within 24 hours after the utility has been located. Backfilling and restoration of the pavement shall be in accordance with the construction standards and specifications.

EXCAVATION:

Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations.

Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as unauthorized excavation.

Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footings or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to the Engineer.

Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. There will be no pay for backfill required to fill unauthorized excavations.

Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify the Engineer who will make an inspection of conditions.

Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of the contract unit price for "Channel Excavation".

4752.02 4 02200

Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.

Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.

Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition.

Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses.

Provide permanent steel sheet piling or pressure creosoted timber sheet piling wherever subsequent removal of sheet piling might permit lateral movement of soil under adjacent structures. Cut off tops as required and leave permanently in place.

Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collection or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

Contractor shall be responsible for dewatering as required for completion of the project at no direct pay. A copy of the geotechnical investigation report is attached to the specifications for informational purposes.

Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. The Engineer shall have sole authority to determine the suitability of excavated materials for use as backfill.

If necessary, such excavated materials will be dried by the contractor to use as backfill. There will be no direct pay for such work and the cost thereof shall be included in the contract unit price for "Channel Excavation".

Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.

Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified.

Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10', and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit

4752.02 5 02200 placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.

In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as shown.

Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room.

Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond structure perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to provide adequate cover below finish grade.

Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by the Engineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35°F. (1°C).

COMPACTION:

General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification.

Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less that the following percentages of maximum dry density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor) or D698 (Standard Proctor); and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 & ASTM D4254, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship.

Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% Modified, 95% Standard maximum dry density.

Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% Modified, 95% Standard maximum dry density.

Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 85% maximum dry density.

Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 85% maximum dry density.

Drives & Parking Areas: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% Modified, 95% Standard maximum dry density.

4752.02 6 02200 Limestone Base Material and Surface Coarse: Compact to 90% Modified Proctor density, ASTM D1557, (95% Standard Proctor Density ASTM D698) or 80% relative density as per ASTM D4253 & D4254.

Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density.

Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value at no additional cost to Owner.

BACKFILL AND FILL:

General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below, unless otherwise shown on the contract drawings.

In excavations, use satisfactory soil excavated.

Under grassed areas, use satisfactory soil excavated.

Under pavements, use subbase material, or satisfactory soil excavated.

Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

Acceptance of construction below finished grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities.

Removal of concrete formwork.

Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of structure or utilities, or leave in place if required.

Removal of debris.

Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.

GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface.

4752.02 7 02200

When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.

PLACEMENT & COMPACTION:

Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Place backfill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. When obtaining the average density of a lift to determine its conformance to specifications, the lift may be immediately rejected if any density is more than 2% below the required average. The decision to accept or reject a lift is at the sole discretion of the Engineer as Owner's representative. The Contractor has the option of performing additional tests, at his own expense, to prove the adequacy of the lift. The final decision rests with the Engineer.

For fill to be compacted by heavy machinery, the thickness of lifts used shall be no more than the height of the teeth on sheepsfoot rollers. Generally, for 48 inch diameter or smaller drum rollers, the maximum compacted lift thickness acceptable is 6 inches. For rollers with drums of 60 inches in diameter and larger, with teeth about 9 inches long, a 9 inch final compaction lift thickness will be acceptable. For material to be compacted by hand operated tampers, a maximum layer shall be 4" loose depth.

While, generally, sheepsfoot rollers are most suitable for compaction of clay soils, the contractor may use spiketooth rollers, rubber tired rollers, or any fill compaction equipment that has sufficient mass to compact the soil. Generally, the drums of sheepsfoot rollers should be filled with water, or for additional weight, with both water and sand. Tractors or other vehicles used primarily for hauling WILL NOT be allowed as fill compaction equipment. The contractor should also have smooth wheel rollers to seal the working area at the end of the day's operations so that overnight rains will not saturate the soil and delay his work. These rollers should also be used to seal the surface whenever rainfall is imminent.

GRADING:

Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:

Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10' above or below required subgrade elevations.

Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than ½" above or below required subgrade elevation.

Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification.

4752.02 8 02200 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed.

Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method), as applicable:

Pavement Subgrade: Owner may perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area.

The Owner shall pay only for the tests which meet the specified density and moisture.

MAINTENANCE:

Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.

Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction.

END OF SECTION 02200

4752.02 9 02200 SECTION 02719 - PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

Under this section, the Contractor shall furnish and install piping for both wastewater and potable water in accordance with the plans and as specified herein.

FIRE PROTECTION IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT AND COLLECTION FACILITIES:

All equipment shall be designed and arranged to comply fully with provisions of NFPA 820, “Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities ”, relative to hazardous environments. All wiring methods, enclosures, options and accessories required to comply fully with NFPA 820 shall be included in the bid.

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

These specifications apply to items not specifically specified elsewhere.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Extent of piping work is shown on drawings.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 sections for excavation and backfilling required in connection with piping.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete work required in connection with piping.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 9 sections for painting. ALL above ground piping shall be furnished shop primed, asphaltic coating is not acceptable.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

Installer: A firm with at least 2 years of successful installation experience on piping projects similar to this project.

Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Standard Plumbing Code and local metro plumbing code where more stringent.

Test Pressure: All piping and valves specified herein shall be designed for a minimum hydrostatic test pressure of 100 psi.

SUBMITTALS:

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each product specified in piping. Product data shall include certification of compliance with referenced standards and materials of construction. Submit only those items that have been pre-approved

4752.02 1 02719 either by name in this specification or by addenda. All products not listed as approved prior to bidding shall be rejected.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PIPE & FITTINGS:

General: Provide ells, tees, reducing tees, wyes, couplings, fittings, and other required piping accessories of same type and class of material as conduit, or of material having equal or superior physical and chemical properties as acceptable to the Engineer.

Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP): AWWA C151, with fittings complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153, mechanical joint and rubber gaskets complying with AWWA C111. Flanged pipe shall be thickness Class 53 complying with AWWA C115. All ductile iron fittings shall be manufactured by one of the approved ductile iron pipe manufacturers listed in these specifications or on a prior approval list in addenda. The pressure classification for restrained joint, mechanical joint and push joint pipe shall be as follows;

4” – 12” Class 350 16”-20” Class 250 24” Class 200 30”-48” Class 150

Bolts and nuts for mechanical joint pipe shall be high strength, low alloy steel conforming to AWWA C111. Bolts and nuts for flange pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA C115 and ASTM A307.

Flange adapters - Flange adapters may be used to join flange pipe, fittings and valves in the filter gallery. Flange adapters shall be constructed of ductile iron with SBR gaskets supplied by flange manufacturer. Minimum working pressure shall be equal to that of the pipe fitting being joined. Flange adapter shall be "Mega Flange" as manufactured by EBAA Iron or pre-approved equal. Only flange adapters which utilize wedge action connections will be allowed .

ALL pipe and fittings shall be cement mortar lined and asphalt coated in the interior in accordance with AWWA C104.

All potable water piping to boiler shall be Type K, hard temper, 250 psi working pressure copper. Joints shall be solder type.

Gas Piping: All natural gas piping shall be schedule 40 Black Iron and installed in accordance with NFPA 54. All digester gas piping shall be Schedule 40, Type 304 stainless steel . Joints shall be screwed or flanged. All gaskets shall be made of a minimum 3.2 mm thick neoprene full-faced, with a durometer “A” hardness of not less than 40.

Galvanized Pipe: ASTM A126 with A153 galvanizing.

Corrugated Metal Hose: Corrugated flexible metal hose for gas service shall be constructed of type 316 stainless steel with a single braid and a minimum static bending radius of 6’ and a minimum dynamic bending radius of 14’ with a maximum working pressure of 350 psi.

4752.02 2 02719 Stainless steel gas hose shall be Masterflex AF550 as manufactured by Hose Master or pre- approved equal. VALVES:

Gate Valves 4" to 36": Gate valves shall be non-rising stem, resilient wedge type rated for 250 psi cold water working pressure. The valve body, bonnet, wedge and operating nut shall be constructed of ductile iron. The ductile iron wedge shall be completely encapsulated with rubber. All valves shall have thrust washers located above and below the thrust collar to assure trouble-free operation. The valve shall seal flow in either direction. All internal and external surfaces of the valves shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C550. Valves 4” through 30” shall comply with AWWA C509 or AWWA C515. 36” valves shall comply with AWWA C515

Valves complying with AWWA C509 shall be Series 500 as manufactured by American Flow Control, Series 2360 as manufactured by Mueller, Metroseal 250 as manufactured by U.S. Pipe, or pre-approved equal. Valves complying with AWWA C515 shall be Series 2500 as manufactured by American Flow Control, Series 2361 as manufactured by Mueller, or pre- approved equal.

2" and Smaller: Standard shutoff valves with maximum working pressure cast into body, non- rising stem type complying with AWWA C500.

Plug Valves for Gas Service: Plug valves gas service shall be constructed of non-corrosive materials. Body shall be constricted of 316 stainless steel with flanged connections. Resilient plug shall be constructed of material suitable for use with natural gas and digester gas service. Valves shall be quarter turn and equipped with a lever actuator. Valves shall be as manufactured by DeZURIK or pre-approved equal.

Plug Valves for Wastewater Service: Plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated, eccentric type and shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psi. Plug valves shall have a resilient round port plug and stainless steel stem bearings. Valves shall provide tight shut-off at rated pressure. The plug valve body shall be ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron in accordance with AWWA C-504 with a welded-in overlay of 90% nickel alloy content on all surfaces contacting the face of the plug. The valve plug shall be ductile iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12with Buna-N resilient seating surface to mate with the body seat. Plug valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated, sleeve type metallic bearings. Grit excluder seals shall be provided in the upper and lower journals to isolate the bearings. Manual gear actuators shall be totally enclosed worm and gear type permanently lubricated. Above ground valves 8" and larger shall be provided with gear actuators. Buried valves 6" and larger shall be provided with gear actuators. Valves shall be coated on all internal and external ferrous surfaces in accordance with AWWA C550. Plug valves shall be "Millcentric" plug valve as manufactured by Milliken, Golden Anderson, or pre-approved equal.

Check Valves: Check valves 3" and larger shall be all iron with removable bronze seat and clapper and shall be equipped with counter balance lever and spring complying with AWWA C508. Check valves shall be suitable for installation in vertical or horizontal lines. Flanged ends shall conform to A.S.A. B16.1, Class 125. All internal and external surfaces of the valves shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C550. Valves shall be Mueller, Golden Anderson, American Flow Control or pre-approved equal.

4752.02 3 02719 Knife Gate Valves: Knife gate valves shall be 100 psi cast 316 stainless steel body, stainless steel gate and stem and resilient seat for corrosion protection. Seating material shall be suitable for heated sludge applications. Knife Gates shall have non-rising stems and shall be equipped with a hand wheels. Knife gate valves shall be as manufactured by DeZURIK, Wey, or pre- approved equal.

ELECTRIC ACTUATORS:

Electric Actuators: All electric actuators shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C540. Actuators shall contain motor, motor starters, gearing, manual over-ride, limit switches, torque switches, drive coupling, integral motor controls and mechanical dial position indicator. The motor shall be specifically designed for actuator. The motor will be of the induction type with class F insulation and protected by means of thermal switches imbedded in the motor windings. All motors shall have a 15 minute duty rating and shall be suitable for a minimum of 600 starts per hour. All electric actuators installed at the wastewater treatment plant shall be designed for an operating pressure in the pipeline of 50 psi. Motor enclosure will be totally enclosed, non- ventilated. Operating voltage shall be 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.

Actuator enclosure shall be NEMA 4 (watertight), minimum, and shall include a watertight and dustproof plug and socket seal between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements of the actuator. The motor shall be protected from ingress of moisture and dust when the terminal cover is removed for connection of field wiring. Enclosure must allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply connection. All external fasteners on the electric actuator will be stainless steel. Gear case shall be cast iron. Fasteners on limit switch and terminal compartments shall be captured to prevent loss while covers are removed.

All gearing shall be grease lubricated and designed to withstand the full stall torque of the motor.

Manual over-ride shall be by handwheel. Manual operation will be via power gearing to minimize required rim pull and facilitate easy change-over from motor to manual operation when actuator is under load. Return from manual to electric mode of operation will be automatic upon motor operation. A seized or inoperable motor shall not prevent manual operation.

Limit switches shall be furnished at each end of travel. Limit switch adjustment shall not be altered by manual operation. One set of normally open and one set of normally closed contacts will be furnished at each end of travel where indicated. Contacts shall be of silver and capable of reliably switching low voltage DC source from the control system. Additional switches shall be provided as required for remote operation.

Torque switches shall be furnished at each end of travel. Torque switches will trip when the valve load exceeds the torque switch setting. The torque switch adjustment device must be calibrated directly in units of torque.

Actuators will be capable of operating in an ambient temperature range of -20 to +175 degrees F. The actuator shall have thermostatically controlled heaters for prevention of condensation at low temperatures and high humidity. The manufacturer of the actuator shall be responsible for supplying the actuator with the appropriate torque rating for the valve being equipped.

All actuators in open/close service will be furnished with integral motor controls consisting of reversing starters, control transformer, phase discriminator, monitor relay (to signal fault

4752.02 4 02719 conditions such as thermal switch trip, torque switch tripped in mid-travel, wrong phase sequence or phase failure), "open-stop-close" pushbuttons, " Hand-off-Computer " selector switch in addition to red and green indicating lights. An interface with the control system must be furnished with optical isolators to separate incoming voltage signals from the internal motor controls. Actuators requiring momentary operation for valve positioning in both the Hand or Computer position, shall be set at the factory. The push buttons will operate the actuator when the open or closed button is depressed. Releasing the button will stop the valve at the desired position.

All actuators shall be from the same manufacturer. A permanent loop tag identifying function and loop number shall be installed. The valve manufacturer shall install all electric actuators on the valves and shall test the complete assembly before shipping. Electric actuators shall be model (AUMA) SA/SAR or SG as manufactured by AUMA Actuators, Inc. or pre-approved equal.

Actuator Spare Parts: The listed spare parts are for AUMA, approved manufacturers shall provide equivalent spare parts in the quantities listed. The actuator, manufacturer shall provide the following spare parts; 1. One (1) spare “Matic” control package for each type of control (i.e. one for modulating, one for on-off, and one for momentary contact operation.) 2. One spare motor for each size of actuator provided and for each type of service. (e.g. for a 12” modulating valves and a 12” on-off service valves, two motors would be provided) 3. Two O-ring kits for each size of actuator. 4. Two tool kits.

MISCELLANEOUS:

Mechanical Pipe Seals: Mechanical pipe seals sealing pipe through concrete walls shall be constructed of EPDM rubber with all type 316 stainless steel hardware. Mechanical pipe seals shall be Innerlynx as manufactured by Advanced Products and Services of Lafayette, LA, Linkseal, or pre-approved equal.

INSTALLATION SCHEDULE:

Pipe materials shall be as indicated on the plans.

PIPE, VALVE AND FITTING INSULATION:

ACCESSORIES:

General: Provide anchorages for tees, plugs, caps, and bends.

After installation, apply a full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of rods and clamps on underground piping. For above ground see Section 09900 - Painting.

Pipe Supports: On all horizontal runs of pipe, the bottom of which is 12" or less above the floor, a concrete support, as detailed on the plans, shall be used.

4752.02 5 02719 On all horizontal runs of pipe, the bottom of which is over 12" above the floor, an adjustable pipe saddle support as shown on the plans or equal to ANVIL Fig. 264 shall be used.

See plans for special pipe support details as required. Provide supports a maximum of 10' apart on straight runs of pipe and under all fittings or changes of direction in pipe.

Clamps, Straps and Washers: Type 316 stainless steel.

Rods: Steel, ASTM A575.

Rod Couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A197.

Bolts: Steel, ASTM A307.

Cast Iron Washers: ASTM A126, Class A.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION:

General: Install exterior piping system in compliance with local governing regulations. Minimum cover on pipes shall be 3' where possible.

Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600 and with the recommended procedures of the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association.

Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) & Polyethylene Pipe (PE): Install in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.

Copper Tube: Install in accordance with CDA "Copper Tube" Handbook.

Control Valves: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Joint Adapters: Make joints between ductile iron pipe and other types of pipe with standard manufactured cast iron adapters and fittings.

Interior Inspection: Inspect conduit to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.

If the inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration or other defects, correct such defects to satisfaction of Engineer.

Cleaning Conduit: Clear interior of conduit of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.

Place plugs in end of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work stops.

TESTING:

4752.02 6 02719 Perform operational testing of valves by opening and closing under water pressure to insure proper operation.

All low pressure gas lines shall be tested with a 10” mercury column for thirty minutes. Any leaks shall be repaired and the system retested.

END OF SECTION 02719

4752.02 7 02719 SECTION 02900 – SEEDING AND HYDRO-SEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General, and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Supply and install all Reinforcing Steel as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

Coordination: Coordinate work with other trades so as not to interfere. Bring interferences between trades to Engineer's attention and resolve before any concrete is poured.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

WELDED REINFORCING STEEL SPLICES:

Welded Splices shall be done only as detailed and at the locations shown on the drawings.

Welding of reinforced steel must be performed by qualified welders.

Qualification of Welders: The qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the AWS Structural Welding Code and the following:

For each welder, make three test splices of each of the bar sizes to be spliced in the presence of the Engineer. The test splices shall be tension tested, two to destruction and one to yield strength by the testing agency.

Testing splices shall be made at the project site under conditions similar to the actual splice conditions and as directed by the Engineer.

Welders Qualification Certificates shall be available at the project site at all times.

STANDARDS:

Comply with requirements set forth in the "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures," published by the American Concrete Institute except where more exacting requirements are specified in the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MATERIALS:

Reinforcement:

Reinforcing Bars shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615-Grade 60, unless Grade 40 is indicated on the plans.

4752.02 1 03200

Welded wire fabric shall conform to requirements of ASTM A185 using bright steel wire meeting ASTM A82. Gauges and dimensions shall be as noted on the Drawings.

All steel for reinforcement shall be new, unrusted stock, free from mill scale and delivered without rust.

Chairs shall be standard Class 1 chairs as specified in the "Manual of Standard Practice" of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.

Tie wire shall be No. 16 American Wire Gauge or heavier, black, annealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PLACING REINFORCING STEEL

Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and securely tied at intersections with 16-gauge black annealed wire. It shall be maintained in proper position by chairs, bar supports, or other approved devices. Bars in footings shall be supported on precast concrete blocks having a compressive strength greater than or equal to the concrete in which they are placed. The maximum dimensions of such blocks shall be 6" x 6" x thickness required. Spacing of such concrete blocks shall be subject to Engineer's approval.

Concrete protection of reinforcing shall be not less than the following:

3 inches where concrete is poured against ground.

2 inches where concrete is poured against forms but may be in contact with ground.

2 inches minimum in face of any concrete structures to be in contact with wastewater.

1½ inches minimum in exterior face of exterior walls (exposed to weather but not in contact with ground).

3/4 inch minimum in interior walls and interior face of exterior walls.

1½ inches in beams, girders, and columns.

Clear distance between bars shall be not less than 1½", 1½ bar diameters, nor less than 1-1/3 times the maximum size of coarse aggregate. See details. Reinforcing steel in beams and slabs shall not be placed until after concrete in walls and columns has been poured. Wherever conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves, etc., interfere with the placing of reinforcing steel as shown or called for, the Contractor must consult with Engineer and secure from him the method of procedure before pouring any concrete. Conduit may in no case be in contact with reinforcement. Consult with Engineer prior to placing any conduit within concrete pours.

END OF SECTION 03200

4752.02 2 03200 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

Section 05520.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Definition: Metal fabrications includes items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere. Types of work in this section include metal fabrications for:

Ladders. Nosings. Rough hardware. Loose bearing and leveling plates. Loose steel lintels. Miscellaneous steel trim. Miscellaneous framing and supports. Miscellaneous steel beams. Steel gratings. Steel framed stair. Stair railings. Bumper post.

COORDINATION

Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except as otherwise shown and specified:

AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", including "Commentary of the AISC Specifications."

AISC "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction."

4752.02 1 05500 ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use."

Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure."

Field Measurements: Where possible, take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting of the work. However, as not to delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrication might cause delays.

Inserts and anchorages: Furnish stainless steel inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for the installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the Project Site. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

SUBMITTALS:

Samples: Submit 1 set of representative samples of materials and finished products as may be requested by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MATERIALS:

Metals:

Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.

Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A 500; or hot rolled, ASTM A 510.

Structural Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A570; or cold-rolled ASTM A611, Class 1; of grade required for design loading.

4752.02 2 05500 Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade G90 of grade required for design loading. Coating designation as indicated, or if not indicated, G90.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Type S, Grade B black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated.

Cast Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30.

Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5.

Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported work, unless otherwise indicated.

Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; stainless steel. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, stainless steel. Wedge anchors shall be type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

Grout:

Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: See Section 03300 for non-shrink grout specification.

Fasteners:

General: Provide stainless steel fasteners for all applications except as otherwise noted. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required.

The following apply to the control building and not to areas adjacent to or associated with treatment process units (which shall have stainless steel fasteners unless otherwise noted on the drawings).

Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.

Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

Machine Screw: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.

Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel FS FF-S-111.

Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325.

Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required.

Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

Fasteners for aluminum and stainless steel: Stainless steel.

Anchors:

4752.02 3 05500

Provide holes of proper size, spacing to receive screws and bolts.

Expansion bolts, 1/4" or less: Rawl Caulk-ins or Arrow Series 4000.

Expansion bolts, over 1/4" diameter: Rawl Multi-Caulk, Head in hole-thread out, or thread in hole-head out, as detailed or required for installation.

Lead expansion shields: For machine screws and bolts to penetrate masonry or concrete 1 1/2" minimum.

Toggle bolts: Two wing spring type. Size as indicated or of proportionate strength for members secured. Class and style as required.

Molly Screw Anchors (Molly Corporation):

Use "S" length in walls 1/16" to 5/8" thick. Use "L" length in walls 5/8" to 1 1/4" thick. Use "XL" length in walls 1 1/4" to 1 3/4" thick. Drill holes size of anchor diameter. If wall material tends to crumble, use Molly safety wrench.

Wedge Anchors: All wedge anchors shall be type 316 stainless steel, Hilti KwikBolt II, ITW Ramset/Redhead TruBolt or pre-approved equals.

Chemical Anchors: All chemical type anchors shall be either reinforcing bar or threaded anchors set in drilled holes with chemical anchoring material in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the loads as required. Chemical anchors shall be ITW Ramset/Red Head EPCON C6 with threaded type 316 stainless steel anchor rods or reinforcing steel ; Hilti HIT-HY 150 with HAS-R threaded type 316 stainless steel anchor rods or reinforcing steel; or pre-approved equals.

Anchor Bolts: All conventional anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be ASTM A307, hot dip galvanized unless otherwise noted. If ASTM A325 anchor bolts are noted on the drawings or required by a building manufacturer, furnish hot dip galvanized ASTM A325 anchor bolts and nuts.

Paint:

Metal Primer Paint: Rust Inhibitive Primer, Tnemec Series 37-77 "Chem Prime" or approved equal.

Primer selected must be compatible with finish coats of paint. Coordinate selection of metal primer with finish paint requirements specified in Division 9.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships).

4752.02 4 05500 FABRICATION GENERAL:

Workmanship:

Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work.

Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.

Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

Galvanizing:

Provide a zinc coating for those items shown or specified to be galvanized, as follows:

ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

ASTM A123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and heavier.

ASTM A386 for galvanizing assembled steel products.

Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS:

Ladders - Fabricated:

Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3 and OSHA standards.

Unless otherwise shown, provide ½" x 2½" continuous structural steel flat bar side rails with eased edges, spaced 18" apart.

Provide 1" diameter solid structural steel bar rungs, spaced 12" o.c.

Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 4'-0" o.c. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold

4752.02 5 05500 the ladder clear of the wall surface with a minimum of 7" clearance from wall to centerline of rungs. Extend rails 42" above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access.

Provide non-slip surface on the top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grit.

Nosings:

Provide Safe-T-Metal, Style AX safety nosings with turn down lip for all concrete stair treads. Cast aluminum with abrasive grain embedded in the wearing surface at the time of casting (cross-hatched design), 5/16" thick x 4" wide with ¼" F.H. stainless steel bolts with butterfly anchors and 5/16" countersunk holes 12" o.c. max. & 3" from each end.

Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:

Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.

Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.

Except as otherwise shown, space anchors 24" o.c. and provide minimum anchor units of 1¼" x ¼" x 8" steel straps.

Galvanize all miscellaneous frames and supports.

Rough Hardware:

Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division-6 sections.

Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.

Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates:

Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.

4752.02 6 05500

Galvanize all loose steel lintels.

Miscellaneous Steel Trim:

Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim at exterior and where indicated.

Bumper Posts (Pipe Bollards): Except as otherwise shown on the drawings, provide bumper posts of 6" O. D. standard steel pipe, hot-dip galvanized concrete filled. Final painting of pipe bollards shall be in accordance with Section 09900, safety yellow color unless otherwise noted.

STEEL FRAMED STAIRS:

See Section 05520 for additional requirements for stairs.

Make joints true and tight, and make connections between parts lightproof tight. Provide continuous welds, ground smooth where exposed.

Stair units shall conform to size and arrangements as shown. Construct entire assembly to support a minimum live load of 100 lbs. per square foot. Provide metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other components as required for the support of stairs and platforms. Erect stair work to line, plumb, square, and true with runs registering level with floor and platform levels.

Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, plates or a combination thereof. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers.

Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members.

All steel for stairs and landings shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

STAIR RAILINGS, HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS (Aluminum):

See Section drawings for requirements for handrails and guardrails.

Brackets and Anchors: See plans for typical railing post mounting details.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PREPARATION:

Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

4752.02 7 05500

INSTALLATION:

General:

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required.

Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.

Fit Exposed Connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.

Setting Loose Plates:

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use non-metallic non-shrink grout in all locations, unless otherwise indicated.

Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. Grating:

Secure removable units to supporting members of framework with stainless steel machine screws, or manufacturer's standard stainless steel saddle or clip units.

ADJUST AND CLEAN

Touch-Up Painting: cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 of these specifications.

4752.02 8 05500 For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply 2 coats of galvanizing repair paint.

END OF SECTION 05500

4752.02 9 05500 SECTION 05525 - ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, Including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

Section 05500.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Extent of handrails and railings is indicated on drawings and includes miscellaneous handrails and railings not included in other sections of these specifications.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCES:

Structural Performances: Provide railing and handrail assemblies which, when installed, comply with the following minimum requirements for structural performance, unless otherwise indicated.

Design, fabricate and install guardrails (LEVEL RAIL AND BALCONY RAIL) to withstand the following loads applied separately:

1. A uniformly distributed load of 50 lbs/LF applied horizontally at the required guardrail height and a simultaneous load of 100 lbs/LF applied vertically downward at the top of the guardrail. 2. A concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied horizontally on a one sq. ft. area at any point in the system including intermediate rails, pickets, infill panels or other elements serving this purpose. 3. A concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point an in any direction at top of guardrail.

Design, fabricate and install handrail (STAIR RAIL) to withstand a uniformly distributed load of 50 lbs/LF applied in any direction and a concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point and in any direction, loads shall be applied separately.

Guards: Provide intermediate guards and rail extensions where required by the Standard Building Code and Life Safety Code Chapter 101, and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

STAIR CODE REQUIREMENTS:

Handrails: Stairs and steps shall have handrails at both sides of all stairs and shall be continuous with the inside handrail on new stair switchback - dogleg stairs shall always be continuous. If handrails are not continuous, they shall extend at least 12" beyond the top riser and at least 12"

4752.02 1 05525 plus the width of one tread beyond the bottom riser with the handrail continuing to slope for a distance of the width of one tread and the remainder of the extension shall be horizontal. At the top, the rail extension shall be parallel with the floor or ground surface. The handrail shall have a clear space between the rail and wall of 1 1/2" minimum and the gripping surfaces shall be uninterrupted by newel posts, other construction elements, or obstructions. The top of the handrail gripping surface shall be mounted between 34" and 38" above stair nosing with the ends of handrails returned smoothly to floor, wall or post. Handrails shall not rotate within their fittings and shall be 1 1/2" in outside diameter. All handrails must comply with Federal ADA laws.

Guards: Means of egress such as stairs, steps, landings, balconies, corridors, passageways, floor or roof openings, ramps aisles, porches, or mezzanines that are more than 30" above the floor or grade below shall be provided with guards to prevent falls over the open side and shall be 42" high minimum measured from the floor or the edge of nosings.

Open sided guards and rails: Handrails and guards on open sides shall have intermediate rails or an ornamental pattern such that a sphere 4" in diameter cannot pass through any openings in the handrail except that the triangular opening formed by the tread, riser and bottom element of a guardrail shall be of such size that a 6" sphere in diameter can not pass through. The top rail must be 1 1/2 inch outside diameter. Completed assembly must comply with all Federal ADA laws. Note that certain handrails and guards on this project qualify for exceptions to this rule for Industrial Occupancies.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

Materials to be delivered to the job site in good condition and adequately protected against damage.

Store on site in a location and manner to avoid damage. Stacking should be done in a manner that will prevent bending. Store material in a clean, dry location away from uncured concrete or masonry. Any protection on the railings during transportation should remain until railing is installed.

Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise caution to avoid damage to railing finish.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

Allowable tolerances: 1. Shop assembled mechanical joints shall fit within 1/16”. 2. Sizes of each element of an assembly shall be correct within 1/8”; total size of a freestanding assembly shall be correct within ½”. 3. Install railings and guardrails plumb and aligned within ¼” in 12 feet and parallel with adjacent surfaces to within ¼”.

Applicable standards: 1. Aluminum association (AA), standards as referenced herein.

4752.02 2 05525 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA), standards as referenced herein. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), standards as referenced herein. 4. American Welding Society (AWS) a. AWS D1.2-90, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum b. AWS B2.1-84, Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification.

Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication.

Aluminum railing system shall be as manufactured by Thompson Architectural Railings, Tuttle Manufacturing or pre-approved equal.

SUBMITTALS:

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for products and processes used in handrails and railings, including finishes and grout.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings (Six (6) copies) for fabrication and erection of handrails and railings. Include plans, elevations and details of fittings, connections, and anchorages to other work. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others.

Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements for design loadings, include structural computations, materials properties and other information needed for structural analysis.

Samples: Submit samples for each type of metal finish indicated. Prepare samples on metal of same gauge and alloy to be used in work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, provide "range" samples showing limits of such variations.

Include samples of fittings and brackets if required by Engineer.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Welded Pipe Railings: (1½" O.D.)

Shop Fabrication, Custom Finish.

MATERIALS:

Shapes, configurations and sizes: As shown on the drawings.

Materials: Railings and guardrails shall be fabricated from extruded and plate aluminum.

4752.02 3 05525 Extrusions: 6063 alloy, T5 or T6 temper, meeting ASTM B221-96, channel .0937 minimum wall thickness; all picket .0937 minimum wall thickness.

Posts shall be 6061 T6 alloy, meeting ASTM B221-96; 0.250 minimum wall thickness.

Sheet (5005-H34 alloy) & plate (6061/6063 alloy) meeting ASTM B209-96; minimum 0.050 thickness for sheet; 0.125 thickness for plate.

Finishes: All railing, posts, etc. shall be provided with an anodized finish.

RAILING AND GUARDRAIL FABRICATION:

Fabricate aluminum railings and guardrails in accordance with approved shop drawings, using mitered and welded joints and radius bends and returns as indicated on the drawings.

Shop fabricate to maximum extent possible. Fabricate railings and guardrails up to 20’-0” long lengths. Form bends to uniform radius, free of buckles, twists, cracks, grain separation or distortion of cross section or surface.

Fabricate top rails continuous over posts except as required for expansion control. Fit posts to continuous top rail and intermediate rails to post. (MAX. 4’-0 POST CENTERS BASED ON MOST CRITICAL LOADING CONDITIONS USING A 2” X 2” X ¼” POST). Cap end plates for the top rail shall be constructed of mill finish aluminum plate, welded all around, and ground smooth.

Reinforce joints and splices with tight fitting internal sleeve connectors.

Ends of handrails shall be rounded or returned to floor, wall or post as indicated on drawings. Ends of wall returns shall be closed and ground smooth. All section splices to be “off post”, located approximately 2” from splice post.

Continuously weld components all around in accordance with AWS standards to fuse materials without undercut, overlap or distortion of rail material. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, matching and blending adjacent contours and surfaces without weakening base metal. Remove burrs and roughness from exposed cut edges of fabricated elements. After substantial fabrication, lightly sand top cap with vibrating sander to enhance coating adhesion.

Provide protected pressure relief and weep holes in exterior railings and guardrails.

See Section 05500 for additional information.

Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.

4752.02 4 05525 Fasteners: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive of incompatible with materials joined. Provide hot dipped galvanized fasteners or stainless steel fasteners at exterior or interior damp locations.

Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and for their attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated.

Anchors and Inserts: Provide anchors of proper type, size, and material for type of loading and installation condition shown, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior locations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Finish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PREPARATION:

Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work.

Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

INSTALLATION:

General:

Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plus, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up galvanize finish

4752.02 5 05525 Block outs or Core drill holes for rail posts: Core drill holes clean and straight, to minimum depth and distance from slab edge, as required by engineer’s sealed calculations.

Install in accordance with approved shop drawings. Set work in location, alignment and elevation, plumb and level, true and free of rack; measured from established lines and levels. Set railings and guardrails within specified installation tolerances as specified. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

Setting posts: Clean and moisten concrete block outs, or cored holes. Place, align and brace railing and guardrail systems; shim post at bottom of permanent block out or oversized sleeve. Grout posts solid with a high quality grout such as: Hard-Rok by Adhesive Technologies, Sonopost by Sonocrete or brand approved by Architect/Engineer. Cement flush with holes edge and sloped up 1/8” onto post for drainage.

Wall handrails: Support wall handrails on brackets spaced uniformly not more than 5’-0” o/c and within 1’-0” of rail ends. Install brackets with expansion or adhesive anchors to concrete.

Expansion control: Provide ½” minimum expansion control joints at 30’-0” o/c maximum. Secure internal connectors at expansion joints securely to one side, extending not less at expansion joints securely to one side, extending not less than 2” on each side of joint. Locate within 2” of posts.

Prior to acceptance, examine railings and guardrails for damage. Repair or replace rails damaged by subsequent trades.

END OF SECTION 05520

4752.02 6 05525 Section 061053 - Miscellaneous Carpentry

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Wood-preservative treated wood blocking, and nailers.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 075213 – Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane- Roofing for roof blocking 2. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim for blocking around metal flashings

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4752.02 1 061053 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Treated Wood: Obtain each type of treated wood product through one source from a single producer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2- inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Structural Panels:

1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design./Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." 4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 5. All wood structural panels shall be wood preservative treated wood.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

4752.02 2 061053

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry has been pressure preservative treated or is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

4752.02 3 061053

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.

D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code. 3. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code.

E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.

3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

4752.02 4 061053

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.

END OF SECTION 061053

4752.02 5 061053

Section 075216 - Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene

(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Hybrid roofing system that combines built-up ply sheets with styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)-modified bituminous membrane roofing.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061053 “ Miscellaneous Carpentry " for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and counterflashings. 3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

4752.02 1 075216 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Cants, tapered edge strips, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: The Roofing Contractor shall provide a current letter of Certificate of Certification issued by the Roof System Manufacturer that indicates he has attained the

4752.02 2 075216

highest level of certification as an installer of the roof system specified that is issued by the manufacturer. This letter or certificate shall be presented to the owner within 24 hours after the time of the bid.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect cant strip materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, fasteners, roofing accessories, and other components of roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Type: NDL (no dollar limit)

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

4752.02 3 075216

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: 1. Soprema Inc. B. Other Acceptable Manufactures (provided they meet specification requirements) 1. Johns Manville International, Inc. 2. GAF Materials Corporation.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including fasteners for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Roofing System Design: modified bitumen roofing system mechanically fastened to an existing wood deck. Provide a roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7-10. Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. Design a roofing system to resist the uplift pressures produced to meet the requirements per the International Building Code 2012:

B. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. 2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

C. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

D. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift pressures:

1. Wind Speed Resistance: Provide the corner, perimeter, and field-of roof uplift pressure resistance calculated specifically for this building using 130 mph wind-speed. 2. Building Configuration: Enclosed 3. Exposure: B 4. Occupancy Caterorgy: II

4752.02 4 075216

5. Minimum Recommended Design Wind Resistance Loads as calculated by inputting above information into the NRCA Report of Roof System Design Wind - Load Analysis ASCE 7-10 Roofing System Design. Roofing system shall be tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift pressures: a. Zone 1 (roof area field): 36.5 pounds per square foot b. Zone 2 (roof area perimeter): 61.2 pounds per square foot c. Zone 3 (roof area corners): 92.2 pounds per square foot 6. “a” dimension from edge of roof to establish Zones 1,2 &3 = 3.-0”

E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 INTERPLY (Mechanically Fastened)

A. ASTM D ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows:

1. Basis of Design: a. Soprema, Inc.: Elastophene 180 sanded, 2. Other Acceptable Products: a. Johns Manville: DynaBase b. GAF: Ruberoid Mop Smooth

2.4 SBS-MODIFIED ASPHALT-SHEET MATERIALS (Mopped on materials)

A. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type I, polyester-reinforced, SBS- modified asphalt sheet; gray granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Basis of Design: a. Soprema, Inc.: Sopraline 180 Granules FR 2. Other Acceptable Products: a. Johns Manville: DynaGlas FR b. GAF: Ruberiod 30 FR

2.5 BASE FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. 1. Basis of Design: a. Soprema, Inc.: Sopralene Flam 180

4752.02 5 075216

2. Other Acceptable Products: a. Johns Manville: DynaBase b. GAF: Ruberoid Mop Smooth

B. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified. 1. Basis of Design a. Soprema, Inc.: Sopralene Flam 180 GR 2. Other Acceptable Products: a. Johns Manville: DynaFlex b. GAF: Ruberroid Mop FR

2.6 LIQUID APPLIED WATERPROOF FLASHING SYSTEM

A. PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) technology, liquid applied waterproofing system with layers of non-woven, polyester fabric reinforcement. 1. Basis of Design a. Soprema, Inc.: Alsan RS with primer & Poly Fleece

2. Other Acceptable Products: a. Johns Manville: PermaFlash Bitminous Flashing System with Primer, Scrim and BUR Cement

2.7 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.

C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application.

D. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 6152, SEBS modified.

E. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two- part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with flashing membranes:

F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application.

G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen; nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying.

H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to

4752.02 6 075216

substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

I. Roofing Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and 98 percent of mass retained on No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, color to match roofing.

J. Pipe Supports: adjustable pipe supports designed to support roof-mounted gas pipes, electrical conduit and other mechanical piping. Design to absorb thermal expansion and contraction of pipes thus preventing damage to the roof membrane. Use one of the following depending on application or approved equal:

1. Miro 3-RAH-7 (adjustable height from 3-1/2” to 7”) 2. Miro 2.5-CS-12 (adjustable height from 4-1/4” to 12”) a. Spacing 10’ max b. Base Material: Polycarbonate c. Metal parts: Stainless Steel

K. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide those recommended by roofing system manufacturer.

2.8 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Global-approved roof insulation.

B. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

1. Basis of Design: a. Soprema Inc. Sopra-Iso+ Tapered

2. Other Acceptable Products: a. Johns Manville Tapered Enrgy 3. E b. GAF: EnergyGuard Ultra Taper Polyiso Insulation

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/8 inch per 12 inches.

D. Provide preformed cant strips and other insulation shapes where indicated.

2.9 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with roofing.

A. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. 1. Manufacturer’s Standard

4752.02 7 075216

B. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."

2.10 COVER BOARD

A. Cover Board: Mineral fortified asphaltic core formed between two fiberglass reinforcing plies. Thickness 1/ 4”.

1. Basis of Design: a. Soprema Inc.: Sopraboard

2. Other Acceptable Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Sturdy-Dek b. Blue Ridge Sturdy-Dek

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) out of plane relative to adjoining deck.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Asphalt Heating: Heat asphalt to its equiviscous temperature, measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. Circulate asphalt during heating. Do not raise asphalt temperature above equiviscous temperature range more than one hour before time

4752.02 8 075216

of application. Do not exceed asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature limits during asphalt heating. Do not heat asphalt within 25 deg F (14 deg C) of flash point. Discard asphalt maintained at a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature for more than four hours.

1. Apply hot roofing asphalt within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature.

C. Asphalt Heating: Heat and apply SEBS-modified roofing asphalt according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.

3.4 CANT & TAPERED INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install one lapped base-sheet course and mechanically fasten to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

E. Adhered cant & tapered edge strips Insulation: Install and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.

3.5 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing."

1. Install roofing system according to roof assembly identification matrix and roof assembly layout illustrations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" and to Section requirements.

B. Start installation of roofing in presence of manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Coordinate installation of roofing system and other components of the roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt, with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings, and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.

4752.02 9 075216

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.6 BASE-PLY SHEET INSTALLATION

A. Install glass-fiber base-ply sheets according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions starting at low point of roofing system. Align glass-fiber base-ply sheets without stretching. Extend sheets over and terminate beyond cants.

1. Shingle side laps of glass-fiber base-ply sheets uniformly to ensure that required number of glass-fiber base-ply sheets covers substrate at any point. Shingle in direction to shed water. 2. Embed each glass-fiber base-ply sheet in a continuous void-free mopping of hot roofing asphalt to form a uniform membrane without glass-fiber base-ply sheets touching.

3.7 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install modified bituminous roofing sheet and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:

1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F (218 deg C). 2. Unroll roofing sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer.

B. Laps: Accurately align roofing sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.

1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. 2. Apply roofing granules to cover exuded bead at laps while bead is hot.

C. Install roofing sheets so side and end laps shed water.

3.8 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. 2. Backer-Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or parapets. Adhere backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt or cold-applied adhesive. 3. Flashing-Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F (218 deg C). Apply hot roofing asphalt to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system manufacturer or adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.

4752.02 10 075216

B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing membrane.

C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.

1. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set in asphalt roofing cement.

D. Install roofing cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

B. Roofing system will be considered defective if it does not pass inspections.

1. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

3.11 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Remove ballast, roofing membrane of coal tar roofing system down to existing structural concrete deck. Prime existing concrete deck and provide tapered polyisocyanurate board insulation in full bed of hot asphalt. Provide cover board, interply and granular cap sheet membranes all in a full bed of hot asphalt.

3.12 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS ______of ______, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:

4752.02 11 075216

1. Owner: . 2. Address: . 3. Building Name/Type: . 4. Address: . 5. Area of Work: . 6. Acceptance Date: ______. 7. Warranty Period: . 8. Expiration Date: ______.

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by:

a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 130 mph c. fire; d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner.

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.

4752.02 12 075216

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ______day of ______, ______.

1. Authorized Signature: ______. 2. Name: ______. 3. Title: ______.

END OF SECTION 075216

4752.02 13 075216

Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:

1. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim. 2. Formed equipment support flashing.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 7 Section "Silicone - Polyurethane Insulation Roof System" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing membrane. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim sealants.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1 tested.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

4752.02 1 076200

1. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings tested according to design pressure as determined by formulas in IBC 2012 that account for basic wind speed, exposure factor, building height, building importance factor, and pressure coefficient that combines a gust factor SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

a. Design Pressure (vertical load direction): 1) Zone 2 (roof edge perimeter): 61.2 pounds per square foot. 2) Zone 3 (roof edge corners): 92.2 pounds per square foot. b. Design Pressure (horizontal load direction): 1) Zone 4 (wall edge perimeter): 39.6 pounds per square foot. 2) Zone 5 (wall edge corners): 48.8 pounds per square foot

2. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

B. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. 4. Details of expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

4752.02 2 076200

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 2. Exposed Finishes (Not exposed to view from ground level): Apply the following coil coating:

a. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1) Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified below:

a) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours.

2) Color: To be selected from Manufacturer’s full range of color selections to match existing roofing metal. 3. Non-exposed Finishes (not exposed to view from ground level):

a. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet with no coating

4752.02 3 076200

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.

C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

1. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat- lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

4752.02 4 076200

F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” and FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop): Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Profile: UL-25 "NRCA Roofing Manual." 2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, exposed cover plate. 3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 24 gage. b. Galvanized Steel Cleat: 22 gage.

4. Joint Style: Butt, with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide exposed cover plates.

B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet.

2.6 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Gutter Profile: Per Drawings. 2. Expansion Joints: Butt type with cover plate. 3. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches (380 mm): Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

4. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches (410 to 510 mm): Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.

4752.02 5 076200

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors and Shop fabricate elbows.

1. Fabricated Hanger Style: Per Drawings according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 2. Manufactured Hanger Style: Per Drawings according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 3. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick (22 gage).

2.8 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

4752.02 6 076200

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.

1. Coat side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant.

E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.

H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant- type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

4752.02 7 076200

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated.

1. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm) centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counter flashing: Coordinate installation of counter flashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counter flashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counter flashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counter flashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant.

1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam anchor and washer at 36-inch (900-mm) centers.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:

1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

4752.02 8 076200

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 07620

4752.02 9 076200

Section 079200 - Joint Sealants

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces:

a. Joints between roofing metals b. Joints between roofing metals and roof systems

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

4752.02 1 079200 1. Use ASTM C 1087 manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 3. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 4. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

4752.02 2 079200

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant ES-3:

1. Available Products:

a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 1a. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high- performance coating galvanized steel and wood.

C. Single-Component Self Leveling Polyurethane, S, P, 35, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 35 percent and minus 35 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, polyurethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 35, Uses T and NT.

1. Available Products:

a. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; SL-1. b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex – 1C SL.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

4752.02 3 079200

B. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

4752.02 4 079200

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on pre-construction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

4752.02 5 079200

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION 07920

4752.02 6 079200

Section 084113 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Vent Windows PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Storefront framing for punched openings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls.

4752.02 1 84113 C. Structural Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

D. Structural Loads: 1. Basic Wind Speed and Pressures: per IBC 2012. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 130 mph. b. Risk Category: II c. Exposure Category: B.

3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less. 4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

E. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

F. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.23 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum- framed systems.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

B. Source quality-control reports.

4752.02 2 84113

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

D. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

4752.02 3 84113

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: a. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company, b. Trifab 451 c. Framing Size: 4-1/2” x 2” d. Glazing: Center e. Construction: Shear Block f. Glass infill: sized to accept 1” insulating glazing g. Non-Thermal h. Finish: Clear Anodized 2. Other Acceptable Manufactures: a. Vistawall Architectural Products. b. US Aluminum

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC- SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Non-Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center.

4752.02 4 84113

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from stainless steel.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

4752.02 5 84113

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.8 VENTING WINDOWS

A. Venting Windows: Manufacturer's standard units, complying with AMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, with self-flashing mounting fins, and as follows:

1. Basis of Design: Kawneer GLASSvent insulated glass windows for Storefront Framing (Project-out Window) 2. Window Type: Out swinging Awning As indicated on Drawings. 3. Minimum Performance Class: As required to meet Section 1.4 Performance Requirements 4. Minimum Performance Grade: As required to meet Section 1.4 Performance Requirements 5. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard; of aluminum, stainless steel, die-cast steel, malleable iron, or bronze; including the following:

a. Cam-action handle b. Pole-operated, cam-action locking device on meeting rail, where rail is more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above floor. c. Stainless steel 4 bar hinges.

6. Glazing: Same insulated glass system as adjacent aluminum-framed storefront glazing. 7. Finish: Match adjacent aluminum-framed storefront finish.

4752.02 6 84113

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

4752.02 7 84113

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).

END OF SECTION 084113

4752.02 8 84113

Section 084213 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Field quality-control testing is part of testing and inspecting allowance.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum- framed entrances, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

4752.02 1 084213 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s Standard agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Loads: 1. Basic Wind Speed and Pressures: per IBC 2012. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

4752.02 2 084213

a. Basic Wind Speed: 130 mph. b. Risk Category: II c. Exposure Category: B.

C. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: 1. Cline Doors Series 500SE Aluminum Stile and Rail Door a. Standard flush clear anodized outer panels b. Manufacturer’s standard glass stops for 1” thick insulated tempered glass c. Manufacturer’s standard Louvered panels d. Manufacture shall coordinate and prepare doors to receive hardware specified in 087100 Door hardware prior to shipping.

2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125- inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 5 inches (45 by 127 mm).

4752.02 3 084213

C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

E. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

a. 6063-T5 Aluminum alloy b. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). c. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). d. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. e. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

4752.02 4 084213

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.

D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,

4752.02 5 084213

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

4752.02 6 084213

3.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. Refer to Specification Section 087100 Door Hardware

END OF SECTION 084213

4752.02 7 084213

Section 087100 – Door Hardware

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

4752.02 1 087100 B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.

2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format.

4752.02 2 087100

Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Informational Submittals:

1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.

4752.02 3 087100

2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

4752.02 4 087100

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 4. Five years for motorized electric latch retraction exit devices. 5. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

4752.02 5 087100

C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Stanley Hardware (ST).

2.3 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.

4752.02 6 087100

4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard System. SC9, 6 pin.

C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset.

D. Keying System: Each blank type of lock and cylinder is to be turned over to the Owner. Owner will key and install cylinders. 1. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.

E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2).

F. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.

G. Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series. b. Stanley Best (BE) – 40H Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series.

2.5 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.

4752.02 7 087100

4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

2.6 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS

A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for mortising into door edge.

B. Acceptable manufacturers and products:

1. Rockwood – 555 2. Hager – 282D 3. Ives – FB458 4. Trimco – 3917

2.7 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. 4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – DC6000 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040 Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series. d. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series. e. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 4400 Series.

4752.02 8 087100

2.8 SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSER HOLDERS

A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Certified ANSI A156.15 electromagnetic door holder/releases with a minimum 20 to 40 pounds holding power and single coil construction able to accommodate.12VDC, 24VAC, 24VDC and 120VAC. Coils to be independently wound, employing an integral fuse and armatures to include a positive release button. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. LCN Door Closers (LC) - SEM7800 Series. b. Rixson (RF) - 980/990 Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1560 Series.

2.9 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.10 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

4752.02 9 087100

2.11 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.13 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

4752.02 10 087100

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Aluminum-Framed Entrances: Comply with ANSI/DHI requirements and coordinate with section 0784213 Aluminum-Framed Entrances.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

4752.02 11 087100

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.

B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. YA - Yale 4. RO - Rockwood

Hardware Sets

Set: 1 Door: 200-A Description: Single Entrance Door w/ Closer

3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Entrance Lock AUCN 8807FL LC 626 YA 1 Surface Closer 4420 SNB134-47 (holder/stop arm) 689 YA

4752.02 12 087100

1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO 1 Panic Threshold 2005AT MSES25SS x Opening Width PE 1 Gasketing S88BL (head & jambs) PE 1 Sweep 345ANB x Dr. Width PE

Set: 2 Door: 200-B Description: Pair of doors

2 Continuous Hinge CFM SLF-HD1 SER x Dr. Ht. PE 1 Flush Bolts 555 (On inactive Leaf) 626 RO 1 Entrance Lock AUCN 8807FL LC 626 YA 1 Surface Closer(active leaf) 4420 SNB134-47 (holder/stop arm) 689 YA 1 Gasketing S88BL (head & jambs) PE 1 Astragal 375CR x Dr. Ht. PE 1 Sweep 345ANB x Dr. Width PE

END OF SECTION 087100

4752.02 13 087100

Section 088000 - Glazing

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Glass for doors, interior borrowed lites, glazed curtain walls. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

1. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

4752.02 1 088000 C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

D. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 130 mph. b. Risk Category: IV c. Exposure Category: B.

2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less. 3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

4752.02 2 088000

C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

D. Sample Warranty

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

E. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

4752.02 3 088000

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness: Not less than 6.0 mm.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat- treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. 1. .

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT fully tempered, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

4752.02 4 088000

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene EPDM, silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 890. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995.

4752.02 5 088000

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.8 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

4752.02 6 088000

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 3. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

4752.02 7 088000

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6.35 mm.

4752.02 8 088000

2. Safety glazing required.

3.7 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type IGL-1: Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon: VE 1-2M Insulating. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1” (25.4 mm). 3. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass (tempered when required by code). a. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 1/4 “ 6.35 mm. 4. VE-2M #2 Low E coating on second surface of Outdoor Lite 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass (tempered when required by code). a. Minimum Thickness of Indoor lite: 1/4 “ 6.35 mm. 7. Low-E Coating: on second surface. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .25 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .21 maximum. 10. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .37 maximum. 12. Safety glazing required.

END OF SECTION 088000

4752.02 9 088000

SECTION 09900 – PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions, apply to the work specified in this section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Extent of painting work is as specified herein.

The work includes painting and finishing of items and surfaces throughout project as shown on the plans and described herein, except as otherwise indicated. Stainless steel and galvanized metals shall not be painted.

The work includes painting of the interior and exterior of the existing primary digester dome roof, interior and exterior of the proposed secondary floating roof, interior walls and ceilings of the building between the digesters, exposed bare and covered pipes, sludge pump, hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and all previously painted components which are installed as part of the boiler replacement project. Note boiler and Heat exchanger shall be factory finished by the manufacturer.

"Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials including primers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

Paint exposed surfaces colors to be selected by Engineer, except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Engineer will select these from standard colors available for materials systems specified.

Following categories of work are not included as part of field applied finish work.

Shop Priming: Ductile Iron Piping, Steel Piping, fittings and valves.

Pipe Color Code: Paint all new exposed piping in accordance with a color code to be supplied by the Engineer. Pipe to be painted is specified to be furnished without external coating.

Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.

Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, and motor shafts will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.

4752.02 1 09900

Do not paint over any code required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

All work shall be subject to inspection by a qualified inspector. Materials, workmanship and other items will not be accepted until in complete conformance with these Specifications.

The Painting Contractor shall have a minimum of three years successful experience in the preparation for and application of coatings as specified herein. Certification of compliance with this requirement along with a list of references and completed jobs to substantiate such compliance shall be submitted in writing to the Engineers prior to commencement of any work on the project. The painting contractor shall furnish written documentation from the paint manufacturer that he is an approved applicator of the paint manufacturer's products.

Surface Preparation will be inspected using SSPC Vis 1 as a supplement to the surface preparation specifications. All surface preparation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative prior to application of coatings. Contractor must request inspection and acceptance of each coat prior to proceeding with subsequent coats.

Thickness shall be measured in accordance with SSPC-PA2 with a magnetic gauge that will measure the dry film thickness within an accuracy of + 0.25 mil. A minimum of one measurement per each 100 square feet of surface painted will be required. Contractor shall be responsible for providing access for the Engineer's inspector to check thickness.

Inspection devices shall be furnished by the Contractor for use by his personnel and by the Engineer for the duration of the project. Contractor shall be responsible for providing such devices in good working condition with proper calibration. Contractor shall furnish U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates to test the accuracy of the dry film thickness gauge and certified instrumentation to test the working condition of the holiday testing devices.

The painting contractor shall regularly check his work with the aforementioned inspection devices to ensure compliance with these specifications. The Engineer or his representative may, at his discretion, use devices provided by the Contractor, use his own devices, or use contract inspection to perform any tests necessary to confirm compliance with these specifications.

Warranty Inspection shall be conducted during the eleventh month following recorded acceptance of the painting work. The Contractor will be given a minimum of 10 days notice of the date set for such an inspection. Any location where coats of paint have peeled off, bubbled, or cracked and any location where rusting is evident shall be considered a failure of the paint system. The Contractor shall make repairs at all points where failures are observed by removing the deteriorated coating, cleaning the surface, and recoating with the same paint system (and surface preparation) as required in these specifications. If the area of failures exceeds 25% of the area of the surface, then the entire paint system shall be removed, and repainted, including surface preparation. For the purposes of determining the need for complete repainting, the interior and exterior of each tank or vessel will be considered separately.

4752.02 2 09900

The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Owner an inspection report covering the Warranty Inspection, setting forth the number and type of failures observed, the percentage of the surface area where the failure has occurred, and the names of the persons conducting the inspection. Color photographs (35mm) documenting each type of failure shall be included in the report.

SUBMITTALS:

Product Data: Submit six (6) copies of manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use.

Paint Color Selection Chart: Submit six (6) copies of manufacturer's color selection chart indicating available colors for each of the coating systems.

Samples: Submit samples for Engineer's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.

DELIVERY AND STORAGE:

Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information:

Name or title of material. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Manufacturer's name. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number.

JOB CONDITIONS:

Apply solvent thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 o F. (7 o C) and 95 o F. (35 o C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; or when surface temperature is less than 5 o F above the dew point unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.06% lead, as lead metal based on the total nonvolatile (dry-film) of paint by weight.

4752.02 3 09900

MATERIALS

All materials to be supplied by the painting contractor shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Requests to use coatings other than those listed herein shall be made in writing to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to the date set for receipt of bids. All additional products approved as suitable for the project, if any, will be documented in an addendum to the Contract Documents and Specifications.

Paint and coating materials shall be delivered to the job in original sealed containers marked with the name of the manufacturer and the specifications number of paint contained therein. They shall not be used until the Engineer has inspected them and obtained data from the label on the container. Materials exceeding the manufacturer's recommended storage life shall be rejected and removed from the project premises.

All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single place approved by the Owner, protected from weather and excessive cold or heat. Such storage shall be kept neat and orderly and all damage to surroundings shall be made good. Storage must comply with Federal, State, and Local regulations regarding storage of the particular types of materials required for this job. Any oily rags, waste, etc., must be removed from the site every night, and every precaution shall be taken to avoid the danger of fire.

Successive coats of the same kind of paint shall be of differing color to help indicate proper coverage.

All coats in a system shall be from the same manufacturer and shall be demonstrated and guaranteed to be compatible with each other. The manufacturer's instructions for preparation, applications, drying, etc., shall be followed specifically.

Protective coatings for interior wet applications shall be certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF Std. 61, Section 5 Protective (Barrier) Materials. All NSF certified coatings, including pit filler and/or seam sealers, shall be from the same manufacturer.

All coating utilized shall be certified “non-lead” (less than 0.06% lead by weight in the dried film) as defined in part 1303 of the consumer Product Safety Act.

The coating manufacturer shall certify that the zinc dust used in the zinc coatings meets the requirement of ASTM D 520 Type III.

MATERIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Polyamide Epoxy a. Salt Fog-ASTM B 117- No delamination, no blisters, no rusting or delamination and no more than 1/8” creepage at the scribe after 8,000 hours of exposure b. Humidity-ASTM D 4585 - No delamination, no blisters, no rusting or cracking after 4500 hours of exposure c. Prohesion ASTM G 85 – No blistering, cracking or delamination of film and no more than 1/8’’ creepage at the scribe after 5,000 hours

4752.02 4 09900

Zinc Rich Primer a. Salt Fog-ASTM B 117- No delamination, no blisters, no rusting or delamination and no more than 1/16” creepage at the scribe after 20,000 hours of exposure b. Humidity-ASTM D 4585 - No delamination, no blisters, no rusting or cracking after 15,000 hours of exposure c. Prohesion ASTM G 85 – No blistering, cracking or delamination of film and no more than 1/32’’ creepage at the scribe after 9,000 hours

Acrylic Polyurethane (Gloss Finish) a. Test Method: ASTM D 4141 EMMAQUA Requirements: No blistering, cracking or chalking. No less than 60% gloss retention after 1000 MJ/m2 EMMAQUA exposure b. Test Method: ASTM D 4587 QUV Exposure (UVA 340 bulbs, Cycle 4: 8 hours UV/4 hours condensation): Requirement: No blistering, cracking, or chalking. No less than 60% gloss retention after 7,000 hours exposure

100% Solids Epoxy Liner a. ASTM G 210 (S.W.A.T.) The lining materials must exhibit the following when tested using Electrical Impedance Spectroscopy (EIS): 1) Minimum Final EIS impedance of 8.0 Log Z (Z in ohms cm 2 @ 0.1 Hz) 2) No less than 90% retention in ohms cm 2 @ 0.1 Hz impedance after 28 days exposure 3) No blistering cracking, checking, or loss of adhesion after 28 days exposure to the H 2S autoclave. b. Chemical Resistance (ASTM C 868): No blistering, cracking, erosion, softening, swelling, loss of adhesion or gloss after 98 day continuous immersion at 100F and 25% Sulfuric Acid

Thermal Insulating Coating a. Salt Fog-ASTM B 117- No delamination, no blisters, no rusting or delamination at the scribe after 5,000 hours of exposure b. Thermal Conductivity – ASTM C 518: No greater than 40 mW/mK c. Immersion ASTM D 870 – Mo blistering , cracking, rusting or delamination after 2000 hours exposure in DI water at 140F

4752.02 5 09900

PAINTING SCHEDULE:

Provide the following surface preparation and coating systems for the various substrates, as indicated, or equivalent systems by Dupont.

New Exposed Non-submerged Ductile Iron Piping (above ground, including valves, valve stands, etc furnished shop-primed.)

Surface Preparation: Uniformly abrasive blast the entire exterior surface using angular abrasive to an NAPF 500-03-04: “External Pipe Surface Condition”. When viewed without magnification, the exterior surfaces shall be free of all visible dirt, dust, loose annealing oxide, loose mold coating, rust and other foreign matter. Any area where rust reappears before application shall be re-blasted. The surface shall contain a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils. (Reference NACE RP0287 or ASTM D 4417, Method C.

Coating: 1st coat - Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 5 to 6 mils dry film thickness (Red) 2nd coat - Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 5 to 6 mils dry film thickness *3rd coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura Shield II 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness

* Third coat required for exterior applications only MIN. 10 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (interior) MIN. 13 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (exterior)

New and Existing Exposed Non-submerged Steel/Ductile Iron Piping (above ground, including valves, valve stands, etc.)

Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

Coating: 1st coat - Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness (Red) 2nd coat - Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 5 to 6 mils dry film thickness *3rd coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura Shield II 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness

* Third coat required for exterior applications only

MIN. 8 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (interior) MIN. 10 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (exterior)

4752.02 6 09900

Motors, Pumps, and other factory finished items:

Surface Preparation: Thoroughly clean factory finish. Verify compatibility of finish coats with factory finish.

Coating: 1st coat - Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness 2nd coat - Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 4 to 6 mils dry film thickness

MIN. 8 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (In addition to factory finish)

Digester Internal Equipment and Piping (including draft tube, mixer, propeller, new and existing piping, etc.)

Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast all surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP10 White Metal Blast with a minimum 3.0 mil angular surface profile.

Coating: 1st Coat - Tnemec Series 104 HS Epoxy 8-10 dry mils 2nd Coat - Tnemec Series 104 HS Epoxy (Interior) 8-10 dry mils 2nd Coat - Tnemec Series 1074U Endura-Shield (Exterior) 2.5-3.0 dry mils

MIN. 16 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (Interior) MIN. 10 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (Interior)

Primary Fixed and Secondary Floating Digester Ceiling (interior):

Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast all surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blast with a minimum 3.0 mil angular surface profile.

Coating: 1st Coat - Tnemec Series 435 Permashield 12-15 dry mils Stripe Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Permashield (Secondary Floating Cover only) 2nd Coat - Tnemec Series 435 Permashield 12-15 dry mils

MIN. 26 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS

4752.02 7 09900

Secondary Digester Floating Roof (exterior)

Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast all surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP10 Near White Metal Blast.

Coating: 1st Coat - Tnemec Series 90G-1K97 Tneme-Zinc 2.5-3.5 dry mils Stripe Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline 2nd Coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline 4.0-6.0 dry mils 3rd Coat - Tnemec Series 1074U Endura-Shield 2.5-3.0 dry mils

MIN. 10 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS

Primary Digester Roof Exterior With Insulation System

Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast all surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP10 Near White Metal Blast.

Coating: 1st Coat - Tnemec Series 90G-1K97 Tneme-Zinc 2.5-3.5 dry mils 2nd Coat - Tnemec Series 971 Aerolon 45-50 mils

3rd Coat - Tnemec Series 1074U Endura-shield 60-80 Sq Ft/Gal (color to be black, same as 2 nd Coat)

Walking Area - Tnemec Series 1074U Endura-shield 60-80 Sq Ft/Gal (note different color for designated walk area)

MIN. 48 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (excluding third coat)

Existing Exposed Steel: Existing exposed steel framing, doors, frames, etc.

Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP2 Hand tool Cleaning.

Coating: 1st Coat - TNEMEC 135 Chembuild 4 to 6 Mils Dry Film Thickness 2nd Coat TNEMEC Series 66 Hi- Build Epoxline 4 to 6 Mils Dry Film Thickness

Min. 8 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (In addition to existing coating)

NOTE: For UV exposed areas, replace the Series 66 topcoat with Series 1074U at 2.5 to 3.0 dry mils 4752.02 8 09900

Masonry and Concrete Walls and Ceilings: Interior

Surface Preparation: Thoroughly solvent clean to remove grease, oil and other surface contaminants. Uniformly brush blast to remove all loose and deleterious material. All new grout and concrete shall have a minimum of 28 days cure time. Scrape or grind all fins and protrusions flush with surface. Patch holes and cracks flush with surface. Remove surface laitance and efflorescence by acid etching, whip sandblasting or high pressure water blasting.

Coating: 1st Coat - Tnemec Series 157 Enviro-crete 6 to 8 mils dry film thickness 2nd Coat - Tnemec Series 157 Enviro-crete 6 to 8 mils dry film thickness

MIN. 12 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSPECTION:

Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

All surface preparation shall be approved by the Engineer before primer is applied. Contractor shall request acceptance of each coat prior to applying next coat. After deficient work has been corrected, Contractor is to request re-inspection prior to applying next coat.

SURFACE PREPARATION:

Surfaces shall be cleaned, prepared and painted as follows:

Remove rust, scale, etc., from all surfaces by Near White Blast Cleaning, (SSPC-SP10) or Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6) in accordance with the painting schedule. Blast cleaning shall be by dry method unless otherwise directed. Sand used shall be composed of silica grains. Sandblasting shall be preceded by chemical cleaning to remove grease, oil, salt, chemicals, dust, etc., and shall be followed by removing all sand, dust or grit with compressed air, by vacuum cleaning or brush. Equipment used shall have ample capacity for effective operation of the blast. Air shall be free of moisture or oil. All blasted surfaces shall be cleaned and primed the same day. Surfaces shall be re- cleaned if any rust forms or if the surface becomes contaminated prior to priming.

The blasting operations shall be contained to prevent any blast residue and debris from leaving the confines of the tank and entering the adjacent treatment units. Debris from

4752.02 9 09900

the blasting operations shall be prevented from entering all influent and effluent piping of the unit.

Touch up shop applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch up with same type shop primer.

MATERIALS PREPARATION:

Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

APPLICATION:

General:

Coating application shall conform to requirements of SSPC-PA1, "Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting", and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. Thinning shall be permitted only as recommended by the coating manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.

All painting shall be performed in a workmanlike manner, by experienced workmen, and in the manner recommended by the manufacturer of such materials. All materials shall be evenly spread and smoothly flowed on without runs or sags. Sufficient time shall be allowed for each coat of paint to dry thoroughly before the following coat is applied.

Paint shall be applied only when the air temperature is at or above 50°F with a rising temperature, or 60°F with a falling temperature. No paint shall be applied upon damp surfaces, or when the relative humidity exceeds eighty-five percent (85%), or when the surface temperature is not at least 5°F above the dew point. Dew point shall be measured by use of a sling psychrometer or similar device in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables.

All painting equipment must be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the coating being applied. Equipment shall be maintained in first class operating condition. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove oil and water from the air.

A test patch is required when overcoating existing surfaces to verify adhesion and compatibility of the new coatings with the existing.

WARRANTY:

The Contractor shall guarantee, in writing, the work that is performed under this Contract.

4752.02 10 09900

The paint supplier shall guarantee, in writing, the materials used in the work that is performed under this Contract.

All painting and coating materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from date of final acceptance of the project. The Contractor shall be responsible to make required corrections or adjustments at no cost to the Owner during the guarantee period.

END OF SECTION 09900

4752.02 11 09900

SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Extent of louvers and vents is indicated on drawings, including indications of sizes and locations.

Types of louvers and vents include the following:

Extruded aluminum louvers

Sealants including installation are specified in Division 7.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

Performance Requirements: Where louvers are indicated to comply with specific performance requirements, provide units whose performance ratings have been determined in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500.

AMCA Certification: Where indicated, provide louvers with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal evidencing that product complies with above requirement.

Comply with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” recommendations for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated.

Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to fabrication, wherever possible.

Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field assembly of units. Pre-assemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

SUBMITTALS:

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications; certified test data, where applicable; and installation instructions for required products, including finishes.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other information to determine compliance with specified requirements.

Samples: Submit 6" square samples of each required finish. Prepare samples on metal of same gage and

4752.02 1 10200 alloy to be used in work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include 2 or more units in each sample showing limits of such variations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

Airline Products Co. The Airolite Co. American Warming and Ventilating Co. Construction Specialties, Inc. Industrial Louvers, Inc. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

MATERIALS:

Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A526 and A527, with ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

Cold-rolled Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, Class 1, matte finish.

Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167 and AISI Type 302/304, with No. 4 finish.

Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to provide required finish.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T52.

Fastenings: Use same material as items fastened, unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners for exterior applications may be hot-dip galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum. Provide types, gages and lengths to suite unit installation conditions. Use Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic).

FABRICATION, GENERAL:

Provide louvers and accessories of design, materials, sizes, depth, arrangement, and metal thicknesses indicated, or if not indicated, as required for optimum performance with respect to airflow; water penetration; air leakage, where applicable (for adjustable units, if any); strength; durability; and uniform appearance.

Fabricate frames including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with tolerances for installation,

4752.02 2 10200 including application of sealants in joints between louvers and adjoining work.

Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not further apart than recommended by manufacturer or 72" o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver units provide horizontal mullions except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.

Provide full pan style sill extensions made of same material as louvers, where indicated, or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior.

Join frame members to one another and to stationary louver blades by welding, except where indicated otherwise or where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers. Maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

STATIONARY EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS:

Horizontal Drainable Blade Louvers: Units designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades, and channels in jambs and mullions. Furnish units with extrusions not less than 0.081" thick, of depth, and sizes indicated, complying with following performance requirements.

Free Area: Not less than 50% for a 48" x 48" size.

Static Pressure Loss: Not more than 0.15" of water gage at an airflow of 1050 fpm free area velocity in intake direction.

Water Penetration: Not more than 0.05 oz. Per sq/ ft. of free area at an airflow of 1000 fpm free area velocity.

AMCA Certification: Furnish units bearing AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

LOUVER SCREENS:

Provide removable screens for exterior louvers where indicated.

Fabricate screen frames of same metal and finish as louver units to which secured, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide re-wireable frames consisting of formed or extruded metal with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh.

Provide frames consisting of U-shaped metal for permanently securing screen mesh.

Use bird screens where indicated, of the following:

½" sq. mesh, 0.063" aluminum wire.

4752.02 3 10200 Locate screens on inside face of louvers, unless otherwise indicated. Secure screens to louver frames with machine screws, spaced at each corner and at 12" o.c. between.

METAL FINISHES:

General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are assembled. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces with protective covering, prior to shipment. Remove scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces that will be visible after completing finishing process.

Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.

Aluminum Finishes:

Color Anodized Finish: AA-C22A42 (medium matte etched finish with 0.7 mil min. thick integrally colored anodic coating).

Apply protective coating of clear acrylic lacquer, not less than 0.05 mils dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PREPARATION:

Coordinate setting drawing, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages that are to embedded in concrete of masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

INSTALLATION:

Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work.

Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units, at Contractor’s option.

Protect metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals.

4752.02 4 10200 Provide concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulations, and install as work progresses to make installations weathertight.

Refer to Division-7 Sections for sealants in connection with installations of louvers.

END OF SECTION 10200

4752.02 5 10200

SECTION 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers that are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for all fire extinguishers required. For fire extinguisher cabinets include roughing-in dimensions, and details showing mounting methods, relationships to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction, style and materials. Where color selections by Architect/Engineer are required include color charts showing full range of manufacturer's standard colors and designs available.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to: J. L. Industries; Larsen's Mfg. Co.; Muckle Manufacturing, Division of Technico, Inc.; Profile International, Inc.

Fire Extinguishers:

General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's standards that comply with requirements of governing authorities. Abbreviations indicated below to identify extinguisher types relate to UL classification and rating system and not, necessarily, to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher.

Furnish and mount fire extinguishers at locations shown on the plans. All fire extinguishers shall be Type CO2 except that in the Control Building (excluding Electrical Room) extinguishers shall be Dry Chemical, Type ABC. Fire extinguishers shall be as manufactured by J.L. Industries, Larsen, or approved equal.

Type CO2 Standard: Sentinel 10 as manufactured by J.L. Industries. Furnish all mounting equipment and hardware as required for each installation.

Install in locations shown and at mounting height to comply with local governing authorities' requirements. Submit product data for review to show compliance with requirements stated herein.

Fire extinguishers shall be located as shown on the drawings.

Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10 lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B, and Class C fires.

Kitchen Extinguishers: Provide portable 10 lb. nominal capacity fire extinguisher installed in kitchen areas in accordance with NFPA 10, Table 3-3.1 for extra high hazard. Only sodium bicarbonate or potassium bicarbonate dry chemical type extinguishers are acceptable in these locations.

Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgement 4752.02 1 10520

of extinguisher, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in manufacturer's standard plated finish.

Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:

General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities indicated.

Construction (Non-Fire Walls): Manufacturer’s standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

Construction (Firewall Type): Provide manufacturer’s fire-rated cabinet certified and listed by WarnockHersey, Underwriters Laboratories or other recognized certified testing laboratory acceptable to the State Fire Marshall Office for one and two-hour combustible or non-combustible wall systems to meet the requirements of UBC Standard 43-6 (ASTM E-814). All fire-rated cabinets to have trims with reinforced corners and double walls of 18-gauge steel with fire resistant core and be supplied with anchoring devices from the manufacturer.

Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the following types:

Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.

Semi-Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) partially recessed in walls of shallow depth. PARTITION TYPE PR 4.

Provide recessed type with flat trim where walls will accept full depth; semi-recessed with return trim elsewhere.

Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth.

Exposed Trim: One-piece combination aluminum trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backend).

Flat Trim: Square edges with backbend of 1/4" to 5/16".

Rolled-Edge Trim: Rounded edges with backbend depth of 1 1/4" and 2 1/2" (minimum required for each wall).

Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer’s standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

(Either) Unbacked Acrylic: Manufacturer’s standard unbacked acrylic door construction with metal edge reinforcing at hinge jamb and at latch.

(Or) Aluminum Backed Acrylic: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum-backed obscure-textured acrylic with silkscreen lettering or design applied to back of acrylic face. 4752.02 2 10520

Door Style: Manufacturer’s standard design full-acrylic panel, frameless, 1/4" thick opaque or obscure acrylic.

Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s door operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180°.

Factory Finishing of Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:

General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and application recommendations except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to shipment.

Preparation, Painted Finishes: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and loose rust or mill scale. Apply finish to all surfaces of fabricated and assembled units, whether exposed or concealed when installed, except those surfaces specified to receive another finish.

Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply manufacturer’s standard baked enamel coating, white color.

Clear Aluminum Anodized Finish: AA-M10C22A21 (unspecified mill finish, medium matte etched finish with clear anodic coating).

Obscure Acrylic Colors: Provide color or combination of colors selected from manufacturer’s standard colors, including black.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

Notice: All cabinets located in fire rated wall assemblies shall be fire rated and certified for the wall assembly. Do not use standard single wall cabinets in fire rated walls.

Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer’s instructions. Where exact location of bracket-mounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect/Engineer.

Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling “ FIRE EXTINGUISHER” painted on door by silkscreen process. Provide lettering on door as selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer’s standard letter sizes, style, colors, and layouts. 4752.02 3 10520

Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with red letter decals spelling “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” applied to wall surface. Letter size, style and locations as selected by Architect/Engineer.

END OF SECTION 10520

4752.02 4 10520 SECTION 11300 – SLUDGE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

The Contractor, under this item, shall furnish and install a sludge pump as detailed on the plans and specified herein.

FIRE PROTECTION IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT AND COLLECTION FACILITIES:

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Extent of the sludge pump work includes the furnishing and installing of pumps as follows:

1 – 150 gpm pump with variable frequency drive controls

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

Pumps and motors are to be engineered, manufactured and assembled in the United States under a written Quality Assurance program. This written Quality Assurance program shall have been in effect for at least five (5) years, and shall include a written record of periodic internal and external audits to confirm compliance with UL Quality Assurance specifications.

All pumping equipment furnished under this Section shall be of a design and manufacture that has been used in similar applications, and it shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner that the quality is equal to equipment made by that manufacturer specifically named herein.

To insure a consistent high standard of quality, the manufacturer of this pumping equipment shall comply with the requirements of the ISO 9001 Quality System, and such compliance shall be verified by an independent certification agency approved by the International Organization for Standardization. Documentation shall be submitted for approval showing compliance with this requirement, and the equipment will not be released for shipment until approved.

Pump, complete with motor, V-belt drive or coupling, baseplate, necessary guards, and all other specified accessories and appurtenances shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer to insure compatibility and integrity of the individual components, and provide the specified warranty for all components. The pump manufacturer accepts unit responsibility for each pump assembly.

4752.02 1 11300

The vortex-type pumps specified in this section shall be furnished by and be the product of one manufacturer.

SUBMITTALS:

Refer to Section 01340 for submittal requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Equipment shall include: One Sludge Pump Piping Pipe Fittings Supports Gauges Valves

CONDITIONS OF OPERATION

The pumps shall provide the following hydraulic conditions:

Design Condition Capacity 150 GPM Total Dynamic Head 10 ft. TDH Maximum Speed 1,170 RPM Minimum Motor Size 3.0 Hp Efficiency (min. hydraulic) 45 % Minimum Spherical Solid Size 3 Inches

GENERAL:

Since the pumps will be used to pump abrasive grit and other solids, the pumps shall be specifically designed to both optimize wear resistance and maintain hydraulic performance as wear occurs.

The pump(s) shall be of a fully recessed, Slurry-type design, with the impeller mounted completely out of the flow path between the pump inlet and discharge connection, so that solids are not required to flow through the impeller. All flow path clearances within the pump(s) shall be equal to or greater than the discharge diameter, so that all solids which will pass through the discharge will pass through the pump.

TRIMMED IMPELLER

The trimmed impeller shall be constructed of 650 Brinell Hi Chrome and specifically designed to maintain hydraulic pumping performance as wear occurs.

4752.02 2 11300 a) The impeller shall be specifically designed to pump grit slurries and shall have no less than 10 vanes, each a minimum of 5/16ths inch of the specified material.

b) Pump-out vanes on the rear shroud of the impeller are not acceptable.

The single piece casing thickness shall be a minimum of ¾ inch with normal casing tolerances of the specified material.

A removable wearplate of Ni-Hard shall be provided in back of the impeller, designed to direct flow from behind the impeller to the center of the volute for maximum protection to the casing. The packing housing shall be a separate piece bolted to the bearing housing for ease of removal.

Pump(s) shall be equipped with slotted raised-face flanges to receive 125 lb. standard bolting. Special case slots shall be cast in to retain bolts and to fasten the case to the bearing housing and to the intake for easy case removal.

MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

The volute shall be manufactured of Cast Iron material, ASTM A48 Class 25 or 30. The impeller shall be manufactured of Hi-chrome material, ASTM A 532-CL.III Type A1. The impeller backplate shall be manufactured of Hi-chrome material, ASTM A 532-CL.III Type A1.

Bearing Housing

The bearing housing shall be of cast iron, ASTM A48CL-25. The shaft shall be of ASTM A108, Grade 1141 (or equal) steel, and shall be protected throughout the packing area by a removable, hardened, stainless steel shaft sleeve conforming to ASTM A 582 Type 416.

Bearings shall be grease lubricated and shall be contained in dust and moisture proof housings.

MECHANICAL SEAL

A single cartridge mechanical seal requiring no external flushing shall be furnished in the pump. The seal shall utilize a rotational sealing ring mounted in an elastomer cup with an o-ring mounted stationary ring loaded by a non-fouling, conical spring encapsulated in Viton. Installation of the seal shall require no measurements or scribe marks on the shaft.

The rotational sealing ring shall be made of tungsten carbide Grade VC 805, the surface of which shall be lapped to a flatness not to exceed three helium light bands. The sealing ring shall be bonded inside a Viton rubber cup, which shall have three (3) integrally molded anti-rotational lugs to prevent the rotary seal face from turning within the rotary body. Additionally, the rotary body shall have three (3) 1/8" solid stainless steel pins to also prevent the rotary seal face from turning within the rotary body.

The stationary sealing ring shall be constructed of d alpha-sintered type silicon carbide. The surface

4752.02 3 11300 shall be lapped to a flatness not to exceed three helium light bands. The stationary ring shall have a slot milled on the side opposite of the mating side, which engages an anti-rotation pin. Stationary sealing rings of converted carbon or other surface-only treatments are not acceptable.

The spring that loads the rotational sealing ring shall be cone-type, non-fouling design and shall run in the pumped product without fouling or hang-up. The spring metal material shall be SAE1095 Carbon Steel, ASTM A-682 heat-treated to a Rockwell C hardness of 45 to 50 and be totally encapsulated in Viton for protection from the pumped fluid. The product side of the spring shall have a minimum 1/4" thick Viton rubber covering for corrosion/abrasion protection. Seals which use single coil, multiple coil, bellows and rubber-in-shear designs are not acceptable.

To minimize the number of points where the slurry must be sealed, the mechanical seal assembly shall have no more than three (3) o-rings: one (1) shaft sleeve o-ring, one (1) stationary face o-ring, and one (1) retainer o-ring. O-rings are to be made of Viton. Seals using more than three (3) o- rings are not acceptable.

All metal components not encapsulated in Viton shall be constructed of abrasion-resistant CD4MCu ASTM A-743. Surface finish shall be a maximum of 64 RMS.

The seal shall be capable of running with up to ± 0.025" radial shaft deflection and ± 0.040" axial shaft deflection without leakage, damage, or loss of performance.

A seal chamber of Hi-chrome iron, ASTM A-532, minimum 600 Brinell, shall be provided to mount the seal and to provide a reservoir of adequate volume for the pumped product to contact and to lubricate the seal faces. The seal shall be installed into the seal chamber from the impeller side of the pump so that only the casing/suction piece and impeller need to be removed to gain complete access to the seal for inspection and/or maintenance.

MOUNTING

Belt Drive: The pump manufacturer shall provide a common pump and motor base, constructed of a minimum 3/8 inch thick fabricated steel, suitably reinforced to support the full weight of the pump, motor, belt drive and guards.

The pump manufacturer shall furnish and install a separate, adjustable motor base with handwheel adjustment so that the motor can be easily moved for V-belt tensioning and adjustment, TB Woods type MC 3B, modified with a welded steel gusset, or equal.

The pump manufacturer shall supply and install belts and sheaves to drive the pump at the speed necessary to meet the rated conditions.

The drive shall be of the stationary control variable speed TB Woods type ‘SVS’ or equal, which allows a speed change by means of an adjustment to the motor sheave when the drive is not in operation. Additionally, the motor will be driven by a variable frequency drive to allow for speed adjustments during operation.

4752.02 4 11300

An approved fiberglass or thermoplastic belt guard shall be provided to safely enclose the belt drive. If metal guards are furnished, they shall be of all 316 stainless steel construction with suitable lifting eyes and handles to aid in removal.

MOTOR

Motor shall be inverter duty, TEFC type, 3 HP, 3 Phase, 60 Cycle, 230/460 Volt, 1170 RPM, and shall be connected to the pump by the drive method specified. All motors shall be of nationally known manufacture and shall conform to NEMA standards and specifications and shall be suitable for operation with a variable frequency drive.

All pump motors shall be non-over loading over the full range of the pump curve .

MANUFACTURERS:

Sludge pump shall be Model # CE4 as manufactured by, Wemco, or prior approved equal will be acceptable subject to their ability to comply with the physical arrangements shown on the plans and compliance with these specifications. ALL manufacturers shall thoroughly review the plans and specifications to ensure compliance with these documents and compatibility with the physical arrangements shown. Any exceptions or modifications that may be required shall be brought to the attention of the Engineering in writing at least 7 days prior to the advertised bid date.

ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL

Refer to Division 16000 – “Electrical” for additional information on motors, starters, electrical, and other control requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

PIPE SUPPORTS:

Adjustable pipe supports shall be as shown on the drawings. Provide new concrete pedestals for new pumps and piping where shown on the drawings.

PIPING:

See applicable provisions of Division 2.

PIPE FITTINGS:

4752.02 5 11300 See applicable provisions of Division 2.

VALVES:

See applicable provisions of Division 2.

PAINTING: Refer to SECTION 09900-Painting

PRESSURE GAUGES:

The Contractor shall furnish and install where indicated on the plans, 4-1/2" diameter pressure gauges with 1/2" inch male connections and 1/2" inch globe or needle shut off valves. Pressure gauges shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft (Maxisafe) or Ametek (U.S. Gauge) or approved equal. Pressure range of each gauge shall be as indicated on the plans. Each gauge shall be equipped with a snubber and diaphragm seals. Gauges shall be oil filled. All components of gauges, snubbers, etc. shall be of corrosion resistant material (i.e. stainless steel or other acceptable nonferrous material).

SERVICE:

The manufacturer of the pumps utilized on this project shall furnish a trained representative for a period of two days to check alignment of the pumps, place them in operation and train owner's representative in their operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

All equipment to be furnished herein shall be installed in accordance with the plans and in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION DETAILS: All miscellaneous piping and materials required for a complete installed system shall be furnished, including the following:

A. Small piping, fittings, etc., which are shown diagrammatically on the plans shall be furnished and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, even though the detailed routing of such lines may not be shown by the plans. The Contractor shall exercise good judgment and work with the Engineer and Owner in the location and routing of these lines.

B. The Contractor shall furnish all the necessary packing for stuffing boxes, seals, valve stems, glands, etc., for the equipment to be supplied by him. The Contractor shall test and correct any leaky packing during the execution of the work.

C. The Contractor shall install all traps in accessible locations below the apparatus to be drained. Traps shall be installed on supports above the floor level, if possible.

D. All openings for vents, drains, instruments and other similar connections made after the piping system is erected shall be drilled; no burning will be permitted.

4752.02 6 11300 E. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor and materials to calibrate all local mounted pressure gauges and float switches installed under this Contract.

F. The plans may show dimensions for valves, fittings and pipe lines. If the valves, fittings, etc., actually furnished differ in dimensions from those shown, the lengths of pipe, filler pieces, etc., shall be altered by the Contractor to compensate for these changes.

G. After erection of piping and after the pipe has been in normal service at least ten (10) days, all flanges shall be retightened.

H. All required pipe sleeves shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor unless noted otherwise in the detailed specifications or on the plans. Pipe sleeves shall project 1 inch above the top surface of concrete floors.

I. Immediately before erection, all pipe, valves and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter. After erection, all lines shall be thoroughly blown out or washed out before placing in service.

END OF SECTION 11300

4752.02 7 11300 SECTION 11375 – SLUDGE DIGESTER MECHANICAL MIXER

PART 1 – GENERAL

Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install equipment including mechanical sludge mixer as specified herein.

FIRE PROTECTION IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT AND COLLECTION FACILITIES:

All equipment shall be designed and arranged to comply fully with provisions of NFPA 820, “Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities”, relative to hazardous environments. All wiring methods, enclosures, options and accessories required to comply fully with NFPA 820 shall be included in the bid.

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 sections required in connection with piping.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete work.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 9 sections for painting.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 11 sections for equipment associated with the project and for interconnections with equipment supplied under this section.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections for electrical and controls.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Extend of the sludge digester mechanical equipment includes the furnishing and installing of all equipment and accessories required for one central mechanical sludge draft tube mixer for fixed roof of a primary digester tank. The equipment shall include a sludge mixer, explosion proof motor, a vertical draft tube, hatch cover, seal tube, anchor bolts, and all other appurtenances required or shown on the drawings.

SUBMITTALS:

Seven (7) copies of shop drawings, product data sheets and descriptive material, describing and showing dimensions of all materials and equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to fabrication or manufacture.

4752.02 1 11375

Submittals shall include at least the following: • Certified general arrangement drawings showing all important details and materials of construction, dimensions, loads on supporting structures, and anchor bolt locations. • Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. • Complete data on motors and speed reducers. • Wiring diagrams and electrical schematics for all control equipment to be furnished. • Complete descriptive data for the mixer including performance curves. The mixer speed shall be based on hydraulic data obtained from full scale tests certified for accuracy by an independent engineer. A copy of such certification shall be submitted. • Calculations showing critical shaft speeds and maximum torsional stresses in the shaft. Calculations shall include maximum shaft deflections. Maximum shaft deflections shall be less than 1/8 inch between the bearings and less than 1/4 inch at the impeller in a jammed impeller condition. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered Professional Engineer. • Interference diagram as specified. • A written description of shop testing to be performed, including test equipment and methods. • Prior to shipment of the mixer, complete test reports shall be submitted, including data, calculations graphs, and results.

See notes on contract drawings for coordination of dimensions between equipment suppliers and between equipment and support structures.

WARRANTY:

ALL warranties (contractor and manufacturer) shall commence on the date of recordation of the final acceptance of the project. The General Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and others providing warranties to coordinate the terms of the specified warranties upon the date of recordation of final acceptance. All cost associated with extensions of warranties as required to meet this requirement shall be included in the base bid.

Manufacturer’s Warranty:

Manufacturer shall warranty all new equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will replace or repair, F.O.B. its factories or other location designated by it, any part or parts returned which have failed under normal use and service by the Owner within five (5) years following recordation of final acceptance. Such repair or replacement shall be free of charge for all items except for those items such as v-belts and the like that are consumable and normally replaced during maintenance, with respect to which, repair or replacement shall be subject to a pro-rata charge based upon an estimate of the percentage of normal service life realized from the part. The manufacturer’s obligation under this warranty is conditioned upon its receiving prompt notice of claimed defects, which shall in no event be later than thirty days following expiration of the warranty period, and is limited to repair or replacement as aforesaid.

4752.02 2 11375

QUALITY ASSURANCE

The equipment supplier shall have at least 10 years’ experience in the design, application, and supply of mechanical sludge mixers in wastewater treatment plants, and shall submit a list of not less than 50 operating installations as evidence of meeting the experience requirement. The sludge mixer shall be WesTech Model SMI1 Extreme Duty Mechanical Sludge Mixer, Ovivo Eimix draft tube mixer, OTI, Inc. or pre-approved equal.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

MIXER DESIGN CRITERIA:

Minimum recirculation rate (gpm\mixer): 9250 Digester volume (gallons): 185,000 Minimum mixer HP: 7.5 Draft tube diameter (inches): 27

GENERAL:

The sludge mixing system shall be of the removable mechanical mixer type with dimensions as shown on the drawings. The mixer shall be designed to thoroughly mix the tank contents and prevent stratification at a tank turnover rate of not greater than 45 minutes.

Materials: All steel plates shall conform to ASTM A36. All structural steel shapes with shape series of M, MT, S, ST, C, MC, and L shall conform to ASTM A36. Structural shapes W, WT, and HP shall conform to ASTM A992/ A572. All pipe to be ASTM A53, grade B. All square and rectangular tubing to be ASTM A500, grade B. All steel members in contact with liquids or digester gas shall be of ¼” minimum thickness.

Fabrication: Shop fabrication and welding of structural members shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the “Structural Welding Code”, AWS D1.1, of the American Welding Society. All welded connections shall develop the full strength of the connected elements and all joined or lapped surfaces shall be completely seal welded. Intermittent welding shall not be allowed.

Edge Grinding: Sharp projections of cut or sheared edges of ferrous metals shall be ground to a radius by multiple passes of a power grinder as required to ensure satisfactory coating adherence.

Shop Surface Preparation/Coating: The draft and seal tube steel surfaces will be shipped bare steel to be coated in the field. The motor shall be coated with the supplier’s standard enamel paint system.

4752.02 3 11375

The sludge mixers shall be finish painted as per Section 09900 Painting.

Structural Design: The ratio of unbraced length to least radius of gyration (slenderness ratio) shall not exceed the values listed in the AISC manual. All steel design shall be in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, latest edition, and the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition.

DIGESTER SLUDGE MIXER:

Design Features: Each mixer shall be a single shaft axial flow type suitable for mixing digested sludge, including fibrous materials. The mixer shall be specially designed so as to prevent fibers from collecting on impeller blades. The mixer shall be capable of reverse flow.

Mixer Assembly: Each mixer assembly shall consist of a drive unit, vertical impeller shaft, bearings, grease seals, mechanical seal, mounting flange, shaft housing, deflector, impeller, seal tube, and draft tube. The mixer assembly shall be removable as a unit without disturbing the sludge mixer draft tube, without removing the seal tube, and without gas pressure inside the digester.

Drive Unit: The motor drive assembly shall consist of an explosion proof reversible motor driving the vertical impeller shaft through belts and sheaves adequately sized for the startup and operating torques.

The motor shall be TEFC squirrel cage, induction type, ball bearing heavy duty unit of ample power for starting and operating the mechanism without overload and with a service factor of 1.15. The motor shall be designed for operation in a Class 1, Division 1, Group D (methane) hazardous area. 120 V, Single phase, space heaters for the same hazardous area shall be provided to avoid deterioration of motor during storage prior to installation.

Power supply to the equipment shall be as required by the owner.

Impeller shaft and bearings: The impeller shaft shall be of solid cold rolled steel. Bearings shall consist of an upper anti friction, grease lubricated tapered roller bearing capable of taking thrust loads in both upward and downward directions and a lower grease lubricated, spherical roller bearing. The upper bearing shall be mounted at the top of the impeller shaft and shall be replaceable without removing the mixer assembly from the draft tube. The upper bearing shall be designed to withstand all applied axial and radial loads. The lower bearing shall be contained within a separate rigid housing mounted above the flow deflector keeping the bearing assembly out of the liquid flow.

The lower bearing shall be designed to withstand all applied radial loads and shall allow differential thermal expansion in the shaft. The upper bearing shall include lip type grease seals, while the lower bearing shall include an “HDDF” mechanical seal to protect the bearings from the entry of any foreign material. The bearings shall be either oil or grease lubricated. For grease lubricated bearings, a grease line shall be provided for lubrication of the lower bearing from the

4752.02 4 11375

top of the mixer. A grease return line shall be provided with the lower bearing housing to a spent grease reservoir located at a point above the mixer mounting plate for monitoring of spent grease. Designs that waste spent lubricant into the interior of the digester shall not be considered. All bearings shall have a minimum 15 year L10 life under maximum load conditions.

Impeller: There shall be provided a three blade impeller mounted at the end of the vertical drive shaft. The design shall allow for regular reversing of rotation. The mixing impeller shall be constructed of cast iron and shall be of the screw type designed to prevent the accumulation of any stringy or fibrous material while pumping in either direction. The impeller shall be capable of pumping either upward or downward with equal efficiency. The impeller shall be Class 40 cast iron. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced to a maximum of 0.004” displacement.

Shaft Deflector: A steel flow deflector shall be mounted on the sludge mixer and be designed to shield the lower bearing by laterally deflecting the flow when pumping in the upward direction.

Shaft Housing: An integral structural housing shall extend from the mixer mounting flange to the lower bearing housing. The design shall be self-centering and capable of resolving all loads exerted on the mixer. Designs that rely on centering devices for alignment and structural support shall not be considered.

Seal Tube: The seal tube shall be of gas tight all welded construction. It shall be rigidly anchored to the concrete digester tank. The bottom of the seal tube shall be located a minimum of 6” below the low operating liquid level in order to provide a liquid seal to prevent gas from escaping and depressurizing the digester when the mixer is removed for service.

Anti Vortexing Baffles: Anti-vortexing baffles shall be rigidly mounted above and below the mixer impeller. The baffles shall be adequately sized to prevent vortexing in and around the impeller.

Vertical Draft Tube: The draft tube shall be fabricated from minimum 1/4 inch steel. It shall have a flared top and bottom. The bottom of the draft tube shall be supported with steel pipe legs designed for vertical and horizontal loads and anchored to the floor of the tank. The draft tube deflection under operating conditions shall not exceed 3/16 inch.

The mixer manufacturer shall supply a structural fabricated steel mixer mounting port designed to be installed to the mounting ring. The mounting port shall be provided with the necessary flange bolts and gaskets. The port shall be designed to support and transfer all dynamic and dead loads imposed by the mixer to the cover.

Flange gaskets shall be closed-cell neoprene.

Balance: All rotating parts shall be machined and supplied in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practical. The mixer shall have a vibration displacement (peak to peak) as measured at any point on the machine of no more than 7 mils under normal operating conditions.

4752.02 5 11375

The manufacturer shall submit an interference diagram showing the three appliance exciting frequencies: The mixer shaft speed, the mixer shaft speed times three (the number of impeller blades), and the motor speed. Torsional frequencies must be avoided by at least 15% of the speed required by the mixer to meet the specified operating conditions. Lateral critical frequencies shall be avoided by at least 20%

Vibration in excess of specified limits shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment.

Bearing Lubrication:

Automatic Grease System (for grease lubricated bearings): An automated grease pump system will be provided to maintain consistent greasing of the upper and lower bearings. The grease pump shall include an explosion-proof motor, grease lines to all mixers connected to it, a stainless steel or fiberglass-reinforced grease reservoir, and an initial supply of grease.

Oil Lubrication System: The lower bearing shall be provided with a continuous and automatic lubrication system. The system shall be designed to constantly provide positive pressure, using the lubricant, at the lower bearing and mechanical seal assembly. There shall be provided a manual assembly which shall allow maintenance and / or operations personnel to manually inspect the amount of lubricant in each mixer without de-pressurization of the tank, without changing the tank liquid level, and without removing the mixer from operation.

Electrical: The equipment supplier shall furnish all electrical items specifically called for in this specification section. The contractor shall supply all other electrical items required to place the equipment into service. The contractor shall supply and install all field wiring required including but not limited to proper size wire, conduit, fittings, and supports.

An explosion proof push button station shall be provided for mounting adjacent to the sludge mixer. The push button station shall be suitable for forward-stop-reverse operation.

An automatic impeller rotation reversing unit shall be provided in a NEMA 4 enclosure to maximize mixer operation and life of the mixer. It shall consist of Programmable Relays and necessary wiring to provide for proper operation. One timer shall be provided with a 0 30 hour adjustable range and shall stop the motor after a predetermined time interval. A time relay shall not allow the motor to be started in the reverse direction until the motor rotation has stopped completely. A 0 30 hour adjustable timer shall allow reverse operation of the unit for a predetermined time period. At the end of the period, the mixer shall return to forward rotation with the proper time delay when switching from reverse to forward. There shall also be provided a NEMA 7 local control station with forward/reverse switch and on/off/auto switch

Refer to Division 16 for additional requirements related to the electrical, controls and instrumentation.

4752.02 6 11375

Anchorage and Fasteners: All anchor bolts shall be a minimum of 3/4" diameter and made of type 316 stainless steel. The equipment supplier shall furnish all anchor bolts, nuts, and washers required for the equipment.

All structural, flange, and assembly fasteners shall be made of type 316 stainless steel. The equipment supplier shall furnish all fasteners required for the assembly of the equipment.

Shop Testing: The manufacturer shall perform shop testing as specified herein.

• Dynamic balance impeller to not more than 4 mils vibration. • Certify shaft to not more than 0.006" total indicator runout as measured at the impeller end of the shaft. • Run the mixer in a vertical position for a minimum of two hours forward and two hours reverse. Confirm temperature of bearing housings of not more than 150 degrees Fahrenheit. • Check shaft housing for pinhole leaks and repair if necessary. • The upper and lower bearing housings shall be tested for leaks. o Upper bearing housing: Apply pressure at 5 psi. o Lower bearing housing: Apply pressure at 10 psi. o Verify that pressure is held continuously for a minimum of 30 minutes. • Make all final adjustments as required prior to shipment.

Alternative Shop Testing: When performance curves as required above are not available, the manufacturer shall perform shop testing as specified herein. • Shop testing on the actual mixing unit(s) shall be performed at the factory to demonstrate that the equipment meets the specified performance requirements. • Each unit shall be tested to determine mechanical integrity. • The personnel in charge of the testing shall be authorized representatives of the equipment manufacturer familiar with operation of the equipment and shall have previous experience in conducting tests of the type specified. • Tests shall be performed on the mixer for shaft rpm, power draw, upward and downward pumping rate, and vibration. In addition, shop tests shall be performed on the pumping rate of the mixers using a suitable flow meter. • Water shall be used as the test medium. • Performance curves shall be certified by an independent professional engineer.

Shop Assembly and Inspection: The equipment specified herein shall be factory assembled as far as practical to verify that all mating parts can be field assembled. All mating parts shall be trial fit and match marked. The manufacturer shall submit certification of shop trial assembly and photographs of assembly before shipment. The customer and installing contractor shall be given the opportunity to witness the shop assembly.

Shop inspection shall be performed by a qualified inspector and certified by the manufacturer. The inspection shall be documented and all deficiencies noted corrected, re-inspected and final completion formally authorized. Final shipment authorization shall be by the manufacturer to

4752.02 7 11375 ensure completion of all fabrication, assembly, and inspection requirements. Inspection records and evidence of inspector qualification shall be submitted to the owner upon request.

PART 3 – EXECUTION:

The Contractor shall install all of the equipment for the sludge digesters as shown on the plans and specified herein in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

The equipment shall be installed properly to provide a complete working system. Installation shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Manuals: The equipment supplier shall furnish three (3) copies of operation and maintenance manuals which will be retained at the installation site to assist plant operators. The manual shall include the supplier’s erection and assembly recommendations, a complete parts list, and a list of recommended spare parts.

Field Service: The equipment supplier shall provide the service of a qualified representative for 2 trips and 4 days to inspect the mechanism installation, assist in start up, and instruct plant personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the mechanism.

END OF SECTION 11375

4752.02 8 11375

SECTION 11380 – SLUDGE DIGESTER BOILER/HEAT EXCHANGER

PART 1 – GENERAL

Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install equipment including boiler, heat exchanger, recirculation pumps, gas equipment, etc. for the existing two stage digester(s) as detailed on the plans and specifications herein.

STATE FIRE MARSHAL:

The contractor shall complete and submit the Boiler Installation form to the Louisiana Office of State Fire Marshal prior to commencing construction and shall pay all associated costs. Upon completion of construction, the Contractor shall arrange with the Louisiana Office of State Fire Marshal for a boiler inspection and pay all fees. Contractor shall include all associated costs in their base bid.

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 sections required in connection with piping.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete work.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 9 sections for painting.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 11 sections for equipment associated with the project and for interconnections with equipment supplied under this section.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections for electrical and controls.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Extent of the sludge digester equipment includes removal of existing boiler, heat exchanger and other ancillary equipment as noted on the drawings, furnishing and installing all items of equipment and accessories required for the waste gas system, gas control equipment, water and sludge recirculating pumps, sludge heating equipment, flare, gas regulators, flame arrestors, condensate/sediment traps, flare assembly and other items noted on the plans and specified herein.

The digester gas system is a low pressure system with the following typical operating ranges.

4752.02 1 11380

• The boiler operates with a boiler gas pressure of 4.5” WC to 6” WC. • The pressure relief valve on the dome is set for 8” WC. • The flare is set is set at 7.5” WC.

SUBMITTALS:

See notes on contract drawings for coordination of dimensions between equipment suppliers and between equipment and support structures.

WARRANTY:

PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

Equipment shall include:

Waste Gas System & Gas Control Equipment (Specified in 11390) Recirculation Pump Sludge Heating Equipment Pressure Gauges Effluent Water Pressure Regulator Sludge Recirculation Pump (Specified in Section 11300)

Boiler manufacturer shall provide pressure regulators, flame arrestors, and gas control equipment with the boiler for both the natural gas and digester gas lines.

SLUDGE RECIRCULATION PUMP:

Refer to Section 11300 – Sludge Pump.

SLUDGE HEATING EQUIPMENT:

Boiler – Heat Exchanger: One (1) combination boiler and heat exchanger assembled into one integral unit shall be provided for heating of digester sludge. The rated capacity of the sludge heat exchanger shall be 370,000 BTU/hr. and the output capacity of the boiler shall be a minimum of 375,000 BTU/hr. The boiler shall be a fire tube boiler and the heat exchanger shall

4752.02 2 11380 be concentric tube type. The two units shall be arranged so there is not transmission of heat from the boiler water to the tube jacket water by conduction of thermal circulation between sludge heating cycles. The heat exchanger shall be capable of heat transfer at rated capacity with a near temperature differential of the jacket water and sludge not to exceed 55°F. Incoming sludge temperature is assumed to 95°F; water inlet temperature is assumed to be 150°F

The combination unit shall be shipped from the factory completely assembled, wired, piped, and tested so that only the following connections are required in the field for a complete operating unit:

a) Boiler make up water connection – ¾” NPT b) Sludge gas connection – 1 1/2” NPT c) Natural gas connection – 1” NPT d) Vents from pressure regulators – 2 ¼” NPT e) Sludge supply and return connections – 4” 150# Flanges f) Connections between sludge temperature sensor and control panel on boiler. g) Motor leads from control panel to sludge recirculating pump. h) Power feeder rated 20 amperes at 115 volts, single phase, 60 hertz. i) Remote alarm.

A manufacturer’s data report as required by the provisions of the ASME Code Rules for both the boiler and heat exchanger is to be furnished to the Engineer for transmittal to the Owner. This form must be signed by a qualified inspector, holding a National Board Commission, certifying that the boiler and heat exchanger construction conforms to the latest ASME Code applicable to these units. The appropriate ASME certification symbols shall be stamped on the nameplate of the boiler and heat exchanger.

The combination unit shall meet or exceed all applicable requirements of the NFPA Standards, National Electric Code and FIA recommendation. Components shall be UL and FM approved where applicable. Electric gas valves shall be approved by UL and AGA.

The boiler and heat exchanger along with all associated components and controls shall be assembled in the equipment manufacturer’s shop. A shop test shall be conducted to include but not limited to” firing the boiler on natural gas; checking/adjusting all operating and safety controls, pumps, and test list shall be submitted with the manufacturer’s approval material, and completed shop test results shall be submitted to the Engineers for review and acceptance before the unit is shipped. The equipment manufacturer shall also notify the Engineers at least 15 days before the shop test is scheduled so that the Owner or its representative may arrange to witness the shop test if they desire.

4752.02 3 11380

Painting: The boiler shall be factory coated with the manufacturer’s standard heat resistant coating. The heat exchanger shall be coated in accordance with the following schedule:

Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

Coating: Shell and internal framework shall receive the following before insulation is installed: 1st coat - Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness Exterior 1st coat - Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness (beige) 2nd coat Tnemec N66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness (blue)

MIN. 8 MILS TOTAL DRY FILM THICKNESS (exterior)

The manufacturer will provide sufficient paint for post installation touch-up painting in the field.

Boiler: The boiler shall be a fire tube boiler of dry back designed and rated not less than 30 psig. The tubes shall be No. 13 gauge boiler having a minimum wall thickness of 0.095”. The tubes shall be rolled and beaded into tube sheets having a minimum thickness of 3/8”. The furnace shall be fabricated from seamless steel boiler tubing of suitable diameter, electrically welded between tube sheets and fitted with refractory on the burner end to protect the burner parts and promote efficient combustion. The total fired surface shall be not less than 52 square feet.

Both the head and back plates shall be accessible and readily removable for inspection. The back plate of each boiler shall be fitted with a sight port for visually checking the flames. The boiler shall be wrapped with a minimum of 1 ½” of glass wool blanket insulation and enclosed with No. 14 gauge steel paneling. The boiler shall be supplied with plugged 2” NPT connections to permit connecting future hot water supply and return piping if desired. The boiler shall be complete with a low water cut-off wired to the combustion control for shut down and alarm, a ASME rated pressure relief valve, a compression tank with the minimum capacity of 15 gallons and a water level gauge, a make-up water regulator, a well type thermometer, and a pressure gauge.

Boiler manufacturer shall provide a 3/8” opening with removable cap to permit insertion of a thermometer in the stack of the boiler. Opening shall be located in the spot deemed critical by the boiler manufacturer for checking proper boiler operating temperature. Boiler manufacturer shall recommend stack temperature at the above location for proper boiler operation. Boiler manufacturer shall also provide guidance as to the quality of boiler water to be used.

Boiler Burner: The burner furnished shall be of the forced draft design with only combustion air being furnished to the burner by a high pressure blower, the quantity controlled by a motor operated damper. The motor operator for the damper shall also control a fuel control valve

4752.02 4 11380 through connecting linkage. The output of the burner shall modulate between low fire and high fire so as to maintain a boiler water temperature of 180°F. The burner shall efficiently burn sewage gas and natural gas individually or simultaneously without attention from operating personnel. The pilot shall be connected for 100% natural gas operation.

Burner Controls: In addition to the heat rate control specified above the burner shall be provided with all automatic controls required for the automatic burning of either sewage gas, natural gas or a blend of the two gases. Upon depletion of available sewage gas, the auxiliary supply of natural gas shall be automatically admitted to the burner to make up the gas deficiency until sufficient sewage gas shall be fully utilized. The burner shall be supplied with gas pressure regulators for each gas supply and pilot gas, a low pressure check valve in the sewage gas supply piping, adjustable gas orifice valves as required and strainers in each gas supply line. Pressure regulators, flame traps and explosion relief valves for both natural gas and sludge gas together with all controls shall be supplied with the unit. The unit shall be furnished complete with a combustion and safety control. The control shall be contained in a NEMA 12 control cabinet and shall consist of all burner controls, blower motor relay, timers and other appurtenances, completely wired to the necessary remote controls and valves through a numbered terminal block furnished with the panel.

Positive control of the fuel supply shall be maintained by an electronic flame protection device, operating on the lead sulfide principal similar and equal to the Fireye programming control unit as manufactured by Combustion Control Division, a UV flame scanner or pre-approved equal. The control system shall provide a 30 second pre-purge period before any starting cycle. A substantial pilot must be established before admission of gas on to the burner. In the event of flame failure, low water level, or the operation of any other safety device, the fuel supply valve shall be positively closed and an alarm sounded. An isolated contact that will close under any alarm condition shall be provided for remote alarm actuations. See Operations: section of these specifications for additional information on gas feed control requirements.

Boiler Stack Insulation: Insulation shall be Kaylo-10 asbestos free block insulation, consisting of rigid hydrous calcium silicate, using staggering joints. Apply over 1 inch ribbed metal lave to form air space between boiler stack and block. Insulation shall be finished with a trowel coat of insulating cement and further covered with 26 gage stainless steel sheet metal casing above roof (26 Ga. Galv. Sheet metal inside boiler room). Boiler manufacturer shall provide a weather proof hood for the stack installation above the roof. The boiler stack shall be of sufficient length to extend above the roof line as per regulations.

Heat Exchanger: The sludge heat exchanger shall consist of a series of 4” ID Schedule 40 steel pipe sludge tubes concentrically placed within 6” ID Schedule 40 steel pipe water jackets. The tubes shall be joined by sturdy, neoprene-gasketed end castings so designed that any leakage occurring will be to the exterior of the heat exchanger. The tubes shall be supported by ¾” thick steel end sheets provided with heavy structural steel members serving as boiler supports and framing for the exterior steel paneling. The sludge and water tubes shall be independently removable and so arranged as to prevent contamination of the heating water by any material circulated through the sludge tube. The sludge tube end castings shall be removable to permit tube inspection without having to drain the jacket water. All sludge passageways shall be

4752.02 5 11380 designed to pass 3” spheres. The inlet and outlet connection shall be of cast iron and shall have 6” jacket water piping. In addition, these castings shall have connections fitted with well type thermometers for sludge and water inlet and outlet temperatures. The entire sludge water tube bundle shall be wrapped independently of the boiler with a minimum of 1 ½” of blanket insulation. The heat exchanger shall have not less than 6 sludge tubes that provide a total heated sludge area of not less than 39 square feet. (Inside area of tubes). A pressure release device shall be provided that will provide over-pressure protection if the unit should be fired with the sludge supply and return lines blocked. Temperature gauges shall be provided on the influent and effluent pipes if the heat exchanger (sludge) and the boiler (water) and on the boiler itself.

Water Tube Circulating Pump: The unit shall be provided with a centrifugal pump to provide circulation of heated water through the water jackets.

The pump shall be mounted in an accessible part of the heating water system on the unit and shall have a minimum capacity of 80 GPM and shall be driven by a minimum of a 1/2 HP motor, rated for 460 volts, 3 phase, 6 hertz. The contractor shall coordinate all requirements for the motor provided by boiler manufacturer at no direct pay.

Circulating Water Control Valve: The unit shall be provided with a thermostatic limit valve placed in the jacket water circulating line on the unit to maintain a boiler water temperature of 180°F, regardless of the load on the boiler, so that a sufficient supply of water will always be provided for sludge heating and, also, to prevent condensate corrosion of the boiler. The control valve shall also limit the sludge heat exchanger jacket water from exceeding a temperature of 150 °F.

Auxiliary Electrical Equipment: The unit shall have installed thereon the maximum of two (2) panels for electrical control equipment. One panel may be the combustion control equipment heretofore specified. The other panel shall be a NEMA 12 enclosure, enclosing the following devices:

a) Incoming power (460 volts, 3 phase) fused disconnect or circuit breaker. b) Control power transformer to provide all 120 volt, 60 hertz requirements of the unit. c) Magnetic starter with overload heaters and relay for sludge recirculation pump. d) Magnetic starter with overload heaters and relay for water tube circulation pump. e) Local alarm system for unit. f) Control switches for sludge recirculation pump, water tube circulating. g) Basic control point shall be a pipewell extending into side of digester. Recording thermometer and thermoswitch shall be actuated by the temperature in the pipe well. The thermo-switch shall actuate the sludge recirculation pump starter and also the jacket pump if the system requires one. An indicating thermometer shall be provided for check of jacket water temperature. The recording thermometer is existing and shall be connected to the existing boiler control panel to control the boiler. The control panel shall be equipped with a new thermoswitch as required. Refer to electrical plans for connection to existing thermometer.

4752.02 6 11380

h.) Temperature controllers shall be capable of sending a 4-20 mA signal to the wastewater plants SCADA system.

All internal wiring of the panels shall be complete with wiring to controls and valves through numbered terminal blocks. Wiring between devices on the unit and the panels and between the panels shall be furnished complete. All wiring shall be in conduit, the use of flexible conduit allowed where required for movement or maintenance. Terminals shall be provided for external field wiring. The temperature sensing device for detecting the temperature of the sludge in the digester shall be furnished complete with a 304 stainless steel well designed for installation in the 12” thick concrete wall of the digester.

Operation: The following operational schemes shall be provided in the boiler control panel. The sludge recirculation pump will be provided with two electric actuators to allow the sludge pump to recirculate sludge and bypass the heat exchanger. The control panel will include controls for the two electric actuators with “Local” and “Bypass” switches.

• With the sludge recirculation pump and water tube circulating pump selector switches on “Auto”, the sludge temperature sending device will control both pumps to maintain digester temperature and recirculate the sludge through the heat exchanger. • With sludge recirculating pump switch on “Hand” and water circulating switch on “Auto”, sludge pump will run continuously and sludge temperature sending device controls water pump operation to maintain digester temperature. • With the valve actuator switches in the “Local” mode all control will be at the actuator. • With the valve actuator switches in the “Bypass” mode, the sludge recirculating pump switch on “Hand” and water circulating switch on “Auto”, sludge pump will run continuously and sludge temperature sending device controls water pump operation to maintain digester temperature. When the water tube circulating pump turns off, the bypass valves will operate to allow the sludge to bypass the heat exchanger. When the digester temperature drops and the water recirculating pumps is called to come, the bypass valves will operate to return sludge flow through the heat exchanger.

Water pump starter shall be interlocked with sludge recirculation pump starter so sludge pump must be running before the water pump will operate when on automatic control.

Sludge and water pump can be controlled manually at any time.

Digester gas feed operation shall be as follows: • The fuels, and their blend ratios, will be field adjustable. They will be controlled based on the following • Natural Gas only may be selected • If Digester gas is selected, o Digester gas only can be selected (will automatically switch over to natural gas only if digester pressure drops to 4.5” WC) o 75% digester gas, 25% natural gas can be selected (field adjustable) (will automatically switch over to natural gas only if digester pressure is too low)

4752.02 7 11380

o 25% digester gas, 75% natural gas can be selected (field adjustable) (will automatically switch over to natural gas only if digester pressure is too low) • Once the digester gas pressure is reaches 5.5” WC the boiler will automatically switch back from natural gas to the digester gas selection

Gas controller shall be Fireye PPC-4000 controller.

Service: Boiler-heat exchanger manufacturer shall furnish competent personnel for a period of four (4) days to inspect installation, place equipment in operation and train Owner’s operators.

Manufacturer: Boiler-heat exchanger complete shall be as manufactured by Westech Engineering Co., Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah, Walker Process or equal.

Maximum overall height of boiler-heat exchanger combination mounted one above the other with housekeeping pad shall not exceed 7’-6”. Note some appurtenances not located near the support beam can exceed the minimum clearance. See Drawings for locations of height restrictions.

PIPING:

Refer to Section 02719 – Piping.

PIPE FITTINGS:

Flanged cast iron fittings, 3” and larger shall be furnished for above ground service where scheduled and/or as shown on the drawings and shall be long radius body, conforming to all requirements of ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110). Bolt circle and bolt holes of flanges on cast iron fittings shall match those of Class 125 flanges shown in ANSI B16.1 and can be joined to Class 125, ANSI B16.1. All cast iron fittings shall be furnished with a cement mortar lining in accordance with ANSI A21.4 (AWWA C104) latest revision. All above ground fittings shall be furnished uncoated on the outside.

All fittings for gas piping, except in digesters, shall be screwed black steel fittings conforming to ASTM A 234, Grade WPA, Schedule 40.

Fittings for city water piping shall be solder type copper fittings. All pipe installed through concrete walls and floors shall require wall sleeves.

All PVC pipe shall have Schedule 80 PVC black fitting with welded joints.

PRESSURE GAUGES:

The Contractor shall furnish and install where indicated on the plans, 4 ½” diameter pressure gauges with ½ inch male connections and 12 inch globe or needle shut off valves. Pressure gauges shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft (Maxisafe) or Ametek (U.S. Gauge) or approved

4752.02 8 11380 equal. Pressure range on each gauge shall be as indicated on the plans. Each gauge shall be provided with a snubber and diaphragm seal.

EFFLUENT WATER PRESSURE REGULATOR:

Where shown on the plans, the Contractor shall furnish and install a water pressure regulator. Regulator shall be 1” and have a maximum inlet pressure of 100 psi and an outlet pressure of 15 psi. A strainer shall be provided ahead of the regulator. Regulator shall be a 1” Mueller H-9300 Series with a 1” Mueller “Y” type strainer or similar as manufactured by GA Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania or equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION:

The Contractor shall install all of the equipment for the sludge digesters as shown on the plans and specified herein in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Prior to any boiler work, the contractor shall obtain permit from the Office of State Fire Marshal boiler section. Upon completion of work, the contractor shall coordinate the certification of the boiler installation from the Office of State Fire Marshal boiler section. The contractor shall coordinate the initial annual inspection of the boilers between the owner (user agency) and the Office of the State Fire Marshal.

Provide testing, and starting of machine, and instruct the Owner in its proper operation and maintenance.

Contractor shall coordinate start-up with owner. Owner’s representative shall be available during start-up at owners convenience.

Provide unit with factory start-up. Contractor shall submit start-up documentation to Engineer for review. Start-up documentation shall be signed by owner.

Provide remote emergency stop push button located near exit door. Interlock push button with operation of boilers.

Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION DETAILS: All miscellaneous piping and materials required for a complete installed system shall be furnished, including the following:

A. Small piping, fittings, etc., which are shown diagrammatically on the plans shall be furnished and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, even though the detailed routing of such lines may not be shown on the plans. The Contractor shall exercise good judgment and work with the Engineer and Owner in the location and routing of these lines.

4752.02 9 11380

C. The Contractor shall install all traps in accessible locations below the apparatus to be drained. Traps shall be installed on supports above the floor level, if possible.

D. All openings for vents, drains, instruments and other similar connections made after the piping system is erected shall be drilled; no burning will be permitted.

E. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor and materials to calibrate all local mounted thermometers, pressure gauges and pressure switches installed under this Contract.

F. All centrifugal pumps shall be started with temporary suction strainers furnished, installed and removed by this Contractor.

G. The plans show dimensions for valves, fittings and pipe lines. If the valves, fittings, etc., actually furnished differ in dimensions from those shown, the lengths of pipe, filler pieces, etc., shall be altered by the Contractor to compensate for these changes.

H. After erection of piping and after the pipe has been in normal service at least ten (10) days, all flanges shall be retightened.

I. All required pipe sleeves shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor unless noted otherwise in the detailed specifications or on the plans. Pipe sleeves shall project 1” above the top surface of concrete floor.

J. All valve hand wheels and rising stems shall be positioned so as not to interfere with passageways and walkways. Hand wheels shall be accessible.

K. Immediately before erection, all pipe, valves and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter. After erection, all lines shall be thoroughly blown out or washed out before placing in service.

The Contractor shall provide the necessary piping connections, valves, blinds, etc., as may be required for filling and draining the piping system. The Contractor shall also provide the necessary pump and pumping system for creating the required hydrostatic test pressure. All underground lines shall be tested before backfill is made. All tests shall be observed and approved by the Engineer and/or Owner. All Hydrostatic Tests shall be held at the pressures specified for a minimum of two hours.

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

In addition to the normal Installation, Operation and Maintenance manuals required by contract, a spare manual shall be shipped with the unit in order to allow for proper operation of equipment prior to release of all final Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the end user.

END OF SECTION 11380

4752.02 10 11380

SECTION 11385 – SECONDARY DIGESTER FLOATING COVER

PART 1 – GENERAL

Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install equipment a forty (40) foot diameter floating digester cover for the existing secondary anaerobic digester. The cover shall comprise a complete assembly consisting of rim plates, trusses, purlins, gas dome, gas take-off housing, sampling wells, ceiling plates, roof plates, drain sumps, access hatches, gas hatches, hatch covers, roller assemblies, guide shoes, anti-rotation shoe guides, and pressure relief/vacuum breaker valve with flame arrester.

The cover shall be of the inside guided type with no truss, truss work or frame extending above the top of the digester. Final balancing necessary to account for unbalanced loads shall be established after the cover is completely erected and floating on the liquid in the digester. Ceiling plates shall be submerged at least one-third of the cover radius to provide scum submergence.

FIRE PROTECTION IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT AND COLLECTION FACILITIES:

All equipment shall be designed and arranged to comply fully with provisions of NFPA 820, “Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities”, relative to hazardous environments. All wiring methods, enclosures, options and accessories required to comply fully with NFPA 820 shall be included in the bid.

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 sections required in connection with piping.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete work.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 9 sections for painting.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 11 sections for equipment associated with the project and for interconnections with equipment supplied under this section.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections for electrical and controls.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Extent of the floating cover equipment includes removal of existing cover and appurtenances, existing guide system and other equipment as noted on the drawings,

4752.02 1 11385 furnishing and installing all items of equipment and accessories required for the installation of the cover system including gas piping, gas control equipment and other items noted on the plans and specified herein.

SUBMITTALS:

See notes on contract drawings for coordination of dimensions between equipment suppliers and between equipment and support structures.

WARRANTY:

PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

Equipment shall include:

Floating Cover Guide System Gas Piping and Flexible Stainless Steel Hose Pipe Supports Waste Gas System & Gas Control Equipment (Specified in Section 11390)

Manufacturer: Digester cover shall be as manufactured by Westech Engineering Co., Inc., Walker Process, Ovivio, or preapproved equal.

DESIGN FACTORS:

The cover shall be designed to provide eight (8) inches water column of internal gas pressure that allows a minimum of three (3) inches of freeboard between the static water level and the top of the rim plate while at the design pressure specified below.

The cover rim plate shall be a minimum of three feet high.

Structural shapes and plates shall be fabricated of ASTM A-36 steel. All members and plates shall have 1/4" minimum thickness.

4752.02 1 11385 The steelwork in each cover shall be designed for the actual dead load of the cover and appurtenances and a normal live, wind, snow and vacuum loading of 35 pounds per square foot.

The stress in any member shall not exceed the allowable stresses identified by the latest version of the AISC "Manual of Steel Construction". For maximum cover design strength, the design loads shall be carried by a structural framework consisting of radial trusses, purlins, compression ring, tension ring and structural sections of the skirt plates. Shell or membrane style designs that do not include this framework in the structural design will not be permitted. The manufacturer shall verify the adequacy of the support system to withstand the various design loads by submitting supporting calculations.

CONSTRUCTION:

Each cover shall be provided with not less than eight (8) main trusses fabricated of structural steel sections. Purlins shall be provided to support the roof plates, to transfer loads to the radial trusses, and to provide lateral bracing to the top chord of the trusses at every panel point of the trusses.

The cover manufacturer shall furnish 1/4" steel roof and ceiling plates for field assembly by the Contractor.

Guide System: The guide system shall be designed to provide for uniform vertical travel of the cover from the low position with the cover resting on the corbels to the highest position at maximum gas storage at normal liquid level. The guides shall be designed to prevent the gasholder cover from potential imbalance caused by wind, snow, or point loads throughout the entire cover travel range.

Cast Iron Guide System: The cover shall be provided with four (4) adjustable cast iron rollers with grease lubricated steel shafts. Structural steel guide shoes shall be bolted to the bottom of the rim plates as shown on the equipment manufacturer's drawings. To prevent the cover from rotating, the cover manufacturer shall furnish two (2) structural steel channels that shall be bolted to the digester wall.

Slide Guide System: The cover shall be provided with at least four (4) vertical guides consisting of structural stainless steel members with non-corrosive high density plastic (UHMW) wearing surfaces and structural 304 stainless steel tracking members. Plastic components that shall be exposed to direct sunlight shall be provided with UV inhibitors. The guide assemblies shall be designed such that no routine maintenance or lubrication is required. The cover shall be designed to resist binding during upward or downward travel under any specified conditions.

Gas Collection Dome: The cover shall be provided with a gas dome located at the center of the cover. The dome shall have a gasketed bolt-on cover plate that shall also contain gas take-off housing. The cover plate shall also be provided with a four inch pressure

4752.02 1 11385 relief/vacuum breaker valve with a flame arrester. Pressure relief valve and flame arrestor specified in Section 11390.

Cover Appurtenances: The cover shall include two (2) 8" diameter sampling wells that shall extend below the sludge level in the digester. These sampling wells shall have flanged and hinged quick-opening hatch covers. There shall also be provided two (2) 42" diameter manways with gas-tight covers, for access to the digester tank interior, and one (1) 24" hatch with cover for access to the attic space.

Alternate panel sections of the cover shall be provided with a drain sump and sump pipe.

Ballast: To develop the design operating pressure, concrete ballast blocks shall be properly spaced in the attic space, around the periphery of the cover. The Equipment Manufacturer shall furnish, as an integral part of the cover, necessary beams to hold the ballast blocks in place. Concrete ballast blocks shall be furnished by the installing contractor and shall be of the size, shape, and quantity identified by the equipment manufacturer.

Welding: The cover shall be shop fabricated in assemblies and sections of a size suitable for commercial shipping. The Equipment Manufacturer's shop welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 "Structural Building Code" of the American Welding Society. The Equipment Manufacturer's shop drawings shall clearly show complete information regarding location, type, size, and length of all field welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.1 of the American Welding Society. Special conditions shall be fully explained by notes or details.

The contractor's welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 "Structural Building Code" of the American Welding Society. The Contractor shall perform all field welding in conformance with information shown on the Equipment Manufacturer's drawings regarding location, type, size and length of all welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.1 of the American Welding Society and special conditions as shown by notes and details.

All shop and field welding shall be shielded arc welding and shall conform to the standards of the American Welding Society. All welds, whether done in the shop or the field, shall be such as to conform to the requirements of the design loads.

PART 3 – EXECUTION:

The Contractor shall install all of the equipment for the sludge digesters as shown on the plans and specified herein in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Contractor shall coordinate start-up with owner. Owner’s representative shall be available during start-up at owner’s convenience.

4752.02 1 11385

Erection and Testing: The contractor in accordance with the equipment Manufacturer’s installation drawings and printed instructions shall do all field welding and erection of the cover.

After erection, the cover shall be tested for gas-tightness by filling the tank with water, floating the cover and trapping air beneath the ceiling plates. All external welded seams shall then be checked with a soap solution. All leaks shall be corrected in the field by rewelding. Furnishing the necessary water and testing shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

Piping: All piping and supports in the digester, and to and from the digester, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

Painting: All ferrous surfaces shall be delivered to the jobsite bare metal for field sandblasting and painting.

Anchorage: All anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 304 stainless steel and furnished by the equipment manufacturer. The contractor shall install these items in accordance with installation drawings supplied by the equipment manufacturer.

Service: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish competent personnel to check the completed installation and instruct the owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance for a period of two (2) days on site (exclusive of travel).

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

END OF SECTION 11385

4752.02 1 11385 SECTION 11390 – DIGESTER GAS SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install digester gas system and equipment including pressure relief valves, flame arrestors, waste gas flare, sensors, etc. for the existing two stage digester(s) as detailed on the plans and specifications herein.

FIRE PROTECTION IN WASTEWATER TREATMENT AND COLLECTION FACILITIES:

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 sections required in connection with piping.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete work.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 9 sections for painting.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 11 sections for equipment associated with the project and for interconnections with equipment supplied under this section.

Comply with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections for electrical and controls.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

Extent of the sludge digester equipment includes accessories required for the waste gas system, gas control equipment, gas regulators, flame arrestors, condensate/sediment traps, flare assembly, combustible gas detection sensor, and other items noted on the plans and specified herein.

SUBMITTALS:

4752.02 1 11390

See notes on contract drawings for coordination of dimensions between equipment suppliers and between equipment and support structures.

WARRANTY:

PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

Equipment shall include:

Waste Gas System & Gas Control Equipment

The digester gas system is a low pressure system with the following typical operating ranges.

• The boiler operates with a boiler gas pressure of 4.5” WC to 6” WC. • The pressure relief valve on the dome and cover is set for 8” WC. • The flare is set is set at 7.5” WC.

WASTE GAS SYSTEM & GAS CONTROL EQUIPMENT:

In addition to equipment specified elsewhere herein, the Contractor shall provide and install the following items: (Quantity as shown on the plans).

Manufacturer & Catalog No. Item

Varec 217 12 1 1 A C Wall mounted Manometer pressure and or vacuum gages, graduated from 3” of vacuum of 10” W.C. Graduate scale in inches and tenths. The unit will measure pressure in gas supply line to sludge heating unit. Unit to be equipped with moisture and sediment trap. Mount on the Digester Wall.

Varec SVR-1605B 4” Safety Selector Valve (aluminum/stainless steel construction)

Varec 5811B42S All-weather pressure/vacuum relief valve with flame arrestor

Varec No. 233 03 TG 3” Condensate & Sediment Trap (hot dipped galvanized)

Varec 218 ½” Sight Glass for 233 Condensate & Sediment Trap

4752.02 2 11390

Varec 246AT 6 6 Quart Automatic Drip Trap for 233 Condensate & Sediment Trap

Varec No. 450 02 2 1 S 2” Flame Trap Assembly (natural gas and digester gas systems at boiler inlet. Provided by boiler manufacturer).

Varec 7100 B21TFFOP02 2” Explosion relief valve off boiler (roof)

Varec 440 03 1 2 S 1 3” Back Pressure Regulator and Flame Trap Assembly (at flare)

Varec 246 6 6 Quart manual drip trap (at flare)

Varec 244WL31912017 3” 244 WL flare with automatic pilot system.

*Net Safety Millennium II Combustible gas detector Sensor and transmitter system

*Rosemont 214CRT Temperature Sensor and transmitter model 214C RT CM B1 S4 E, Probe length and adapter as required for installation as per plans.

*Mobrey 9780 Flange Mounted Level Transmitter

*Note: Refer to Electrical and Controls plans and specifications for addition requirements for instruments which are integrated into the Plant SCADA system.

Refer to section 02719 for gas piping materials.

Gas equipment shown on plans is based on items manufactured by Varec Biogas. Equivalent equipment manufactured by Shand & Jurs will be acceptable subject to compliance with these specifications. Any modifications to the plans required to accommodate the gas equipment provided by the contractor shall be included in the base bid and approved by the Engineer.

Boiler manufacturer shall provide pressure regulators, flame arrestors, and gas control equipment with the boiler for both the natural gas and digester gas lines.

Service: Gas system component manufacturer shall furnish competent personnel for a period of two (2) days to inspect installation, place equipment in operation and train Owner’s operators.

PART 3 – EXECUTION:

The Contractor shall install all of the equipment for the sludge digesters as shown on the plans and specified herein in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Provide testing and start-up of equipment and instruct the Owner in its proper operation and maintenance. Contractor shall coordinate start-up with owner. Owner’s representative shall be available during start-up at Owner’s convenience.

4752.02 3 11390

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

END OF SECTION 11390

4752.02 4 11390

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical identification. 3. Touchup painting.

3. DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

4. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-metering equipment.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

5. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

6. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-1 OF 6 1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

C. Coordinate the installation of control wiring with contractor installing motor operated valves, flow meters, sensors and equipment being controlled.

D. Coordinate the installation of cable tray with piping installer and owner.

E. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.

F. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

G. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

I. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.

2. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-2 OF 6 B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

1. Type: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies. 2. Color: Black letters on orange background. 3. Legend: Indicates voltage and cable numbers.

C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick). To be used in control cabinets or equipment cabinets.

D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the following features:

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.

E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.

F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.

G. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.

H. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm), galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 1/4-inch (6-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

I. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

3. EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING

A. Meter Sockets, CT and disconnect : Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.

4. TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-3 OF 6 B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

2. ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.

3. SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

F. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.

J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.

K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-4 OF 6 L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete. 6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. 8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. 9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test load.

4. IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase identification.

E. Tag and label all cables per cable schedule. Label to be within 12" of exterior of terminating point.

F. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches (400 mm), overall, use a single line marker.

G. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

H. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-5 OF 6 5. CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 16050

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-6 OF 6 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

3. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Ground rods.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Material: Copper-clad aluminum, and copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-1 OF 4 G. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.

H. Aluminum Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: 10 strands of No. 14 AWG aluminum conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded aluminum conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Aluminum tape, braided bare aluminum conductors, terminated with aluminum ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.

I. Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows:

1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper conductor. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir, or cypress or cedar.

J. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.

2. CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

3. GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.

1. Size: 3/4 by 120 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. APPLICATION

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells.

D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-2 OF 4 2. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.

C. Install an equipment grounding conductor to all water piping. Provide jumpers where piping is not continuously conductive.

D. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by NEC:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs.

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

3. INSTALLATION

A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.

1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

4. CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps.

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-3 OF 4 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

G. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable

END OF SECTION 16060

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-4 OF 4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.

3. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

B. Conductor Material: stranded conductor.

C. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN, XHHW and SO complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-1 OF 2 D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

2. INSTALLATION

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section " Electrical Identification."

H. Install control cable in conduit outdoors and in cable tray indoors. Secure indoors to piping, structure or steel channel column in a neat and orderly fashion. Refer to detail for additional requirements.

3. CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.

4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

END OF SECTION 16120

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-2 OF 2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

3. DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

4. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

5. QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

6. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with General Contractor.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-1 OF 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

C. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.

D. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

1. Fittings: Compression type.

E. FMC: Aluminum.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.

3. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.

C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

D. LFNC: UL 1660.

4. METAL WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman. 2. Square D.

B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1 3R.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type Flanged-and-gasketed type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-2 OF 5

5. NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman. 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

6. BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

G. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

7. FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors:

1. Exposed: Rigid steel.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-3 OF 5 2. Concealed: Rigid steel. 3. Underground, : RNC non hazardous location, Rigid steel hazardous location 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21).

B. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

C. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

D. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.

2. INSTALLATION

A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through foundations. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover.

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN 27) parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit or rigid steel conduit, before rising above grade.

H. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

I. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

J. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-4 OF 5 K. Terminations:

1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass hazardous location to non-hazardous locations and as indicated on drawings. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

O. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

3. PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

4. CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION 16130

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-5 OF 5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section 16410 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. SUMMARY

A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for the following:

1. Service disconnecting means. 2. Feeder and branch-circuit protection. 3. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and toggle switches used for disconnecting means.

3. DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. RMS: Root mean square.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

4. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Current and voltage ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410-1 OF 4

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit breakers. 3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.

5. QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

6. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Fusible Switches:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.

2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.

2. ENCLOSED SWITCHES

A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410-2 OF 4 B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

3. ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Molded-Case Switch: Molded-case circuit breaker without trip units.

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

4. ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 3. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.

5. FACTORY FINISHES

A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2. INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3. IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410-3 OF 4

4. CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.

B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and indication devices.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

5. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.

6. ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

7. CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION 16410

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410-4 OF 4

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section 16700 - Instrumentation and Controls

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. SUMMARY

A. Provide a complete controls including monitoring, alarms, measurements and control through the existing SCADA system for the boiler, pressure monitors, digester mixer, gas monitor, sludge pump, and actuator valves. It is the contractors responsibility to verify existing conditions of motor control centers(MCC), control panels, instrument panels and existing PLC programming. The contractor shall be responsible from providing a complete point to point schematic diagram of all work indicated in this project. B. The boiler shall be monitor for alarms and status as well as run time. The boiler shall be capable of being shut down through SCADA. C. The pressure sensor shall be monitored per drawings and through SCADA. D. The digester mixer shall be monitored and controlled remotely and through SCADA. There shall be a start stop at the mixer and a Field off Computer switch. E. The gas alarm shall be monitored through SCADA. F. The sludge actuators shall be monitored and controlled remotely and through SCADA. There shall be a start stop and a Field off Computer switch at the actuators. G. The chart recorder for the boiler shall be monitored remotely and through SCADA

2. QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Comply with NFPA 70-Latest edition or edition enforced by state or local code authority.

3. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with general contractor, and owner to provide a complete and operating system.

4. Submittals

A. Product Data: For control equipment, miscellaneous devices, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each control panel and related equipment.

C. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 16700-1 OF 3

2. Relay, terminal block, cable management, control devices and indicator arrangements. 3. Manufacture information relay, terminal block, cable management, control devices and indicator lights. 4. Control wiring diagrams with cable labeling, relays, surge suppressors, terminal numbers, interconnecting cable numbers, etc that make a complete control system. Contractor to provide Autocad files of control wiring when complete. Control wiring to include internal logic and programming date.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Programming and process views: The contractor shall submit all programming sequencing and process view for approval by owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. Pressure Transmitter

A. Provide an in line gas pressure transmitter in the existing pressure line off of the digester tank. The pressure sensor is to measure gas around the 8" of water and provide a 4-20mA signal to the existing SCADA system. The contractor shall provide power to the pressure transmitter. The contractor shall provide additional 4-20mA inputs to the existing SCADA system for this additional input. The contractor shall provide surge protection on the 4-20 mA cables on both ends. The contractor shall provide programing on the existing SCADA system for the pressure monitoring point and the remote sludge control indicated in the drawings. The contractor shall coordinate with the manufacture for all electrical and control requirements. The pressure transmitter shall be Rosemount 3051S series with all necessary options to measure 8" of water on the gas line. Contractor to provide all necessary hardware and connectors to connect to the existing gas line. The pressure transmitter shall have a 10 year stability performance and a 12 year warranty.

2. Boiler

A. The contractor shall remove all of the power and control wiring on the existing boiler and install he power and control wiring to the new boiler. Control is three alarm and status points and chart recorder.

3. Chart Recorder

A. Provide a Honeywell DR4300 Circular Chart Recorder chart recorder. Install as indicated on the drawings and monitor boiler.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. Installation: All equipment shall be installed per manufactures recommended requirements.

2. Field Quality Control

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 16700-2 OF 3

A. Test equipment for proper operation, accuracy, and usability.

END OF SECTION 16700

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 16700-3 OF 3